OWNER'S
MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
The information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.
However, the right to amend specifications without notice or obligation to
incorporate such amendments into vehicles already produced is reserved.
This manual applies to all markets and includes descriptions and explana-
tions of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, some of the
equipment operating descriptions referred to may not apply to the particu-
lar vehicle with which this manual is supplied.
Please refer to the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer for information
regarding current standard and optional equipment levels.
F2
Modification to the original vehicle specification may invalidate the manufacturers warranty and may
adversely affect the safety and durability of the vehicle.
Components which are subject to modification or are added to the original vehicle specification with-
out the express approval of the manufacturer and result in consequential loss or damage are not cov-
ered by the vehicle manufacturers warranty.
Particular attention is drawn to the fitment of replacement road wheels having a different specification
to those installed in production. The electronic power assisted steering system is specifically pro-
grammed to operate only with the road wheels fitted during production. The installation of alternative
specification road wheels may result in the replacement road wheels fouling the vehicle body result-
ing in tyre damage and compromised safety. The installation of after market wheels on vehicles
equipped with TPMS may result in wheel balancing difficulties or malfunction of the TPMS system.
Please refer to the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer before non original specification road wheels
are installed.
This vehicle is fitted with electronically controlled fuel injection or other micro processor controlled
equipment.
It is possible for incorrectly installed two way radio equipment including mobile telephones to adverse-
ly affect these systems.
Before radio equipment of this kind is installed, please contact your Hyundai authorised repairer for
recommendation regarding the suitability of the particular radio equipment concerned and the recom-
mended method of installation and equipment location. Incorrectly installed or unsuitable equipment
which gives rise to incorrect functioning of or damage to electronic vehicle components will not fall
within the scope of the vehicle manufacturers warranty.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO ORIGINAL VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
TWO WAY RADIO INSTALLATION
F3
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
✽
NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the
caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
F4
FOREWORD
Hyundai Motor Company wish to take this opportunity to thank you for purchasing a Hyundai product and to welcome you to the
ever increasing number of discriminating motorists who drive Hyundai vehicles. The advanced engineering and construction meth-
ods employed during both design and production of the Hyundai marque are something of which we are proud, and this commit-
ment to providing a high quality product is supported by a comprehensive after sales and warranty service of which we are equal-
ly proud.
This owner's manual will introduce the operating and maintenance requirements for the vehicle and it is recommended that it is
carefully read to ensure that the maximum performance and durability along with safe and satisfactory operation are obtained. The
recommended routine maintenance servicing along with any running repairs that may be required should be entrusted to a
Hyundai authorised repairer to ensure that only the latest methods and genuine Hyundai replacement parts are used for the con-
tinued reliability, safety and performance of the vehicle.
Should any question or query exist regarding any aspect of your Hyundai please contact the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer
who will be only too pleased to assist wherever possible.
Note : This owners manual should be considered as part of the vehicle and should be kept in the vehicle at all times for ease of
reference.
In the event of the vehicle being sold please ensure that this manual is left in the vehicle for the reference of the new owner.
Copyright 2015 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval
system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai
specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-6 in the
Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety system of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications & Consumer information
Index
table of contents
1
How to use this manual / 1-2
Fuel requirements / 1-3
Vehicle run-in process / 1-6
Introduction
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehi-
cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual. In order
to minimise the chance of death or injury,
you must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you will
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under vari-
ous road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is pro-
vided in the Table of Contents. Use the
index when looking for a specific area or
subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all
information in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections
plus an index. Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
You will find various WARNINGS, CAU-
TIONS, and NOTICES in this manual.
These were prepared to enhance your
personal safety. You should carefully read
and follow ALL procedures and recom-
mendations provided in these WARN-
INGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.
✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-
ful information is being provided.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
13
Introduction
Petrol engine
Unleaded
For the optimal vehicle performance, we
recommend you use unleaded petrol
which has an octane rating of RON
(Research Octane Number) 95 / AKI
(Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher. (Do not
use methanol blended fuels.)
You may use unleaded petrol with an
octane rating of RON 91-94 / AKI 87-90
but it may result in slight performance
reduction of the vehicle.
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED
FUEL, as well as minimise exhaust emis-
sions and spark plug fouling.
Petrol containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of petrol and ethanol
(also known as grain alcohol), and petrol
or gasohol containing methanol (also
known as wood alcohol) are being mar-
keted along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded petrol.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use petrol or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system,
engine control system and emission con-
trol system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or driveability problems
may not be covered by the manufactur-
er’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Petrol or gasohol containing methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental to
the catalytic converter and will
damage the engine control sys-
tem’s oxygen sensor and affect
emission control.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (We rec-
ommend that you consult an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer for details.)
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refuelling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs dri-
vability.
Introduction
41
Other fuels
Using fuels such as;
- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
- MMT (Manganese, Mn) contained fuel,
- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
- Other metalic additives contained fuels,
may cause vehicle and engine damage
or cause plugging, misfiring, poor accel-
eration, engine stalling, catalyst melting,
abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction,
etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
✽
NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or perform-
ance problem caused by the use of these
fuels may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Use of MTBE
HYUNDAI recommends avoiding fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content
2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may
reduce vehicle performance and produce
vapour lock or hard starting.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-
hol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-
formance and damage components of
the fuel system, engine control system
and emission control system.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
unleaded petrol which has an octane rat-
ing of RON (Research Octane Number)
95 / AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher.
For customers who do not use good
quality petrols including fuel additives
regularly, and have problems starting or
the engine does not run smoothly, one
bottle of additives added to the fuel tank
at every 10,000 miles (15,000 km).
Additives are available from your
HYUNDAI authorised repairer along with
information on how to use them. Do not
mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding reg-
istration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-
able.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance prob-
lems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol or fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
15
Introduction
Diesel engine
Diesel fuel
Diesel engine must be operated only on
commercially available diesel fuel that
complies with EN 590 or comparable
standard. (EN stands for "European
Norm"). Do not use marine diesel fuel,
heating oils, or non-approved fuel addi-
tives, as this will increase wear and
cause damage to the engine and fuel
system. The use of non-approved fuels
and / or fuel additives will result in a limi-
tation of your warranty rights.
Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is used in
your vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel
are available, use summer or winter fuel
properly according to the following tem-
perature conditions.
• Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type
diesel fuel.
• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type diesel
fuel.
Watch the fuel level in the tank very care-
fully : If the engine stops through fuel fail-
ure, the circuits must be completely
purged to permit restarting.
Biodiesel
Commercially supplied Diesel blends of
no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly
known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in
your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214
or equivalent specifications. (EN stands
for "European Norm"). The use of biofu-
els exceeding 7% made from rapeseed
methyl ester (RME), fatty acid methyl
ester (FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester
(VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding
7% with biodiesel will cause increased
wear or damage to the engine and fuel
system. Repair or replacement of worn or
damaged components due to the use of
non approved fuels will not be covered by
the manufactures warranty.
CAUTION
Do not let any petrol or water enter
the tank. This would make it neces-
sary to drain it out and to bleed the
lines to avoid jamming the injection
pump and damaging the engine.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the regu-
lated automotive diesel fuel for
diesel vehicle equipped with the
DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur) and
unspecified additives, it can cause
the DPF system to be damaged and
white smoke can be emitted.
CAUTION
• Never use any fuel, whether
diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise,
that fails to meet the latest petro-
leum industry specification.
• Never use any fuel additives or
treatments that are not recom-
mended or approved by the vehi-
cle manufacturer.
No special run-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• Whilst driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly run-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-
cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-
erly.
• Don't tow a trailer/caravan during the
first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of opera-
tion.
VEHICLE RUN-IN PROCESS
16
Introduction
2
Exterior overview (wagon) / 2-2
Exterior overview (sedan) / 2-3
Instrument panel overview / 2-6
Interior overview / 2-8
Engine compartment / 2-9
Your vehicle at a glance
Your vehicle at a glance
22
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (WAGON)
1. Front removable towing hook..............6-31
2. Bonnet ................................................4-48
3. Front windshield wiper ......................4-133
4. Head lamp ........................................4-121
5. Front fog lamp...................................4-129
6. Tyre and wheels..................................7-33
7. Outside rearview mirror ......................4-63
8. Door lock.............................................4-23
OVF014001
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■
■
Front
23
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (SEDAN)
1. Front removable towing hook..............6-31
2. Bonnet ................................................4-48
3. Front windshield wiper ......................4-133
4. Head lamp ........................................4-121
5. Front fog lamp...................................4-129
6. Tyre and wheels..................................7-33
7. Outside rearview mirror ......................4-63
8. Door lock.............................................4-23
OVF014002
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■
■
Front
Your vehicle at a glance
42
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (WAGON)
OVF014003
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■
■
Rear
9. Door lock.............................................4-23
10. Child-protector rear door lock ...........4-27
11. Fuel filler door...................................4-50
12. Roof antenna ..................................4-184
13. High mounted stop lamp...................7-77
14. Rear window defroster....................4-141
15. Rear wiper ......................................4-133
16. Rear combination lamp.....................7-73
17. Rearview camera............................4-119
18. Tailgate handle switch ......................4-29
19. Parking assist system .....................4-104
20. Rear towing hook..............................6-31
25
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (SEDAN)
OVF014004
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■
Rear
9. Doors ..................................................4-23
10. Fuel filler door...................................4-50
11. Rear combination lamp ....................7-73
12. Antenna ..........................................4-184
13. High mounted stop lamp ..................7-77
14. Rear window defroster ...................4-141
15. Rearview camera* ..........................4-119
16. Trunk .................................................4-38
17. Parking assist system* ...................4-104
* : if equipped
Your vehicle at a glance
62
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OVF023002R
27
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Seat warmer/Air ventilation seat ....................................3-11/3-12
2. Front passenger's seat belt warning light....................................3-21
3. Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF indicator ............................3-46
4. Driver's front air bag ..............................................................3-50
5. Driver's knee air bag ..............................................................3-50
6. Passenger's front air bag ......................................................3-50
7. Central door lock/unlock switch..............................................4-24
8. Power tailgate open button ....................................................4-30
9. Horn........................................................................................4-61
10. Instrument cluster ................................................................4-66
11. LCD display button ..............................................................4-71
12. Trip button ............................................................................4-72
13. Parking assist system button..............................................4-104
14. Smart parking assist system button ..................................4-108
15. Hazard warning flasher ......................................................4-120
16. Climate control system ............................................4-142/4-151
17. Centre console storage ......................................................4-167
18. Glove box ..........................................................................4-167
19. Cup holder/Ashtray ..................................................4-172/4-171
20. Power outlet/Cigarette lighter ..................................4-173/4-171
21. Steering wheel audio controls ............................................4-185
22. AUX, USB and iPod............................................................4-174
23. Audio/AVN system ................................4-184/Separate Manual
24. Bluetooth phone controls....................................................4-187
25. Ignition switch or Engine start/stop button ......................5-5/5-9
26. Electric parking brake(EPB) switch ......................................5-45
27. Auto hold control button ......................................................5-50
28. Electronic stability control (ESC) button....................................5-55
29. Cruise control switch/ Speed limiter switch..................5-63/5-67
30. Drive mode button ................................................................5-40
Your vehicle at a glance
82
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Seat..........................................................3-2
2. Inside door handle ................................4-24
3. Power window switch ............................4-44
4. Power window lock switch......................4-47
5. Bonnet release lever ..............................4-48
6. Driver position memory seat ..................4-57
7. Steering wheel ......................................4-59
8. Tilt and telescopic steering control lever ..4-60
9. Heated steering wheel ..........................4-60
10. Outside rearview mirror control............4-64
11. Outside rearview mirror folding............4-64
12. Light switch ........................................4-122
13. Wiper/Washer ....................................4-133
14. Headlight levelling device ..................4-130
15. Instrument panel illumination control
system..................................................4-67
16. Idle Stop and Go (ISG) OFF button ....5-15
17. Manual transaxle shift lever/
Automatic transaxle shift lever/
Dual clutch transmission shift lever
............................................5-21/5-24/5-31
18. Fuse box ..............................................7-44
* : if equipped
OVF021001R-1
The actual design may differ from the illustration.
29
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OVF071002R/OVF071001R
1. Engine oil dipstick............................7-15
2. Engine oil filler cap ..........................7-15
3. Engine coolant reservoir..................7-18
4. Radiator cap ....................................7-19
5. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ..............7-20
6. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir ..7-21
7. Air cleaner .......................................7-22
8. Positive battery terminal ..................7-29
9. Negative battery terminal ................7-29
10. Fuse box........................................7-44
The actual engine installation in your vehicle may differ from the illustration.
■
Petrol (1.6L)
■
Petrol (2.0L)
OVF075003R
1. Engine oil dipstick............................7-15
2. Engine oil filler cap ..........................7-15
3. Engine coolant reservoir..................7-18
4. Radiator cap ....................................7-19
5. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ..............7-20
6. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir ..7-21
7. Fuel filter ..........................................7-21
8. Air cleaner ........................................7-22
9. Positive battery terminal ..................7-29
10. Negative battery terminal ..............7-29
11. Fuse box ........................................7-44
■
Diesel Engine (1.7L)
The actual engine installation in your vehicle may differ from the illustration.
210
Your vehicle at a glance
3
Seat / 3-2
Seat belts / 3-20
Child restraint system / 3-31
Airbag-supplemental restraint system / 3-42
Safety system of your vehicle
Safety system of your vehicle
23
Front seat
(1) Forward and rearward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height*
(4) Lumbar support
(5) Seat warmer*/
Seat warmer with air ventilation*
(6) Head restraint
Rear seat
(7) Seatback folding
(8) Head restraint
(9) Armrest
(10) Seat warmer*
* : if equipped
SEAT
OVF031001R
33
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
- Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust seat
whilst the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap por-
tion of the seat belt snug and low
across the hips. This is the best
position to protect you in case of
an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back as
possible from the steering wheel
whilst maintaining comfortable
control of the vehicle. It is recom-
mended that your chest is at least
10 inches (250 mm) away from
the steering wheel.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly and be sure
there are no other occupants
around the seat. If the seatback is
returned without being held and
controlled, the back of the seat
could spring forward resulting in
accidental injury to a person struck
by the seatback.
WARNING
- Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Do not place
anything under the front seats.
WARNING
- Driver respon-
sibility for front seat pas-
senger
Riding in a vehicle with a front seat-
back reclined could lead to serious
or fatal injury in an accident. If a
front seat is reclined during an
accident, the occupant may slide
under the lap portion of the seat
belt applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result.
The driver must advise the front
passenger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Do not use a sitting cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and passenger. The passenger may
slide under the lap portion of the
seat belt during an accident or a
sudden stop. Serious or fatal inter-
nal injuries could result because
the seat belt can't operate normally.
Safety system of your vehicle
43
Front seat
Manual adjustment
Forward and rearward
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up
and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and rearward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
WARNING
- Rear seatbacks
• The rear seatback must be
securely latched. If not, passen-
gers and objects could be thrown
forward resulting in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.
• Luggage and other cargo should
be laid flat in the cargo area. If
objects are large, heavy, or must
be piled, they must be secured.
Under no circumstances should
cargo be piled higher than the
seatbacks. Failure to follow these
warnings could result in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop, collision or rollover.
• No passenger should ride in the
cargo area or sit or lie on folded
seatbacks whilst the vehicle is
moving. All passengers must be
properly seated in seats and
restrained properly whilst riding.
• When resetting the seatback to
the upright position, make sure it
is securely latched by pushing it
forward and backwards.
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked into
place by attempting to move the
seat forward or backward without
using the lock release lever.
Sudden or unexpected movement
of the driver's seat could cause you
to lose control of the vehicle result-
ing in an accident.
WARNING
• Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
whilst the seat is moving.
• Do not put a cigarette lighter on
the floor or seat. When you oper-
ate the seat, gas may gush out of
the lighter and cause fire.
• If there are occupants in the rear
seats, be careful whilst adjusting
the front seat position.
• Use extreme caution when picking
small objects trapped under the
seats or between the seat and the
center console. Your hands might
be cut or injured by the sharp
edges of the seat mechanism.
OVF031002/H
35
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and
adjust the seatback of the seat to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
Seat cushion height (if equipped)
To change the height of the seat cushion,
push the lever upwards or downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push down
the lever several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull up the
lever several times.
Lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the lumbar support switch on
the side of the seat.
1. Press the front portion of the switch to
increase support, or the rear portion of
the switch, to decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the
desired position.
OVF031003/H OVF031004/H OVF033077/H
Safety system of your vehicle
63
Automatic adjustment (if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by using
the control switches located on the out-
side of the seat cushion. Before driving,
adjust the seat to the proper position so
as to easily control the steering wheel,
pedals and switches on the instrument
panel.
Forward and rearward
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward to move the seat to the
desired position.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
WARNING
The power seat is operable with the
ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should never be
left unattended in the car.
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is complet-
ed. Excessive operation may
damage the electrical equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount of
electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, don’t adjust the power seat
longer than necessary whilst the
engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more power
seat control switches at the same
time. Doing so may result in
power seat motor or electrical
component malfunction.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer or
airventilation system.
OVF031005/H
37
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback angle
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward to move the seatback to the
desired angle.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seat cushion height (if equipped)
1. Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower the
front part of the seat cushion. Pull the
rear portion of the control switch up to
raise or down to lower the rear part of
the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the lumbar support switch on
the side of the seat.
1. Press the front portion of the switch to
increase support, or the rear portion of
the switch, to decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the
desired position.
OVF031006/H OVF031007/H OVF031008/H
Safety system of your vehicle
83
Head restraint
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a head restraint for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The head restraint not only provides
comfort for the driver and front passen-
ger, but also helps protect the head and
neck in the event of a collision.
Forward and backward adjustment
The head restraint may be adjusted for-
ward to 4 different positions by pulling the
head restraint forward to the desired
detent. To adjust the head restraint to it’s
furthest backwards position, pull it fully
forward to the farthest position and
release it. Adjust the head restraint so
that it properly supports the head and
neck.
OPA039052
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the head
restraint should be adjusted so
the middle of the head restraint is
at the same height of the centre
of gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the centre of gravity of
most people's head is similar
with the height of the top of their
eyes. Also, adjust the head
restraint as close to your head as
possible. For this reason, the use
of a cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not
recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the head restraints removed as
severe injury to the occupants
may occur in the event of an acci-
dent. Head restraints may provide
protection against neck injuries
when properly adjusted.
• Do not adjust the head restraint
position of the driver's seat
whilst the vehicle is in motion.
OVF031009
39
Safety system of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the head restraint, pull it up to
the desired position (1). To lower the
head restraint, push and hold the release
button (2) on the head restraint support
and lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).
Removal/Reinstall
To remove the head restraint:
1. Recline the seatback(2) with the
recline lever (1).
2. Raise head restraint as far as it can go.
3. Press the head restraint release but-
ton (3) whilst pulling the head restraint
up (4).
OVF031010
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a seat
with the head restraint removed.
OVF034078R
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVF034078R
CAUTION
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the head restraint and
seat cushion raised, the head
restraint may come in contact with
the sunvisor or other parts of the
vehicle.
OYFH034205
Safety system of your vehicle
103
To reinstall the head restraint :
1. Put the head restraint poles (2) into the
holes whilst pressing the release but-
ton (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever (3).
3. Adjust the head restraint to the appro-
priate height.
Active head restraint
The active head restraint is designed to
move forward and upward during a rear
impact. This helps prevent the driver's
and front passenger’s heads from mov-
ing backward and thus helps minimise
neck injuries.
HNF2041-1/H
WARNING
A gap between the seat and the
head restraint release button may
appear when seating on the seat or
when you push or pull the seat. Be
careful not to get your finger, etc.
caught in the gap.
WARNING
Always make sure the head restraint
locks into position after reinstalling
and adjusting it properly.
OVF034079R
OVF034081R
■ Type A
■ Type B
311
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
front seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's
seat or the front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
"OFF" position.
• Each time you press the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat will
change as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
OVF031013R
OVF031014R
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
petrol. Doing so may damage the
surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers whilst the seat
warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could
occur.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer or
airventilation system.
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
■ Type A
■ Type B
Safety system of your vehicle
123
Air ventilation seat (if equipped)
The air ventilation is provided to cool the
front seats during hot weather by blowing
air through small vent holes on the sur-
face of the seats and seatbacks. Whilst
the engine is running, push the rear por-
tion of the switch to cool the driver's seat
or the front passenger's seat.
When the operation of the air ventilation
is not needed, keep the switches in the
OFF position.
• Each time you press the switch, the air-
flow will change as follows:
• When the air ventilation seat is turned
on, the seat may get cooler after about
5 minutes.
• The air ventilation seat defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position.
WARNING
- Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time. In particular,
the driver must exercise extreme
care for the following types of pas-
sengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or hand-
icapped persons, or hospital out-
patients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
OVF031015R
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
313
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s and driver’s
seatbacks.
Rear seat
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Pull up the seatback recline lever.
2. Hold the lever and adjust the seatback
of the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
Head restraint
The rear seat is equipped with head
restraints in all the seating positions for
the occupant's safety and comfort.
The head restraint not only provides
comfort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the event of
a collision.
OVF031016
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the seatback pockets. In an acci-
dent they could come loose from
the pocket and injure vehicle occu-
pants.
OPA039053OVF031068
■ Wagon
Safety system of your vehicle
143
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the head restraint, pull it up to
the desired position (1). To lower the
head restraint, push and hold the release
button (2) on the head restraint support
and lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).
OVF031017
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the head
restraint should be adjusted so
the middle of the head restraint is
at the same height of the centre
of gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the centre of gravity of
most people's head is similar
with the height of the top of their
eyes. Also adjust the head
restraint as close to your head as
possible. For this reason, the use
of a cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not
recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the head restraints removed.
Severe injury to an occupant may
occur in the event of an accident.
Head restraints may provide pro-
tection against severe neck
injuries when properly adjusted.
CAUTION
When there is no occupant in the
rear seats, adjust the height of the
head restraint to the lowest posi-
tion. The rear seat head restraint
can reduce the visibility of the rear
area.
315
Safety system of your vehicle
Removal and installation
To remove the head restraint, raise it as
far as it can go then press the release
button (1) whilst pulling the head restraint
up (2).
To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint poles (3) into the holes
whilst pressing the release button (1).
Then adjust it to the appropriate height.
Armrest
To use the armrest, pull it forward from
the seatback.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
rear seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm rear seats.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
"OFF" position.
• Each time you press the button, the
temperature setting of the seat will
change as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
OVF031020
OFF → HIGH( ) → LOW( )
→
OVF031019OVF031018
WARNING
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position after adjusting it to
properly protect the occupants.
Safety system of your vehicle
163
✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to facil-
itate carrying long items or to increase
the luggage capacity of the vehicle.
WARNING
- Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. In particular, the
driver must exercise extreme care
for the following types of passen-
gers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or hand-
icapped persons, or hospital out-
patients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
WARNING
The purpose of the fold-down rear
seatbacks is to allow you to carry
longer objects that could not be
accommodated in the cargo area.
Never allow passengers sit on top
of the folded down seatback whilst
the vehicle is moving. This is not a
proper seating position and no seat
belts are available for use. This
could result in serious injury or
death in case of an accident or sud-
den stop. Objects carried on the
folded down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of the
front seatbacks. This could allow
cargo to slide forward and cause
injury or damage during sudden
stops.
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
petrol. Doing so may damage the
surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place blankets,
cushions or seat covers on the
seats whilst the seat warmer is in
operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer or
airventilation system.
317
Safety system of your vehicle
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Make sure the rear seat belt webbing
is in the guide to prevent the seat belt
from being damaged.
2. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the
pocket between the rear seatback and
cushion.
3. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
4.Lower the rear head restraints to the
lowest position.
5. Type A
Pull on the seatback folding lever, then
fold the seat toward the front of the
vehicle.
Type B (wagon, remote folding)
Pull on the seatback folding lever, then
the rear seatback will be folded.
OVF031031
OVF031021
OVF031067
■ Front
■ Rear
- Wagon
OVF031023
Safety system of your vehicle
183
6. To use the rear seat, lift and push the
seatback backward. Push the seat-
back firmly until it clicks into place.
Make sure the seatback is locked in
place.
7. Return the rear seat belt to the proper
position.
CAUTION - Damaging rear
seat belt buckles
When you fold the rear seatback or
put luggage on the rear seat cush-
ion, insert the buckle in the pocket
between the rear seatback and
cushion. Doing so can prevent the
buckle from being damaged by the
rear seatback or luggage.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after being
folded down:
Be careful not to damage the seat
belt webbing or buckle. Do not
allow the seat belt webbing or
buckle to get caught or pinched in
the rear seat. Ensure that the seat-
back is completely locked into its
upright position by pushing on the
top of the seatback. Otherwise, in
an accident or sudden stop, the
seat could fold down and allow
cargo to enter the passenger com-
partment, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
- Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly. If the seatback
is returned without holding it, the
back of the seat could spring for-
ward resulting in injury caused by
being struck by the seatback.
WARNING
- Type B
Do not fold the rear seats, if pas-
sengers, pets or luggage are in the
rear seats. It may cause injury or
damage to passengers, pets, lug-
gage.
OVF031022
CAUTION - Type B
Do not strongly push back the seat-
back to lock. It may be unlocked
and returned by repulsive power.
319
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
- Cargo
Cargo should always be secured to
prevent it from being thrown about
the vehicle in a collision and caus-
ing injury to the vehicle occupants.
Special care of objects should be
taken when placing them in the rear
seats, since those may hit the front
seat occupants in a frontal colli-
sion.
CAUTION - Rear seat belts
When returning the rear seatbacks
to the upright position, remember
to return the rear shoulder belts to
their proper position. Routing the
seat belt webbing through the rear
seat belt guides will help keep the
belts from being trapped behind or
under the seats.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle/dual clutch
transmission is in P (Park) or the
manual transaxle is in R (Reverse)
or 1st, and the parking brake is
securely applied whenever loading
or unloading cargo. Failure to take
these steps may allow the vehicle
to move if the shift lever is inadver-
tently moved to another position.
Safety system of your vehicle
203
Seat belt restraint system
SEAT BELTS
(Continued)
• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.
A twisted belt will not give ade-
quate protection. In a collision, it
could even cut into you. Be sure
the belt webbing is straight and
not twisted.
• Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. If the belt
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged, replace it.
• Never wear a seat belt over frag-
ile objects. If there is a sudden
stop or impact, the seat belt can
damage it.
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the
front of the pelvis or the pelvis,
chest and shoulders, as applicable;
wearing the lap section of the belt
across the abdominal area must be
avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and par-
ticularly battery acid.
(Continued)
WARNING
• For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must
always be used whenever the car
is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and younger
must always be properly
restrained in the rear seat. Never
allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat. If a child over 12
must be seated in the front seat,
he/she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as
far back as possible.
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash. The shoulder
belt should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across your
collarbone.
(Continued)
321
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belt warning
(1) Driver’s seat belt warning light
(2) Front passenger’s seat belt warning
light
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from oper-
ating to remove slack, or prevent
the seat belt assembly from being
adjusted to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dan-
gerous and you may not be pro-
tected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the
seat belt repeatedly whilst driv-
ing. This could result in loss of
control, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are
hard or can break easily.
• Make sure there is nothing in the
buckle. The seat belt may not be
fastened securely.
OVF031025R
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVF033024R
(Continued)
Cleaning may safely be carried out
using mild soap and water. The belt
should be replaced if webbing
becomes frayed, contaminated or
damaged. It is essential to replace
the entire assembly after it has
been worn in a severe impact even
if damage to the assembly is not
obvious. Belts should not be worn
with straps twisted. Each belt
assembly must only be used by one
occupant; it is dangerous to put a
belt around a child being carried on
the occupant's lap.
Safety system of your vehicle
223
As a reminder to the driver and passenger,
the seatbelt warning light will blink or illu-
minate and warning chime will sound as
follows:
• The seat belt warning light will illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds each
time you turn the ignition switch ON
regardless of belt fastening.
• The seat belt warning light will illumi-
nate if the belt is unfastened after the
ignition switch is ON.
• The seat belt warning light will illumi-
nate if the belt is unfastened when the
ignition switch is ON.
• If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 6 mph (9 km/h),
the illuminated warning light will start
to blink or illuminate until you drive
under 3 mph (6 km/h).
• If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 12 mph (20
km/h), the seat belt warning chime will
sound for approximately 100 seconds
and the corresponding warning light
will blink.
✽
NOTICE
• You can find the front passenger’s
seat belt warning light on the centre
fascia panel.
• Although the front passenger seat is
not occupied, the seat belt warning
light will blink or illuminate for 6 sec-
onds.
• The front passenger's seat belt warn-
ing may operate when luggage is
placed on the front passenger seat.
Lap/shoulder belt
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of 4 positions for max-
imum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck. You
will not be getting the most effective pro-
tection. The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder near the
door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster
into an appropriate position.
OLM039026
■ Front seat
323
Safety system of your vehicle
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).
To lower it, push it down (3) whilst press-
ing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt por-
tion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean for-
ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
✽
NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will be
able to pull the belt out smoothly.
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appro-
priate height. Never position the
shoulder belt across your neck or
face. Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious injuries
in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts after
an accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to per-
sonal injury or death. Replace
your seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
B180A01NF/H
1
2
OVF031028
■ Rear centre seat
CAUTION
When using the rear centre seat
belt, the buckle with the “CENTER”
mark must be used.
1
2
Safety system of your vehicle
243
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (A) in the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should auto-
matically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
B210A01NF/H
B200A01NF/H
WARNING
You should place the lap belt por-
tion as low as possible and snugly
across your hips, not on your waist.
If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a
collision. Both arms should not be
under or over the belt. Rather, one
should be over and the other under,
as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm near the door.
WARNING
Always have the plate (1) and the
buckle (A) locked together. Make
sure the belt is not twisted.
OVF031029
■ Rear centre seat
OVF031066
■ Rear centre seat
A
A
325
Safety system of your vehicle
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in crashes where
the frontal collision is severe enough.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions,
the pre-tensioner will activate and pull
the seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive seat belt
tension on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-
sists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustra-
tion:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
WARNING
For your safety, be sure that the
belt webbing is not loose or twisted
and always sit properly on your
seat.
OED030300/H
8KMB3311/H
Safety system of your vehicle
263
✽
NOTICE
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal oper-
ating conditions and are not haz-
ardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged peri-
ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-
oughly after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-
ed.
• Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the pre-
tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument panel
will illuminate for approximately 6
seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, this warning light
will illuminate even if there is no
malfunction of the SRS air bag.
If the SRS air bag warning light
does not illuminate when the igni-
tion switch is turned to ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illuminat-
ing for approximately 6 seconds, or
if it illuminates whilst the vehicle is
being driven, we recommend that
the system be inspected by an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer."
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn cor-
rectly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow
all of the important information
and precautions about your vehi-
cle’s occupant safety features –
including seat belts and air bags
– that are provided in this manu-
al.
2. Be sure you and your passen-
gers always wear seat belts prop-
erly.
327
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belt precautions
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints
reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries for all occupants in the
event of a collision or sudden stop.
Without a seat belt, occupants
could be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the
vehicle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and occu-
pant seat contained in this manual.
(Continued)
• Improper handling of the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not
to strike, modify, inspect, replace,
service or repair the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies may lead to
improper operation or inadvertent
activation and serious injury.
• Always wear the seat belts when
driving or riding in a motor vehi-
cle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat
belt must be discarded, we rec-
ommend that you contact an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time. After acti-
vation, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat belts,
of any type, should always be
replaced after they have been
worn during a collision.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat belt
assemblies for several minutes
after they have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. We recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat belt
system in any manner.
(Continued)
CAUTION
Body work on the front area of the
vehicle may damage the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt system. Therefore,
we recommend that the system be
serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Safety system of your vehicle
283
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat. For
more information about the use of these
restraints, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tem” in this section.
✽
NOTICE
Small children are best protected from
injury in an accident when properly
restrained in the rear seat by a child
restraint system that meets the require-
ments of the Safety Standards of your
country. Before buying any child
restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets Safety
Standards of your country. The restraint
must be appropriate for your child's
height and weight. Check the label on
the child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should
be fastened and snugged on the hips
and as low as possible. Check if the belt
fits periodically. A child's squirming could
put the belt out of position. Children are
afforded the most safety in the event of
an accident when they are restrained by
a proper restraint system in the rear seat.
If a larger child (over age 12) must be
seated in the front seat, the child should
be securely restrained by the available
lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position. Children
age 12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a
child age 12 and under in the front seat.
NEVER place a rear facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-
es the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the centre of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle needs
to be properly restrained at all
times, including infants and chil-
dren. Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a vehi-
cle. The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child from
your arms and throw the child
against the interior. Always use a
child restraint appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
329
Safety system of your vehicle
Pregnant women
The use of a seat belt is recommended
for pregnant women to lessen the chance
of injury in an accident. When a seat belt
is used, the lap belt portion should be
placed as low and snugly as possible on
the hips, not across the abdomen. For
specific recommendations, consult a
physician.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should con-
sult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve max-
imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-
tem, all passengers should be sitting up
and the front seats should be in an
upright position when the car is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper protec-
tion if the person is lying down in the rear
seat or if the front seat is in a reclined
position.
WARNING
- Shoulder belts
on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face whilst the vehicle is in
motion.
• If seat belts are not properly worn
and adjusted on children, there is
a risk of death or serious injury.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the safety belt
over the area of the abdomen
where the fetus is located or above
the abdomen where the belt could
crush the fetus during an impact.
Safety system of your vehicle
303
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be disas-
sembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
It is recommended that all seat belts be
inspected periodically for wear or dam-
age of any kind. Any damaged parts
should be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. If you have additional queations
regarding seat belt operation, we recom-
mend that you consult an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after the rear
seatback was folded down, be care-
ful not to damage the seat belt web-
bing or buckle. Be sure that the
webbing or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear seat.
A seat belt with damaged webbing
or buckle will not be as strong and
could possibly fail during a colli-
sion or sudden stop, resulting in
serious injury. If the webbing or
buckles are damaged, get them
replaced immediately.
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a col-
lision or sudden stop. The protec-
tion of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snug against
your hips and chest to work proper-
ly. The more the seatback is
reclined, the greater the chance
that an occupant could slide under
the lap belt causing serious inter-
nal injuries or the occupant's neck
could strike the shoulder belt.
Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their seats,
properly belted, and with the seat-
backs upright.
331
Safety system of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimise the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
manoeuvre. According to accident statis-
tics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat. Larger children not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat belts
provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be prop-
erly placed and installed in the rear seat.
You must use a commercially available
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Safety Standards of
your country. Child restraint systems are
designed to be secured in vehicle seats
by the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt, or by a tether anchor and/or ISOFIX
anchors.
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat
and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
WARNING
• A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger's seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger side air bag to deploy,
it could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an infant
or child seat. Thus only use a
child restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
• A seat belt or child restraint sys-
tem can become very hot if it is
left in a closed vehicle on a sunny
day, even if the outside tempera-
ture does not feel hot. Be sure to
check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
• When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the lug-
gage area or fasten it with a seat
belt so that it will not be thrown
forward in case of a sudden stop
or an accident.
• Children may be seriously injured
or killed by an inflating air bag.
All children, even those too large
for child restraints, must ride in
the rear seat.
WARNING
To reduce the chance or serious or
fatal injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passen-
ger seat can be forcefully struck
by an inflating air bag resulting in
serious or fatal injuries.
• Always follow the instructions for
installation and use of the child
restraint maker.
• Always make sure the child seat
is secured properly in the car and
your child is securely restrained
in the child seat.
• Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the car’s interior.
• Never put a seat belt over your-
self and a child. During a crash,
the belt could press deep into the
child causing serious internal
injuries.
(Continued)
Safety system of your vehicle
323
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required. This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the man-
ufacturer's instructions. For safety rea-
sons, we recommend that the child
restraint system be used in the rear
seats.
(Continued)
• Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle – not even for a short
time. The car can heat up very
quickly, resulting in serious
injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadver-
tently cause the vehicle to move,
entangle themselves in the win-
dows, or lock themselves or oth-
ers inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or any
two persons, to use the same
seat belt.
• Children often wriggle and repo-
sition themselves improperly.
Never let a child ride with the
shoulder belt under their arm or
behind their back. Always prop-
erly position and secure children
in the rear seat.
• Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floor of a
moving vehicle. During a colli-
sion or sudden stop, the child
can be violently thrown against
the vehicles interior, resulting in
serious injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not pro-
vide adequate security in an acci-
dent.
• Seat belts can become very hot,
especially when the car is parked
in direct sunlight. Always check
seat belt buckles before fasten-
ing them over a child.
• After an accident, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
• If there is not enough space to
place the child restraint system
because of the driver's seat,
install the child restraint system
in the rear left seat.
CRS09
OVF031032
Rearward-facing child restraint system
Forward-facing child restraint system
333
Safety system of your vehicle
Installing a child restraint system by
lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or centre rear seats, do the fol-
lowing:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, follow-
ing the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the seat belt web-
bing is not twisted.
WARNING
- Child seat
installation
• A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the vehicle and the child is not
properly restrained in the child
restraint. Before installing the
child restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
• If the seat belt does not operate
as described in this section, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
• Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint system and the instruc-
tions provided with the child
restraint system could increase
the chance and/or severity of
injury in an accident.
• If the vehicle head restraint pre-
vents proper installation of a
child seat, the head restraint of
the respective seating position
shall be readjusted or entirely
removed.
WARNING
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that an
inflating passenger-side air bag
could impact the rear-facing child
restraint and kill the child.
E2MS103005
Safety system of your vehicle
343
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat
belt to take up any slack. After installa-
tion of the child restraint system, try to
move it in all directions to be sure the
child restraint system is securely
installed.
If you need to tighten the belt, pull more
webbing toward the retractor. When you
unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to
retract, the retractor will automatically
revert back to its normal seated passen-
ger emergency locking usage condition.
OEN036101 OEN036104
335
Safety system of your vehicle
U : Suitable for "universal" category
restraints approved for use in this
mass group
Securing a child restraint seat with
“Tether Anchor” system (if equipped)
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the floor behind the rear seats
(wagon) or the shelf behind the rear
seats (sedan).
Child Seat Restraint Suitability for Seat Position using the Seat Belt
- For Europe
Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your
children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.
Age Group
Seating Position
Front passenger Rear outboard Rear centre
0 : Up to 10 kg
(0 - 9 months)
UUX
0+ : Up to 13 kg
(0 - 2 years)
UUX
I : 9 kg to 18 kg
(9 months - 4 years)
UUX
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg
(4 - 12 years)
UUX
WARNING
We recommend that a child
restraint seat be installed in the
rear seat, even if the front passen-
ger's air bag ON/OFF switch is set
to the OFF position. To ensure the
safety of your child, the front pas-
senger’s air bag must be deactivat-
ed when it should be necessary to
install a child restraint seat on the
front passenger seat in exceptional
circumstances.
OVF031037
OVF031075
■ Wagon
■ Sedan
Safety system of your vehicle
363
1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head
restraint, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the
head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the seat.
OVF031034
WARNING - Tether strap
Never place more than one child
restraint to a single tether or to a
single lower anchorage point. The
increased load caused by multiple
seats may cause the tethers or
anchorage points to break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not prop-
erly restrained in the child restraint.
Always follow the child seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
WARNING
- Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint sys-
tem is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or separate
causing death or serious injury.
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
337
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint system
with “ISOFIX” system and “Tether
Anchorage” system (if equipped)
ISOFIX is a standardised method of fit-
ting child seats that eliminates the need
to use the standard adult seat belt to
secure the seat in the vehicle. This
enables a much more secure and posi-
tive location with the added benefit of
easier and quicker installation.
An ISOFIX-seat may only be installed if it
has vehicle-specific or universal approval
in accordance with the requirements of
ECE-R 44.
❈ ISOFIX: International Standards Origanisation FIX
There are ISOFIX symbols located on
the lower portion of each side of the rear
seatbacks. These symbols indicate the
position of the lower anchors for child
restraints so equipped.
Both rear outboard seats are equipped
with a pair of ISOFIX anchorages as well
as a corresponding top tether anchorage
on the floor behind the rear seats
(wagon) or the shelf behind the rear
seats (sedan). The ISOFIX anchorages
are located between seat cushion and
backrest, marked with the ISOFIX icon.
For installation, CRS ISOFIX connecters
have to engage with the vehicles ISOFIX
anchorages (listen for a CLICK, check
potential visual indicators on the CRS
and cross-check by pulling).
OLM039035R OVF031035
ISOFIX Anchor
ISOFIX Anchor
Position Indicator
OVF031036
Safety system of your vehicle
383
CRS with universal approval to ECE-R
44 need to be fixed additionally with a top
tether strap connected to the correspon-
ding top tether anchorage point on the
floor behind the rear seats (wagon) or the
shelf behind the rear seats (sedan).
The installing and the use of a child-seat
has to be done according to the
installing-manual, which is added to the
ISOFIX-seat.
To secure the child restraint seat
1. To engage the child restraint seat to
the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child
restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX
anchor. Listen for the audible “click”
sound.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
child restraint hook holder and tighten
to secure the seat. (Refer to the previ-
ous page.)
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt web-
bing to get scratched or pinched by
the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX
anchor during installation.
WARNING
• When using the vehicle's
"ISOFIX" system to install a child
restraint system in the rear seat,
all unused vehicle rear seat belt
metal latch plates or tabs must be
latched securely in their seat belt
buckles and the seat belt web-
bing must be retracted behind
the child restraint to prevent the
child from reaching and taking
hold of unretracted seat belts.
Unlatched metal latch plates or
tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
• Do not place anything around the
ISOFIX anchors. Also make sure
that the seat belt is not caught in
the ISOFIX anchors.
339
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com-
patible child restraint seat only to
the appropriate locations shown
in the illustration.
• Always follow the installation and
use instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.
WARNING
• Do not install a child restraint
seat at the centre of the rear seat
using the vehicle's ISOFIX
anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are
only provided for the left and
right outboard rear seating posi-
tions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX
anchors by attempting to attach a
child restraint seat in the middle
of the rear seat to the ISOFIX
anchors.
In a crash, the child restraint seat
ISOFIX attachments may not be
strong enough to secure the child
restraint seat properly in the cen-
tre of the rear seat and may
break, causing serious injury or
death.
• Do not mount more than one
child restraint to a child restraint
lower anchorage point. The
improper increased load may
cause the anchorage points or
tether anchor to break, causing
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
Safety system of your vehicle
403
Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions - For Europe
F ISO/L1 - X X -
G ISO/L2 - X X -
E ISO/R1 - IL IL -
E ISO/R1 - IL IL -
D ISO/R2 - IL IL -
C ISO/R3 - IL IL -
D ISO/R2 - IL IL -
C ISO/R3 - IL IL -
B ISO/F2 - IUF IUF -
B1 ISO/F2X - IUF IUF -
A ISO/F3 - IUF IUF -
Rear Outboard
(Passenger side)
Rear Outboard
(Driver side)
Front Passenger
FixtureSize ClassMass Group
Carrycot
0 : UP to 10kg
0+ : UP to 13kg
I : 9 to 18kg
Rear Centre
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal
category approved for use in the mass group.
IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems (CRS)
approved for this vehicle type according to ECE44. These ISOFIX
CRS are those of the "specific vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-uni-
versal" categories.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in
this mass group and/or this size class.
* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at the foremost
position of the passenger seat.
* ISOFIX child restraint system size classes and fixtures
A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height
650mm)
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape
Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 650mm)
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing CRS
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
341
Safety system of your vehicle
Recommended child restraint systems – For Europe
CRS Manufacturer information
FAIR http://www.fairbimbofix.com
Britax Römer http://www.britax.com
Mass Group Name Manufacturer Type of Fixation
ECE-R44
Approval No.
Group 0-1
(0-18kg)
BIMBO G0/1 S FAIR
Rearward facing with vehicle
specific ISOFIX platform type “G”
E4 03443416 (Seat)
E4 04443718 (Platform)
Baby Safe Plus II Britax Römer Rearward facing with ISOFIX adapter E1 04301146
Group 1
(9-18kg)
Duo Plus Britax Römer
Forward facing with vehicle
ISOFIX lower anchorage + Top Tether
E1 04301133
Safety system of your vehicle
423
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag*
(3) Side impact air bag*
(4) Curtain air bag*
(5) Driver’s knee air bag*
(6) Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch*
* : if equipped
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF033069R/OVF031043R
* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
WARNING
• Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers must
always wear the safety belts pro-
vided in order to minimise the
risk and severity of injury in the
event of a collision or rollover.
• SRS and pretensioners contain
explosive chemicals.
If scraping a vehicle without
removing SRS and pretensioners
from a vehicle, it may cause fire.
Before scraping a vehicle, we rec-
ommend that you contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Keep the SRS parts and wirings
away from water or any liquid. If
the SRS components are inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or
liquids, it may cause fire or
severe injury.
343
Safety system of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or START
position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
serious frontal or side collision (if
equipped with side impact air bag or
curtain air bag) in order to help protect
the occupants from serious physical
injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a col-
lision and its direction. These two fac-
tors determine whether the sensors
produce an electronic deployment/
inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the densi-
ty and stiffness of the vehicles or
objects which your vehicle hits in the
collision. The determining, factors are
not limited to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will sim-
ply see the deflated air bags hanging
out of their storage compartments after
the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of extremely
short time in which a collision occurs
and the need to get the air bag
between the occupant and the vehicle
structures before the occupant impacts
those structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries in a severe collision
and is thus a necessary part of air bag
design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include facial
abrasions, bruises and broken bones
because the inflation speed also caus-
es the air bags to expand with a great
deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steer-
ing wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal injury
or death caused by deploying air
bags in a collision, the driver
should sit as far back from the
steering wheel air bag as possible
(at least 250 mm (10 inches)
away). The front passenger should
always move their seat as far
back as possible and sit back in
their seat.
• Air bag inflates instantly in an
event of a collision, passengers
may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
a proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or bodily
abrasions, injuries from broken
glasses or burns.
Safety system of your vehicle
443
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the igni-
tion of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-
comfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possible
after impact in order to reduce dis-
comfort and prevent prolonged expo-
sure to the smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat, etc.). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with cold water
immediately and consult the doctor if the
symptom persists.
Do not install a child restraint on the
front passenger seat
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger's seat other than
that explained in section - Passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF switch (if
equipped). If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraints in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel and/or instrument panel
and/or in both sides of the roof rails
above the front and rear doors are
very hot. To prevent injury, do not
touch the air bag storage areas
internal components immediately
after an air bag has inflated.
OYDESA2042
345
Safety system of your vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch,
you can activate or deactivate the front
passenger’s air bag when necessary.
For more details, please refer to 3-45
page.
Air bag warning and indicator
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert you of
a potential problem with your air bag -
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the warning light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on whilst the vehicle is
in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
WARNING
• NEVER use a rearward facing
child restraint on a seat protected
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of
it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to
the CHILD can occur.
• Never put a child restraint in the
front passenger's seat other than
that as mentioned in section -
Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped). If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it
would cause serious or fatal
injuries.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain
air bags, be sure to install the
child restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible,
and securely lock the child
restraint system in position.
Inflation of side and/or curtain air
bags could cause serious injury
or death to an infant or child.
W7-147
Safety system of your vehicle
463
Passenger’s front air bag
ON indicator (if equipped)
The passenger's front air bag ON indica-
tor illuminates for approximately 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
The passenger's front air bag ON indica-
tor also comes on when the passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the
ON position and goes off after approxi-
mately 60 seconds.
Passenger’s front air bag
OFF indicator (if equipped)
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator illuminates for about 4 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position.
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator also comes on when the passen-
ger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch is set
to the OFF position and goes off when
the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the ON position.
CAUTION
If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch malfunctions, the
passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator will not illuminate (The pas-
senger's front air bag ON indicator
comes on and goes off after
approximately 60 seconds) and the
passenger’s front air bag will inflate
in a frontal impact even if the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the OFF position.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch and the SRS air bag
system be inspected by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
OVF031039R
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVF031038R
OVF031041R
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVF031040R
347
Safety system of your vehicle
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following com-
ponents:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module*
3. Side air bag modules*
4. Curtain air bag modules*
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors*
9. Side impact sensors*
10. Driver’s knee air bag module*
11. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
indicator*
12. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch*
* : if equipped
The SRSCM continually monitors all ele-
ments whilst the ignition switch is ON to
determine if a frontal, near-frontal impact
or side impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for about
6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, after which the
air bag warning light should go out.
WARNING
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
of the SRS. We recommend that the
system be inspected by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminat-
ing for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
OVF031042R
Safety system of your vehicle
483
The front air bag modules are located
both in the centre of the steering wheel,
in the front passenger's panel above the
glove box and/or in the driver’s side knee
bolster. When the SRSCM detects a suf-
ficiently severe impact to the front of the
vehicle, it will automatically deploy the
front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other con-
trols.
OHM039103N/H
OHM039104N/H
Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)
OHM039102N/H
Driver’s front air bag (1)
349
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
• If an air bag deploys, there may
be a loud noise followed by a fine
dust released in the vehicle.
These conditions are normal and
are not hazardous - the air bags
are packed in this fine powder.
The dust generated during air
bag deployment may cause skin
or eye irritation as well as aggra-
vate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition key is in the ON posi-
tion. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate, or con-
tinuously remains on after illumi-
nating for about 6 seconds when
the ignition key is turned to the
ON position, or after the engine is
started, comes on whilst driving,
the SRS is not working properly.
If this occurs, we recommen that
the system be inspected by an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
• Before you replace a fuse or dis-
connect a battery terminal, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the ignition
key. Never remove or replace the
air bag related fuse(s) when the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion. Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS air bag warn-
ing light to illuminate.
B240B05L/H
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
• Do not install or place any acces-
sories (drink holder, cassette
holder, sticker, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box in a vehicle with a pas-
senger's air bag. Such objects
may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
• When installing a container of liq-
uid air freshener inside the vehi-
cle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the
instrument panel surface.
It may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
Safety system of your vehicle
503
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System
and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver
and passenger seating positions.
The indications of the system's presence
are the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on
the air bag pad cover in the steering
wheel and/or on the cover of the driver’s
side knee bolster located below the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the centre of the
steering wheel, in the knee bolster below
the steering wheel column and the pas-
senger's side front panel above the glove
box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity.
OVF031050R
■ Passenger’s front air bag
OVF031049R
OVF031051R
■ Driver’s front air bag
■ Driver’s knee air bag
351
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental deployment of the air bags
or by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If the SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated whilst the
vehicle is being driven, we rec-
ommend that the system be
inspected by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
• Air bags can only be used once –
we recommend that the system
be replaced by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
• The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when an
impact is sufficiently severe and
when the impact angle is less
than 30° from the forward longitu-
dinal axis of the vehicle.
Additionally, the air bags will only
deploy once. Seat belts must be
worn at all times.
(Continued)
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every time,
everyone! Air bags inflate with
considerable force and in the blink
of an eye. Seat belts help keep
occupants in proper position to
obtain maximum benefit from the
air bag. Even with air bags, improp-
erly and unbelted occupants can be
severely injured when the air bag
inflates. Always follow the precau-
tions about seat belts, air bags and
occupant safety contained in this
manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries and receive the maxi-
mum safety benefit from your
restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat. NB
See section - Passenger's front
air bag ON/OFF switch (if
equipped).
• ABC – Always Buckle Children in
the back seat. It is the safest
place for children of any age to
ride.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Front and side impact air bags
can injure occupants improperly
positioned in the front seats.
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air bags,
whilst still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
• You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags. Improperly
positioned drivers and passen-
gers can be severely injured by
inflating air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
centre console – always sit in an
upright position.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
(Continued)
Safety system of your vehicle
523
Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped)
The passenger's front air bag can be
deactivated by the passenger's front air
bag ON/OFF switch. When switched off a
rearward facing child seat can be
installed in this seating position. When
using this facility the seat must always be
put in its most rearward position.
NB. For safety reasons, when installing
child seats within the vehicle the back
seat positions are preferred, such prac-
tice for installing a child seat in the front
passenger seat (with the Air Bag switch
positioned OFF) should only be used in
exceptional circumstances.
In addition the air bag can also be deac-
tivated if the front passenger's seat is
unoccupied by a person.
OVF031044R
(Continued)
• For maximum safety protection in
all types of crashes, all occu-
pants including the driver should
always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position
to minimise the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-
sarily close to the air bag whilst
the vehicle is in motion.
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright with the seat
back in an upright position, cen-
tred on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an occu-
pant is out of position because of
not wearing a seat belt, the air
bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal
injuries.
(Continued)
• Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-
impact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
• A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat.
The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident. NB See section -
Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped).
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to ride in the front passen-
ger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he or
she must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
(Continued)
353
Safety system of your vehicle
To deactivate or reactivate the passen-
ger’s front air bag:
To deactivate the passenger’s front air
bag, insert the master key into the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch
and turn it to the OFF position.
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator ( ) will illuminate and stay on until
the passenger’s front air bag is reactivat-
ed.
To reactivate the passenger’s front air
bag, insert the master key into the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch
and turn it to the ON position. The pas-
senger’s front air bag OFF indicator will
go out and the passenger’s front air bag
ON indicator ( ) will illuminate for
approximately 60 seconds.
✽
NOTICE
• When the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the ON position,
the passenger’s front air bag is activated
and child or infant seat should not be
installed on the front passenger seat.
• When the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF posi-
tion, the passenger’s front air bag is
deactivated.
CAUTION
• If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is not working
properly, the air bag warning light
()
on the instrument panel will
illuminate.
And, the passenger's front air bag
OFF indicator
()
will not illumi-
nate (The passenger's front air
bag ON indicator comes on and
goes off after approximately 60
seconds), the SRS Control
Module reactivates the passen-
ger’s front air bag and the pas-
senger’s front air bag will inflate
in frontal impact crashes even if
the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF
position.
(Continued)
WARNING
On some models, the front air bag
ON/OFF switch could turn by using
a similar small rigid device. Always
check the status of the front air bag
ON/OFF switch and passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF indicator.
OVF031046R
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVF031045R
Safety system of your vehicle
543
(Continued)
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF switch, do
not install a child restraint sys-
tem in the front passenger's seat.
A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat
other than that explained in sec-
tion - Passenger's front air bag
ON/OFF switch (if equipped).
Children who are too large for
child restraint systems should
always occupy the rear seat and
use the available lap/shoulder
belts. Children are afforded the
most safety in the event of an
accident when they are
restrained by a proper restraint
system in the rear seat.
• As soon as the child seat is no
longer needed on the front pas-
senger's seat, reactivate the front
passenger's air bag.
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for the
proper position of the passen-
ger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch.
• Deactivate the passenger's front
air bag only when the ignition
switch is switched off, or the mal-
function may occur in the SRS
Control Module.
And there may be a danger that
the driver's and/or front passen-
ger’s and/or side and curtain air
bag may fail to trigger, or not trig-
ger correctly during a collision.
• Never install a rearward facing
child seat on the front passen-
ger's seat unless the passenger's
front air bag has been deactivat-
ed. The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be inspected by an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
• If the SRS air bag warning light
blinks or does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position, or if it illumi-
nates whilst the vehicle is being
driven, we recommend that the
system be inspected by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
355
Safety system of your vehicle
Side impact air bag (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front and outboard
rear seat. The purpose of the air bag is to
provide the vehicle's driver and/or the
front passenger with additional protec-
tion than that offered by the seat belt
alone.
The side impact air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash sever-
ity, angle, speed and point of impact. The
side air bags are not designed to deploy
in all side impact situations.
WARNING
• The side impact air bag is sup-
plemental to the driver's and the
passenger's seat belt systems
and is not a substitute for them.
Therefore your seat belts must be
worn at all times whilst the vehi-
cle is in motion. The air bags
deploy only in certain side impact
conditions severe enough to
cause significant injury to the
vehicle occupants.
• For best protection from the side
impact air bag system and to
avoid being injured by the
deploying side impact air bag,
both front seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with the
seat belt properly fastened. The
driver's hands should be placed
on the steering wheel at the 9:00
and 3:00 positions. The passen-
ger's arms and hands should be
placed on their laps.
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers.
(Continued)
WARNING
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies onto doors,
put their arms on the doors, stretch
their arms out of the window, or
place objects between the doors
and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags.
■ Front
■ Rear
OVF033071
OVF031047
OVF031048
Safety system of your vehicle
563
Curtain air bag (if equipped)
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in cer-
tain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact colli-
sions, depending on the crash severity,
angle, speed and point of impact. The
curtain air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations, colli-
sions from the front or rear of the vehicle
or in most rollover situations.
OVF031070
OVF033072
(Continued)
• Use of seat covers could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness of
the system.
• Do not install any accessories on
the side or near the side impact
air bag.
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag
and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental side
impact air bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side impact air bag
that may result in personal injury,
avoid impact to the side impact
sensor when the ignition key is
on.
• If the seat or seat cover is dam-
aged, we recommend that the
system be serviced by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer. Inform
that your vehicle is equipped with
side impact air bags.
357
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. We recommend
that the system be serviced by an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
Failure to follow the above men-
tioned instructions can result in
injury or death to the vehicle occu-
pants in an accident.
WARNING
• In order for side impact and cur-
tain air bags to provide the best
protection, both front seat occu-
pants and both outboard rear
occupants should sit in an
upright position with the seat
belts properly fastened.
Importantly, children should sit in
a proper child restraint system in
the rear seat.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child
restraint system.
Make sure to put the child
restraint system as far away from
the door side as possible, and
secure the child restraint system
in a locked position.
(Continued)
Safety system of your vehicle
583
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expect-
ed to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
* : if equipped
(3) Side impact sensor (front)*
(4) Side impact sensor (rear)*
OVF014001R/OVF031057/H/OVF035058R/OVF032059/OVF031060
1
2
3 4
359
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensi-
ty, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air bag
or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. We recommend that
the system be serviced by an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the
front bumper, body or B pillar and
C pillars where side collision sen-
sors are installed. We recom-
mend that the system be serviced
by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
• Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing bumper guards or
replacing a bumper with non-gen-
uine parts may adversely affect
your vehicles collision and air
bag deployment performance.
OED036096/H
Safety system of your vehicle
603
Side impact and curtain air bags
(if equipped)
Side impact and/or curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a side
impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of colli-
sions if the front impact sensors detect a
sufficient impact. Side air bags (side
impact and/or curtain air bags) are
designed to inflate only in side impact
collisions, but they may inflate in other
collisions if the side impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads
or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on sur-
faces not designed for vehicle traffic to
prevent unintended air bag deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
OED036099/H
OVF035061
OVF033073
361
Safety system of your vehicle
• Air bags are not designed to inflate in
rear collisions, because occupants are
moved backward by the force of the
impact. In this case, inflated air bags
would not be able to provide any addi-
tional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
• However, if equipped with side impact
and curtain air bags, the air bags may
inflate depending on the intensity, vehi-
cle speed and angles of impact.
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional bene-
fit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
OED036102OED036100/H OVF035061
Safety system of your vehicle
623
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be signifi-
cantly replaced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-
dents because air bag deployment
would not provide protection to the
occupants.
However, side and/or curtain air bags
may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
over by a side impact collision, if the
vehicle is equipped with side impact air
bags and curtain air bags.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not deliv-
ered to the sensors.
OED036103 OED036104 OVF035063
363
Safety system of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and so there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate when
you turn the ignition ON, or if it continu-
ously remains on, we recommend that
the system be inspected by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
We recommend that the any work on the
SRS system, such as removing,
installing, repairing, or any work on the
steering wheel be performed by an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING
• Modification to SRS components
or wiring, including the addition
of any kind of badges to the pad
covers or modifications to the
body structure, can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the air bags inflate, we recom-
mend that the system be
replaced by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental inflation of the air bags or
by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If components of the air bag sys-
tem must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be
observed. A HYUNDAI authorised
repairer knows these precautions
and can give you the necessary
information. Failure to follow
these precautions and proce-
dures could increase the risk of
personal injury.
• If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on the
flooring, you shouldn't try to start
the engine; we recommend that
you contact an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Safety system of your vehicle
643
Additional safety precautions
• Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat. All occupants should
sit upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor.
• Passengers should not move out of
or change seats whilst the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not wear-
ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-
gency stop can be thrown against the
inside of the vehicle, against other
occupants, or out of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more than
one person uses the same seat belt,
they could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provided
by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place hard
or sharp objects between them-
selves and the air bags. Carrying
hard or sharp objects on your lap or in
your mouth can result in injuries if an
air bag inflates.
• Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor. If occupants are too close to the
air bag covers, they could be injured if
the air bags inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects on or
near the air bag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front or
side impact air bag covers could inter-
fere with the proper operation of the air
bags.
• Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
• Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation
of the supplemental restraint system
sensing components and wiring har-
nesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in the event of a
crash. All infants and children should
be properly restrained in appropriate
child safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
Adding equipment to or modify-
ing your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can cause occupants to be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior struc-
ture or be thrown from the vehicle
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always sit upright with the seat-
back in an upright position, cen-
tred on the seat cushion with
your seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and your feet on
the floor.
365
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag warning label
(if equipped)
Air bag warning labels are attached to
alert driver and passengers of potential
risk of air bag system.
Note that these government warnings
focus on the risk of children. We also
want you to be aware of the risks which
adults are exposed to which have been
described in previous pages.
■ Type B
OVF031064
■ Type A
OVF031065
4
Keys / 4-3
Remote keyless entry (Wagon) / 4-5
Remote keyless entry (Sedan) / 4-9
Smart key (Wagon) / 4-13
Smart key (Sedan) / 4-16
Anti-theft alarm system / 4-19
Door locks / 4-23
Tailgate (Wagon) / 4-28
Smart tailgate / 4-34
Boot (Sedan) / 4-38
Smart boot / 4-40
Windows / 4-44
Bonnet / 4-48
Fuel filler lid / 4-50
Panorama sunroof / 4-53
Driver position memory system / 4-57
Steering wheel / 4-59
Mirrors / 4-62
Instrument cluster / 4-66
Parking assist system / 4-104
Smart parking assist system (SPAS) / 4-108
Rearview camera / 4-119
Hazard warning flasher / 4-120
Lighting / 4-121
Wipers and washers / 4-133
Features of your vehicle
Interior light / 4-138
Welcome system / 4-140
Defroster / 4-141
Manual climate control system / 4-142
Automatic climate control system / 4-151
Windscreen defrosting and defogging / 4-163
Storage compartment / 4-167
Interior features / 4-171
Exterior features (Wagon) / 4-182
Audio system / 4-184
Features of your vehicle
4
43
Features of your vehicle
Record your key number
The key code number is
stamped or printed on
the key code tag
attached to the key set.
Should you lose your
keys, we recommend that you contact an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer. Remove
the key code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the key code number
and keep it in a safe and handy place, but
not in the vehicle.
Key operations
• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.
• Used to lock and unlock the glove box.
Immobiliser system
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
electronic engine immobiliser system to
reduce the risk of unauthorised vehicle
use.
Your immobiliser system is comprised of
a small transponder in the key and elec-
tronic devices inside the vehicle.
Vehicles without smart key system
With the immobiliser system, whenever
you insert your ignition key into the igni-
tion switch and turn it to ON, it checks
and determines and verifies if the ignition
key is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will not
start.
To deactivate the immobiliser system:
Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-
der and turn it to the ON position.
To activate the immobiliser system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
The immobiliser system activates auto-
matically. Without a valid ignition key for
your vehicle, the engine will not start.
KEYS
WARNING -
Ignition key
(Smart key)
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the ignition key (Smart
key) is dangerous even if the key is
not in the ignition or start button is
ACC or ON position.
Children copy adults and they
could place the key in the ignition
or press the start button.
The ignition key (Smart key) would
enable children to operate power
windows or other controls, or even
make the vehicle move, which
could result in serious bodily injury
or even death.
Never leave the keys in your vehicle
with unsupervised children, when
the engine is running.
WARNING
We recommend that you use parts
for replacement from an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer. If an aftermarket
key is used, the ignition switch may
not return to ON after START. If this
happens, the starter will continue
to operate causing damage to the
starter motor and possible fire due
to excessive current in the wiring.
Features of your vehicle
44
Vehicles with smart key system
Whenever the engine start/stop button is
changed to the ON position, the immo-
biliser system checks and verifies if the
key is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will not
start.
To deactivate the immobiliser system
Change the engine start/stop button to
the ON position.
To activate the immobiliser system
Change the engine start/stop button to
the OFF position. The immobiliser sys-
tem activates automatically. Without a
valid smart key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use the
key with other immobiliser keys around.
Otherwise the engine may not start or
may stop soon after it starts. Keep each
key separately not to have any malfunc-
tion after you receive your new vehicle.
✽
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose your
keys, we recommend that you consult an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobiliser system. It is designed
to give years of trouble-free service,
however you should avoid expo-
sure to moisture, static electricity
and rough handling. Immobiliser
system malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
immobiliser system because it
could cause the immobiliser sys-
tem to malfunction. We recommend
that the system be serviced by an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the immobiliser system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your vehi-
cle, do not leave spare keys any-
where in your vehicle. Your immo-
biliser password is a customer
unique password and should be
kept confidential. Do not leave this
number anywhere in your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
The engine may not start for the
metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal from normally
transmitting.
45
Features of your vehicle
Remote keyless entry system
operations
Type A
• To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold automat-
ically.
• To fold the key, fold the key manually
whilst pressing the release button.
Type B
• To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button and
remove the mechanical key.
• To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a
click sound is heard.
Lock (1)
1. Close all doors.
2. Press the lock button.
3. The hazard warning light will blink
once to indicate that all doors are
locked (the engine bonnet and tailgate
must be closed).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (WAGON) (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without press-
ing the release button. This may
damage the key.
OVF043379
■ Type B
OVF043001
■ Type A
OVF043375
■ Type B
OVF043003
■ Type A
Features of your vehicle
64
✽
NOTICE
The doors will not lock if any door is
opened.
Unlock (2)
1. Press the unlock button.
2. The hazard warning lights will blink
twice to indicate that all doors are
unlocked.
✽
NOTICE
After unlocking all doors, the doors will
lock automatically unless a door is
opened within 30 seconds.
Tailgate unlock (3)
Non-powered tailgate.
1. Press the tailgate unlock button for
more than 1 second.
2. The hazard warning light will blink
twice to indicate the tailgate is
unlocked.
✽
NOTICE
• After unlocking the tailgate, the tail-
gate will lock automatically unless it is
opened within 30 seconds.
• Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate will lock automati-
cally.
Power tailgate
1. Press the tailgate unlock button for
more than 1 second.
2. The hazard warning light will blink and
chime will sound twice to indicate the
tailgate is unlocked and opened.
✽
NOTICE
Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate will lock automati-
cally.
47
Features of your vehicle
Transmitter precautions
✽
NOTICE
• The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
- The ignition key is in ignition switch.
- You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the ignition key. If you have a problem
with the transmitter, we recommend
that you contact an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the transmitter is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the transmitter could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/
receiving emails. Avoid placing the
transmitter and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the transmitter gets damp
(due to drinks or moisture), or is
heated, internal circuit may mal-
function, excluding the car from the
warranty.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
Features of your vehicle
84
Battery replacement
A battery should last for several years,
but if the transmitter or smart key is not
working properly, try replacing the bat-
tery with a new one. If you are unsure
how to use or replace the battery, we rec-
ommend that you contact an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-
tly pry open the cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery position.
3. Install the rear cover.
For transmitter or smart key replace-
ment, we recommend that you contact
an authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
CAUTION
• The transmitter or smart key is
designed to give you years of
trouble-free use, however it can
malfunction if exposed to mois-
ture or static electricity. If you are
unsure how to use or replace the
battery, we recommend that you
contact an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter or smart
key to malfunction. Be sure to use
the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmit-
ter or smart key, don't drop it, get
it wet, or expose it to heat or sun-
light.
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed bat-
tery can be harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
■ Type B
OVF041213
■ Type A
OHG040009
49
Features of your vehicle
Remote keyless entry system
operations
Type A
• To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold automat-
ically.
• To fold the key, fold the key manually
whilst pressing the release button.
Type B
• To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button and
remove the mechanical key.
• To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a
click sound is heard.
Lock (1)
1. Close all doors.
2. Press the lock button.
3. The hazard warning light will blink
once to indicate that all doors are
locked (the engine bonnet and boot
must be closed).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (SEDAN) (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without press-
ing the release button. This may
damage the key.
OVF043379
■ Type B
OVF043001
■ Type A
OVF043375
■ Type B
OVF043003
■ Type A
Features of your vehicle
104
✽
NOTICE
The doors will not lock if any door is
opened.
Unlock (2)
1. Press the unlock button.
2. The hazard warning lights will blink
twice to indicate that all doors are
unlocked.
✽
NOTICE
After unlocking all doors, the doors will
lock automatically unless a door is
opened within 30 seconds.
Boot open (3)
1. Press the boot open button for more
than 1 second.
2. The hazard warning light will blink
twice to indicate the boot is opened.
✽
NOTICE
Once the boot is opened and then closed,
the boot will lock automatically.
Transmitter precautions
✽
NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
• The ignition key is in ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
• The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the ignition key. If you have a problem
with the transmitter, we recommend
that you contact an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
(Continued)
411
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the transmitter is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the transmitter could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/
receiving emails. Avoid placing the
transmitter and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
Battery replacement
A battery should last for several years,
but if the transmitter or smart key is not
working properly, try replacing the bat-
tery with a new one. If you are unsure
how to use or replace the battery, we rec-
ommend that you contact an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the transmitter gets damp
(due to drinks or moisture), or is
heated, internal circuit may mal-
function, excluding the car from the
warranty.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
■ Type B
OVF041213
■ Type A
OHG040009
Features of your vehicle
124
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-
tly pry open the cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery position.
3. Install the rear cover.
For transmitter or smart key replace-
ment, we recommend that you contact
an authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
CAUTION
• The transmitter or smart key is
designed to give you years of
trouble-free use, however it can
malfunction if exposed to mois-
ture or static electricity. If you are
unsure how to use or replace the
battery, we recommend that you
contact an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter or smart
key to malfunction. Be sure to use
the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmit-
ter or smart key, don't drop it, get
it wet, or expose it to heat or sun-
light.
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed bat-
tery can be harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
413
Features of your vehicle
Smart key function
1.Door lock
2.Door unlock
3.Tailgate open
With a smart key, you can lock or unlock
a door and tailgate and even start the
engine without inserting the key.
The functions of the buttons on a smart
key are similar to the remote keyless
entry. Refer to the “Remote keyless
entry” in this section.
Carrying the smart key, you may lock and
unlock the vehicle doors and tailgate.
Also, you may start the engine. Refer to
the following, for more details.
Locking
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the button of the outside door
handle.
4. The hazard warning lights will blink
once (the engine bonnet and tailgate
must be closed).
5. Make sure that doors are locked by
pulling the outside door handle.
✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the outside door handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for 3
seconds if any of following occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the tailgate is
opened.
SMART KEY (WAGON) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF041006/HOVF043375
Features of your vehicle
144
Unlocking
1. Carry the smart key.
2.Press the button of the front outside
door handle.
3.All doors will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink twice.
✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the outside door handle.
• When the smart key is recognized in
the area of 0.7 m (28 in.) from the
front outside door handle, other peo-
ple can also open the doors.
• After unlocking all doors, the doors
will lock automatically unless a door is
opened.
Tailgate unlocking
1.Carry the smart key.
2.Press the tailgate handle switch.
3.The tailgate will unlock.
✽
NOTICE
• Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate will lock automati-
cally.
• The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the tailgate handle.
Smart key precautions
✽
NOTICE
• If, for some reason, you happen to lose
your smart key, you will not be able to
start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if
necessary, and we recommend that
you contact an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, we recommend that
you contact an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
• The smart key will not work if any of
the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile two-
way radio system or a mobile phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
properly, open and close the door with
the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the smart key, we rec-
ommend that you contact an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
415
Features of your vehicle
Door lock/unlock in an emer-
gency situation
If the smart key does not operate normal-
ly, you can lock or unlock the doors by
using the mechanical key.
1.Press and hold the release button (1)
and remove the mechanical key (2).
2.Insert the key into the hole of the out-
side door handle. Turn the key toward
the rear of the vehicle to unlock and
toward the front of the vehicle to lock.
3. To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a
click sound is heard.
OVF043379
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the smart key gets damp
(due to drinks or moisture), or is
heated, internal circuit may mal-
function, excluding the car from the
warranty.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from elec-
tromagnetic materials that blocks
electromagnetic waves to the key
surface.
Features of your vehicle
164
Smart key function
1.Door lock
2.Door unlock
3.Boot open
With a smart key, you can lock or unlock
a door and boot and even start the
engine without inserting the key.
The functions of the buttons on a smart
key are similar to the remote keyless
entry. Refer to the “Remote keyless
entry” in this section.
Carrying the smart key, you may lock and
unlock the vehicle doors and boot.
Also, you may start the engine. Refer to
the following, for more details.
Locking
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the button of the outside door
handle.
4. The hazard warning lights will blink
once (the engine bonnet and boot
must be closed).
5. Make sure that doors are locked by
pulling the outside door handle.
✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the outside door handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for 3
seconds if any of following occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the boot is opened.
SMART KEY (SEDAN) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF041006/HOVF043375
417
Features of your vehicle
Unlocking
1. Carry the smart key.
2.Press the button of the front outside
door handle.
3.All doors will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink twice.
✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the outside door handle.
• When the smart key is recognized in
the area of 0.7 m (28 in.) from the
front outside door handle, other peo-
ple can also open the doors.
• After unlocking all doors, the doors
will lock automatically unless a door is
opened.
Boot opening
1.Carry the smart key.
2.Press the boot handle switch.
3.The boot will open.
✽
NOTICE
• Once the boot is opened and then
closed, the boot will lock automatical-
ly.
• The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the boot handle.
Smart key precautions
✽
NOTICE
• If, for some reason, you happen to lose
your smart key, you will not be able to
start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if
necessary, and we recommend that
you contact an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, we recommend that
you contact an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
• The smart key will not work if any of
the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile two-
way radio system or a cellular phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
properly, open and close the door with
the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the smart key, we rec-
ommend that you contact an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
Features of your vehicle
184
Door lock/unlock in an emer-
gency situation
If the smart key does not operate normal-
ly, you can lock or unlock the doors by
using the mechanical key.
1.Press and hold the release button (1)
and remove the mechanical key (2).
2.Insert the key into the hole of the out-
side door handle. Turn the key toward
the rear of the vehicle to unlock and
toward the front of the vehicle to lock.
3. To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a
click sound is heard.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the smart key gets damp
(due to drinks or moisture), or is
heated, internal circuit may mal-
function, excluding the car from the
warranty.
OVF043379
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from elec-
tromagnetic materials that blocks
electromagnetic waves to the key
surface.
419
Features of your vehicle
Vehicles equipped with an anti-theft
alarm system will have a label attached
to the vehicle with the following words:
1. WARNING
2. SECURITY SYSTEM
This system is designed to provide pro-
tection from unauthorised entry into the
vehicle. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the
second is the "Anti-Theft alarm" stage,
and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If
triggered, the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning
lights.
Armed stage
Using the smart key
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Make sure the intrusion/tilt sensor is
ON (the sensor ON/OFF button light is
off) and exit the vehicle.
3. Make sure that all doors, the engine
bonnet and tailgate are closed and
latched.
4.• Lock the doors by pressing the button
of the front outside door handle with
the smart key in your possession.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will operate
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If the tailgate or engine bonnet
remains opened, the hazard warning
lights will not operate and anti-theft
alarm will not arm. After this, if the
tailgate and engine bonnet are
closed, the hazard warning lights will
blink once.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed
stage
Anti-theft
alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
OJC040170
Features of your vehicle
204
• Lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the smart key.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will operate
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door, tailgate or engine bonnet
remains open, the hazard warning
lights won't operate and anti-theft
alarm will not arm. After this, if all
doors, tailgate and engine bonnet are
closed, the hazard warning lights will
blink once.
Using the transmitter
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine and remove the
ignition key from the ignition switch.
2. Make sure the intrusion/tilt sensor is
ON (the sensor ON/OFF button light is
off) and exit the vehicle.
3.Make sure that all doors, the engine
bonnet and tailgate are closed and
latched.
4.Lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the transmitter.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door, tailgate or engine bonnet
remains opened, the hazard warning
lights will not operate and anti-theft
alarm will not arm. After this, if all
doors, tailgate and engine bonnet are
closed, the hazard warning lights will
blink once.
Do not arm the system until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed whilst a
passenger(s) remains in the vehicle,
the alarm may be activated when the
passenger(s) moves in the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not lock the doors with the
(smart) key or the transmitter with
anybody left in the vehicle. The pas-
senger in the vehicle cannot unlock
the doors with the door lock button.
For example, if the door is locked
with the transmitter, the passenger
in the vehicle cannot unlock the
door without the transmitter.
421
Features of your vehicle
Intrusion/Tilt sensor ON/OFF condi-
tion
• To cancel the sensor operation, press
the sensor ON/OFF button when the
system in the "Disarmed" stage and
the ignition is OFF position. The button
light will turn on to indicate that the
sensor is deactivated. After pressing
the button, if the system is not armed
within 5 minutes, the sensor will be
activated again.
If the system is armed when the sen-
sor is in the OFF status, the
intrusion/tilt sensor will not operate
even though the button light is turned
off. Then, the alarm will be activated
when the system meets the
intrusion/tilt sensor off condition of
"Anti-Theft alarm" stage.
• To reactivate the sensor operation,
press the sensor ON/OFF button
again.
✽
NOTICE
• Do not activate the sensor if there are
any chances the vehicle tilts by the
outward influences (for example,
ferry boat travelling, tower parking
etc.), because it could cause the siren
to sound inadvertently.
• Make sure all windows are close
whilst the system operates. If not, the
sensor detects the inadvertent move-
ment inside the vehicle (for example,
blowing a wind or entering a butter-
fly) and it makes the siren sounds.
Anti-Theft alarm stage
Intrusion/tilt sensor off condition
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs whilst the system is
armed.
• A front or rear door is opened without
using transmitter or smart key.
• The tailgate is opened without using
transmitter or smart key.
• The engine bonnet is opened.
• The ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
Intrusion/tilt sensor on condition
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs whilst the system is
armed when the sensor is activated.
• The passenger(s) moves in the vehicle.
• The inclination of the vehicle is changed
to the certain degree.
• A front or rear door is opened without
using transmitter or smart key.
• The tailgate is opened without using
transmitter or smart key.
• The engine bonnet is opened.
• The ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
OVF041306
S
S
e
e
n
n
s
s
o
o
r
r
Features of your vehicle
224
The siren will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
27 seconds and repeat max. 9 times
whilst the system is met the alarm acti-
vate condition. To turn off the system,
unlock the doors with the transmitter or
smart key.
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when:
Transmitter
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The 3 seconds are passed after the
engine has been started.
Smart key
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The button of the front outside door is
pressed whilst carrying the smart key.
- The engine is started.
After the doors are unlocked, the hazard
warning lights will blink twice to indicate
that the system is disarmed.
After pressing the unlock button, if any
door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
✽
NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine whilst
the alarm is activated. The vehicle
starting motor is disabled during the
anti-theft alarm stage.
• If you lose your keys, we recommend
that you contact an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
theft-alarm system because it could
cause the theft-alarm system to
malfunction and we recommend
that you serviced an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the system are not cov-
ered by your vehicle manufacturer
warranty.
423
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from out-
side the vehicle
Mechanical key
To remove the cover:
1. Pull out the door handle (1).
2. Press the lever (A) located inside the
bottom part of the cover with a key or
flat-head screwdriver (2).
3. Push out the cover whilst pressing the
lever.
• After removing the cover, turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle to unlock
and toward the front of the vehicle to
lock (3).
• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door with
a key, only the driver’s door will
lock/unlock.
• Once the door is unlocked, it may be
opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
Transmitter/Smart key
• Doors can be locked and unlocked with
the transmitter or smart key.
• Doors can be locked and unlocked
pressing the button of the outside door
handle with the smart key in your pos-
session. (vehicle’s equipped with smart
key system)
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating
temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to system
components.
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING
• If you don't close the door
securely, the door may open
again.
• Be careful that someone's body
and hands are not trapped when
closing the door.
OVF041209R
L
L
o
o
c
c
k
k
U
U
n
n
l
l
o
o
c
c
k
k
WARNING
Be careful not to damage the cover
whilst removing it or misplace it
after removing it.
Features of your vehicle
244
In case of an emergency
If the power door lock switch does not
operate electrically, the only way to lock
the door(s) is with the mechanical key
from the outside key hole.
Doors without the outside key hole, you
can lock the door as follows:
1. Open the door.
2. Insert the key into the emergency door
lock hole and turn the key horizontally
to lock.
3. Close the door securely.
✽
NOTICE
Once the tailgate is closed when the
power door lock switch does not operate
electrically, you will not be able to open
the tailgate.
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door handle
Front door
If the inner door handle is pulled when
the door is locked, the door will unlock
and open.
Rear door
If the inner door handle is pulled once
when the door is locked, the door will
unlock.
If the inner door handle is pulled once
more, the door will open.
With central door lock/unlock switch
It is operated by pressing the door
lock/unlock switch.
• When you press the central door lock
switch, all vehicle doors will lock and
the indicator light on the switch will illu-
minate.
• If any door is opened when the switch
is pressed, all doors will not lock.
OVF041009
Lock
OVF041008/H
OVF041011R
■ Type B
OVF041010R
■ Type A
425
Features of your vehicle
• If any door is unlocked, the indicator of
the central door lock switch will go off.
• When you press the central door
unlock switch, all vehicle doors will
unlock.
✽
NOTICE
Once the doors are locked with the
transmitter or smart key, the doors can-
not be unlocked with the central door
lock/unlock switch.
WARNING -
Doors
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked whilst the
vehicle is in motion to prevent
accidental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discour-
age potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcy-
cles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
WARNING
- Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehi-
cle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possi-
bly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
WARNING - Door lock mal-
function
If a power door lock ever fails to
function whilst you are in the vehi-
cle, try one or more of the follow-
ing:
• Operate the other door locks and
handles.
• Lower the driver’s window and
use the key to unlock the door
from outside.
• Move to the cargo area and open
the tailgate. (wagon)
Features of your vehicle
264
Deadlocks (if equipped)
Some vehicles are equipped with a
deadlock system. Deadlocks prevent
opening of a door from either inside or
outside the vehicle once the deadlocks
have been activated providing an addi-
tional measure of vehicle security.
To lock the vehicle using the deadlock
function, the doors must be locked by
using the transmitter or smart key. To
unlock the vehicle, the transmitter or
smart key must be used again.
Door lock/unlock features
Impact sensing door unlock system
All doors will automatically unlock when
an impact causes the air bags to deploy.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will automatically lock after the
vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h).
Engine off door unlock system
(if equipped)
All doors will automatically unlock:
Without smart key system
When the key is removed from the igni-
tion switch.
With smart key system
When the engine start/stop button is in
the OFF position.
Shift lever door lock/unlock system
• All doors will automatically lock when
the shift lever is moved out of P (Park).
• All doors will automatically unlock
when the shift lever is moved into P
(Park).
You can activate or deactivate the auto
lock/unlock features in the vehicle. Refer
to "User setting" in this section.
WARNING
Do not lock the doors with the
transmitter or the smart key with
anybody left in the vehicle. The pas-
senger in the vehicle cannot unlock
the doors with the door lock button.
For example, if the door is locked
with the transmitter, the passenger
in the vehicle cannot unlock the
door without the transmitter.
427
Features of your vehicle
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally open-
ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehi-
cle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the
hole (1) and turn it to the “lock( )”
position. When the child safety lock is
in the lock position, the rear door will
not open even though the inner door
handle (3) is pulled inside the vehicle.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle (2).
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle (3) until rear door child
safety lock is unlocked.
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors whilst the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and be
severely injured or killed. To pre-
vent children from opening the rear
doors from the inside, the rear door
safety locks should be used when-
ever children are in the vehicle.
OVF041007
Features of your vehicle
284
Non-powered tailgate
Opening the tailgate
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or unlocked
with the key, transmitter, smart key or
central door lock/unlock switch.
• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tail-
gate unlock button on the transmitter or
smart key is pressed for approximately
1 second.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened
by pressing the handle and pulling it
up.
• Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate locks automatically.
(All doors must be locked.)
✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock and
door mechanisms may not work proper-
ly due to freezing conditions.
Closing the tailgate
Lower and push down the tailgate firmly.
Make sure that the tailgate is securely
latched.
TAILGATE (WAGON)
OVF041012
WARNING
The tailgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when open-
ing the tailgate.
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the tail-
gate before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
tailgate lift cylinders and attaching
hardware if the tailgate is not
closed prior to driving.
OVF041013
WARNING
Make sure your hands, feet and other
parts of your body are safely out of
the way before closing the tailgate.
CAUTION
Make sure nothing is near the tail-
gate latch and striker whilst closing
the tailgate. It may damage the tail-
gate's latch.
429
Features of your vehicle
Power tailgate (if equipped)
(1) Power tailgate open button
(2) Power tailgate handle switch
(3) Power tailgate close button
✽
NOTICE
The power tailgate operates when:
• Manual shift lever is in neutral.
• Automatic shift lever is in P (Park).
WARNING
- Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the tailgate
opened, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
which can cause serious injury or
death to vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tailgate
open, keep the air vents and all win-
dows open so that additional out-
side air comes into the vehicle.
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in the
rear cargo area where no restraints
are available. To avoid injury in the
event of an accident or sudden
stops, occupants should always be
properly restrained.
OVF041015R/OVF041014/OVF041016
WARNING
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
Children or animals might operate
the power tailgate that could result
in injury to themselves or others, or
damage the vehicle.
WARNING
Make sure there are no people or
objects around the tailgate before
operating the power tailgate. Wait
until the tailgate is opened fully and
stopped before loading or unload-
ing cargo or passengers from the
vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
304
Opening the tailgate
The power tailgate will open automatical-
ly by doing one of the following:
• Press the tailgate unlock button on the
transmitter or smart key.
• Press the power tailgate open button.
• Press the tailgate handle switch carry-
ing the smart key with you.
OVF041015R OVF041014
CAUTION
Do not close or open the power tail-
gate manually. This may cause dam-
age to the power tailgate. If it is nec-
essary to close or open the power
tailgate manually when the battery
is discharged or disconnected, do
not apply excessive force.
431
Features of your vehicle
Closing the tailgate
1. Press the power tailgate close button
(approximately 1 second).
2. The tailgate will close and lock auto-
matically.
Power tailgate non-opening condi-
tions
The power tailgate will not open or close
automatically, when the vehicle is moving
more than 2mph (3km/h).
✽
NOTICE
• The power tailgate can be operated
when the engine is not running.
However the power tailgate operation
consumes large amounts of vehicle
electric power. To prevent the battery
from being discharged, do not operate
it excessively e.g.: more than approxi-
mately 10 times repeatedly.
• To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the power tail-
gate in the open position for a long
lime.
• Do not modify or repair any part of
the power tailgate by yourself. We rec-
ommend that you contact an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
• When jacking up the vehicle to
change a tyre or repair the vehicle, do
not operate the power tailgate. This
could cause the power tailgate to oper-
ate improperly.
• In cold and wet climates, the power
tailgate may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
OVF041016
WARNING
The chime will sound and the haz-
ard warning flasher will blink 10
times if you drive with the tailgate
closed but not locked. Stop your
vehicle immediately at a safe place
and check if your tailgate is secure-
ly locked.
WARNING
The chime will sound continuously
if you drive over 2mph (3km/h) with
the tailgate opened. Stop your vehi-
cle immediately at a safe place and
check if your tailgate is opened.
Features of your vehicle
324
Automatic reversal
During power opening and closing if the
power tailgate is blocked by an object or
part of the body, the power tailgate will
detect the resistance.
• If the resistance is detected whilst
opening the tailgate, it will stop and
move in the opposite direction.
• If the resistance is detected whilst clos-
ing the tailgate, it will stop and move in
the opposite direction.
However, if the resistance is weak such
as from an object that is thin or soft, or
the tailgate is near the latched position,
the automatic stop and reversal may not
detect the resistance.
If the automatic reversal feature operates
continuously more than twice during
opening or closing operation, the power
tailgate may stop at that position. At this
time, close the tailgate manually and
operate the tailgate automatically again.
How to reset the power tailgate
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, or if the related fuse has
been replaced or disconnected, for the
power tailgate to operate normally, reset
the power tailgate as follow:
1. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
2. Press the tailgate handle switch and
tailgate close button at the same time
for more than 3 seconds. (the chime
will sound)
3. Close the tailgate manually.
If the power tailgate does not work prop-
erly after the above procedure, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked by
an authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
✽
NOTICE
If the power tailgate does not operate
normally, first check the following con-
dition before using the power tailgate.
Check if the shift lever is in:
• neutral for manual transaxle vehicles
• P (Park) for automatic transaxle vehi-
cles
OVF041017
WARNING
Never intentionally place any object
or part of your body in the path of
the power tailgate to make sure the
automatic reversal operates.
433
Features of your vehicle
Power tailgate opening height
user setting
The driver may set the height of a fully
opened tailgate by following the below
instruction.
1. Position the tailgate manually to the
height you prefer.
2. Press the tailgate close button for
more than 3 seconds.
3. Close the tailgate manually after hear-
ing the buzzer sound.
The tailgate will open to the height the
driver has set up.
Emergency tailgate safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with the emer-
gency tailgate safety release lever locat-
ed on the bottom of the tailgate. When
someone is inadvertently locked in the
luggage compartment. The tailgate can
be opened by doing as follows:
1. Remove the cover.
2. Push the release lever to the right.
3. Push up the tailgate.
OVF041018OVF041016
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully aware
of the location of the emergency
tailgate safety release lever in the
vehicle and how to open the tail-
gate if you are accidentally
locked in the luggage compart-
ment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compartment
of the vehicle at any time. The
luggage compartment is a very
dangerous location in the event
of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emer-
gencies only. Use with extreme
caution, especially whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
Features of your vehicle
344
Smart tailgate system
On the vehicle equipped with a smart
key, the tailgate can be opened with no-
touch activation using the Smart tailgate
system.
How to use the Smart tailgate
The tailgate can be opened with no-
touch activation satisfying below all con-
ditions when all doors are closed and
locked.
• After 15 seconds when all doors are
closed and locked
• Position in the detecting area
(Approx. 50~100 cm behind the vehi-
cle) for more than 3 seconds. (The
Hazard warning lights operate.)
1. Setting
The Smart tailgate function is deactivat-
ed by default.
You can set the Smart tailgate function
on User setting mode of the cluster.
❈ For more details, refer to “Instrument
Cluster” in this section.
2. Detecting and Alert
If you position in the detecting area
(Approx. 50~100 cm behind the vehicle)
with carrying the smart key, the hazard
warning lights and an alarm operate for
about 3 seconds.
• Stage 1 (Welcome alert)
The hazard warning lights operate
once when approaching the tailgate.
• Stage 2 (Detecting alert)
The hazard warning lights operate 3
times for 3 seconds
• Stage 3 (Opening alert)
The hazard warning lights operate 2
times.
SMART TAILGATE (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF043351OVF045370L
435
Features of your vehicle
3. Automatic opening
The hazard warning lights operate 2
times, and then the tailgate opens slowly.
CAUTION
• If you do not want to open the tail-
gate, do not approach the detect-
ing area.
If the hazard warning lights oper-
ate inadvertently in the detecting
area, keep the smart key away
from the rear bumper detection
area.
• If you position in the detecting
area, the tailgate may open inad-
vertently.
OVF043350
WARNING
• Make certain that you close the
tailgate before driving your vehi-
cle.
• Make sure there are no people or
objects around the tailgate before
opening or closing the tailgate.
• Make sure objects in the rear
cargo area do not come out when
opening the tailgate on the slope
way. It may cause serious injury.
• Make sure to deactivate the
Smart tailgate function when
washing your vehicle. Otherwise,
the tailgate may open inadver-
tently.
• Your vehicle should be kept
locked and the key should be
kept out of the reach of children.
Parents should teach their chil-
dren about the dangers of playing
in the luggage compartment.
Features of your vehicle
364
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Tailgate open
4. Indicator
How to deactivate the Smart tailgate
function using the smart key
If you press the any button of the smart
key during detecting and alert, the smart
tailgate function is deactivated.
CAUTION
• If the Smart tailgate function is
activated, this function is activat-
ed after 15 seconds when all
doors are closed and locked.
• If you position within 1.5 m from
driver’s door handle (or passen-
ger’s door handle), the Smart tail-
gate function is not deactivated.
(if welcome function is activated)
• The Smart tailgate function is
deactivated when any door are
open or unlocked.
• If the smart key positions in the
detecting area within 15 seconds
when all doors are closed and
locked, it takes about 10 minutes
and then the Smart tailgate func-
tion is deactivated.
• The Smart tailgate function is
deactivated when the smart key is
in the vehicle.
WARNING
• Make sure to be aware of proce-
dure to deactivate the Smart tail-
gate function for emergencies.
• If you press the door unlock but-
ton(2), the Smart tailgate function
is deactivated temporarily. Then,
if you do not open any door for 30
seconds, the Smart tailgate func-
tion is activated again.
• If you press the tailgate open but-
ton(3) for more than 1 second, the
tailgate opens.
• If you press the door lock button
(1) or tailgate open button (3)
when there are not detecting and
alert conditions, the Smart tail-
gate function is not deactivated.
OVF043375L
■ Smart key
437
Features of your vehicle
• If the smart key is detected within
50~100 cm from the tailgate, the Smart
tailgate function operates with the wel-
come alert.
• If the smart key positions outside the
detecting area during detecting and
alert, the alert stops at once.
CAUTION
In case that you deactivate the
Smart tailgate function by pressing
the smart key button, the Smart tail-
gate function is deactivated until all
doors are closed and locked.
OVF043353
■ Detecting area
CAUTION
• The Smart tailgate function will
not work if any of the following
occur :
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• The detecting range may
decrease or increase when :
- The one side of tire is raised for
replacing tire or inspecting the
vehicle.
- The vehicle is slantingly parked
on sloping road or unpaved
road. etc.
Features of your vehicle
384
Opening the boot
• Press the boot unlock button for more
than 1 second on the transmitter (or
smart key).
• Press the button on the boot handle
with the smart key in your possession.
Once the boot is opened and then
closed, the boot locks automatically.
• To open the boot from inside the vehi-
cle, press the boot lid release switch.
Once the boot is opened and then
closed, the boot locks automatically.
✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, boot lock and
boot mechanisms may not work proper-
ly due to freezing conditions.
BOOT (SEDAN)
OVF044015R
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the
boot before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
boot lift cylinders and attached
hardware if the boot is not closed
prior to driving.
WARNING
The boot swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when open-
ing the boot.
OVF041335
439
Features of your vehicle
Closing the boot
To close, lower the boot lid, then press
down on it until it locks. To be sure the
boot lid is securely fastened, always
check by trying to pull it up again.
✽
NOTICE
If the boot is closed with the smart key
in it, the chime will sound for approxi-
mately 3 seconds and the boot will
reopen.
Emergency boot safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with an emer-
gency boot release cable located inside
the boot. If someone is inadvertently
locked in the boot, moving the handle in
the direction of the arrow will release the
boot latch mechanism and open the
boot.
WARNING
The boot lid should be always kept
completely closed whilst the vehi-
cle is in motion. If it is left open or
ajar, poisonous exhaust gases may
enter the car and serious illness or
death may result.
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully aware
of the location of the emergency
boot safety release lever in this
vehicle and how to open the boot
if you are accidentally locked in
the boot.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the boot at any time. The
boot is a very dangerous location
in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emer-
gencies only. Use extreme cau-
tion, especially whilst the vehicle
is in motion.
OVF041336
Features of your vehicle
404
Smart boot system
On the vehicle equipped with a smart
key, the boot can be opened with no-
touch activation using the Smart boot
system.
How to use the Smart boot
The boot can be opened with no-touch
activation satisfying below all conditions
when all doors are closed and locked.
• After 15 seconds when all doors are
closed and locked
• Position in the detecting area
(Approx. 50~100 cm behind the vehi-
cle) for more than 3 seconds. (The
Hazard warning lights operate.)
1. Setting
The Smart boot function is deactivated
by default.
You can set the Smart boot function on
User setting mode of the cluster.
❈ For more details, refer to “Instrument
Cluster” in this section.
2. Detecting and Alert
If you position in the detecting area
(Approx. 50~100 cm behind the vehicle)
with carrying the smart key, the hazard
warning lights operate for about 3 sec-
onds.
• Stage 1 (Welcome alert)
The hazard warning lights operate
once when approaching the boot.
• Stage 2 (Detecting alert)
The hazard warning lights operate 3
times for 3 seconds
• Stage 3 (Opening alert)
The hazard warning lights operate 2
times.
SMART BOOT (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF045371L OVF045351K
441
Features of your vehicle
3. Automatic opening
The hazard warning lights operate 2
times, and then the boot opens slowly.
CAUTION
• If you do not want to open the
boot, do not approach the detect-
ing area.
If the hazard warning lights oper-
ate inadvertently in the detecting
area, keep the smart key away
from the rear bumper detection
area.
• If you position in the detecting
area, the boot may open inadver-
tently.
OVF045350K
WARNING
• Make certain that you close the
boot before driving your vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people or
objects around the boot before
opening or closing the boot.
• Make sure objects in the rear
cargo area do not come out when
opening the boot on the slope
way. It may cause serious injury.
• Make sure to deactivate the
Smart boot function when wash-
ing your vehicle. Otherwise, the
boot may open inadvertently.
• Your vehicle should be kept
locked and the key should be
kept out of the reach of children.
Parents should teach their chil-
dren about the dangers of playing
in the luggage compartment.
Features of your vehicle
424
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Boot open
4. Indicator
How to deactivate the Smart boot
function using the smart key
If you press the any button of the smart
key during detecting and alert, the smart
boot function is deactivated.
CAUTION
• If the Smart boot function is acti-
vated, this function is activated
after 15 seconds when all doors
are closed and locked.
• If you position within 1.5 m from
driver’s door handle (or passen-
ger’s door handle), the Smart
boot function is not deactivated.
(if welcome function is activated)
• The Smart boot function is deac-
tivated when any door are open or
unlocked.
• If the smart key positions in the
detecting area within 15 seconds
when all doors are closed and
locked, it takes about 10 minutes
and then the Smart boot function
is deactivated.
• The Smart boot function is deac-
tivated when the smart key is in
the vehicle.
OVF043375L
■ Smart key
WARNING
• Make sure to be aware of proce-
dure to deactivate the Smart boot
function for emergencies.
• If you press the door unlock but-
ton(2), the Smart boot function is
deactivated temporarily. Then, if
you do not open any door for 30
seconds, the Smart boot function
is activated again.
• If you press the boot open but-
ton(3) for more than 1 second, the
boot opens.
• If you press the door lock button
(1) or boot open button(3) when
there are not detecting and alert
conditions, the Smart boot func-
tion is not deactivated.
443
Features of your vehicle
• If the smart key is detected within
50~100 cm from the boot, the Smart
boot function operates with the wel-
come alert.
• If the smart key positions outside the
detecting area during detecting and
alert, the alert stops at once.
CAUTION
In case that you deactivate the
Smart boot function by pressing
the smart key button, the smart
boot function is deactivated until all
doors are closed and locked.
OVF045353K
■ Detecting area
CAUTION
• The Smart boot function will not
work if any of the following occur
:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• The detecting range may
decrease or increase when :
- The one side of tire is raised for
replacing tire or inspecting the
vehicle.
- The vehicle is slantingly parked
on sloping road or unpaved
road. etc.
Features of your vehicle
444
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power win-
dow switch
(3) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (left) power window switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window up*/down*
(7) Power window lock switch
*: if equipped
✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
OVF041019R
445
Features of your vehicle
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door’s window. The dri-
ver’s door has a master power window
switch that controls all the windows in the
vehicle. Also, the driver has a power win-
dow lock switch which can block the
operation of rear passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the igni-
tion key is removed or turned to the ACC
or LOCK position. However, if the front
doors are opened, the power windows
cannot be operated even within the 30
seconds period.
✽
NOTICE
Whilst driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if equipped) in
an open (or partially open position), your
vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffet-
ing or pulsation noise. This noise is a
normal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the following
actions. If the noise occurs with one or
both of the rear windows down, partially
lower both front windows approximate-
ly one inch. If you experience the noise
with the sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
Window opening and closing
Type A
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corre-
sponding switch to the first detent posi-
tion (5).
Type B
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power window
switch momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers or lifts the
window even when the switch is released.
To stop the window at the desired position
whilst the window is in operation, pull up
or press down and release the switch.
OVF041020R OVF041021R
Features of your vehicle
464
✽
NOTICE
If the power window does not operate
normally, the automatic power window
system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the driver’s window and contin-
ue pulling up the driver’s power win-
dow switch for at least 1 second after
the window is completely closed.
Automatic reversal (for type B window)
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement. The window
will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8
in.) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
whilst the power window switch is pulled
up continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approxi-
mately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the power
window switch is pulled up continuously
again within 5 seconds after the window
is lowered by the automatic window
reversal feature, the automatic window
reversal will not operate.
✽
NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature is only
active when the “auto up” feature is
used by fully pulling up the switch. The
automatic reverse feature will not oper-
ate if the window is raised using the
halfway position on the power window
switch.
OUN026013/H
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage. If an
object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in
diameter is caught between the
window glass and the upper win-
dow channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the resist-
ance and will not stop and reverse
direction.
447
Features of your vehicle
Power window lock button
The driver can disable the power window
switches on the rear passengers’ doors
by pressing the power window lock
switch to the lock position(pressed).
When the power window lock switch is
pressed :
• The driver’s master control can operate
all the power windows.
• The front passenger’s control can
operate the front passenger’s power
window.
• The rear passenger’s control cannot
operate the rear passenger’s power
window.
OVF041022R
WARNING -
Windows
• NEVER leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren, when the engine is running.
• NEVER leave any child unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Even very
young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entan-
gle themselves in the windows,
or otherwise injure themselves or
others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head and
other obstructions are safely out
of the way before closing a win-
dow.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the dri-
ver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(pressed). Serious injury can
result from unintentional window
operation by the child.
• Do not extend face or arms out-
side the window whilst driving.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do not
open or close two windows or
more at the same time. This will
also ensure the longevity of the
fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
Features of your vehicle
484
Opening the bonnet
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
bonnet. The bonnet should pop open
slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
bonnet slightly, push up the secondary
latch (1) inside of the bonnet centre
and lift the bonnet (2).
3. Raise the bonnet. It will raise com-
pletely by itself after it has been raised
halfway.
Closing the bonnet
1. Before closing the bonnet, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the bonnet halfway and push it
down. Make sure the bonnet is locked
securely.
BONNET
OVF041023R
WARNING
Open the bonnet after turning off
the engine on a flat surface, shift-
ing the shift lever to the P(Park)
position for automatic transaxle/
dual clutch transmission and to the
1(First) gear or R(Reverse) for man-
ual transaxle, and setting the park-
ing brake.
OVF045024K
449
Features of your vehicle
WARNING -
Bonnet
• Before closing the bonnet,
ensure that all obstructions are
removed from the bonnet open-
ing. Closing the bonnet with an
obstruction present in the bonnet
opening may result in property
damage or severe personal
injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING
• Always double check to be sure
that the bonnet is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the bonnet could fly
open whilst the vehicle is being
driven, causing a total loss of vis-
ibility, which might result in an
accident.
• The support rod must be inserted
completely into the hole whenev-
er you inspect the engine com-
partment. This will prevent the
bonnet from falling and possibly
injuring you.
• Do not move the vehicle with the
bonnet raised. The view will be
blocked and the bonnet could fall
or be damaged.
Features of your vehicle
504
Opening the fuel filler lid
1. To open the lid, press the middle of the
edge of the lid.
✽
NOTICE
The lid will open only when a door is
unlocked. If the anti-theft alarm system
is activated, the fuel filler lid will not
open.
2. Fully open the lid.
3. To open the cap, turn it counterclock-
wise.
4. Refuel as needed.
✽
NOTICE
If the fuel-filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the lid to break the ice
and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid.
If necessary, spray around the lid with
an approved de-icer fluid (do not use
radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle
to a warm place and allow the ice to
melt.
FUEL FILLER LID
OVF041025
OVF041337
■ Wagon
■ Sedan
OVF041026
OVF041343
■ Wagon
■ Sedan
451
Features of your vehicle
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is
securely tightened.
2. To close the lid, press the edge of the
lid. Make sure it is securely closed.
WARNING - Refuelling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and thus subject you to the risk
of fire and burns. Always remove
the fuel cap carefully and slowly.
If the cap is venting fuel or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until
the condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refuelling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
WARNING -
Refuelling
dangers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refuelling, please
note the following guidelines care-
fully. Failure to follow these guide-
lines may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death by fire
or explosion.
• Read and follow all warning post-
ed at the gas station facility.
• Before refuelling note the loca-
tion of the Emergency Petrol
Shut-Off, if available, at the gas
station facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuelling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or fab-
ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static elec-
tricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapours resulting
in rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other petrol
source.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure to
place the container on the
ground prior to refuelling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapours
causing a fire. Once refuelling
has begun, contact with the vehi-
cle should be maintained until
the filling is complete.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
524
(Continued)
Use only portable plastic fuel
containers designed to carry and
store petrol.
• Do not use mobile phones whilst
refuelling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from
mobile phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapours causing a fire.
• When refuelling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel
vapours causing a fire. Once
refuelling is complete, check to
make sure the filler cap and filler
door are securely closed, before
starting the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle whilst at
a gas station especially during
refuelling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refu-
elling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately contact
the manager of the gas station
and then contact the local fire
department. Follow any safety
instructions they provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel require-
ments" suggested in section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, please make sure
that you use parts designed for
replacement in your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can result
in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control
system. For more detailed infor-
mation, we recommend that you
contact an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• After refuelling, make sure the
fuel cap is installed securely to
prevent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
453
Features of your vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the
sunroof control lever located on the over-
head console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freez-
ing conditions.
• After a vehicle is washed or in a rain-
storm be sure to wipe off any water
that is on the sunroof before operating
it.
PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF041311R
CAUTION
• Do not continue to move the sun-
roof control lever after the sunroof
is fully opened, closed, or tilted.
Damage to the motor or system
components could occur.
• Make sure the sunroof is fully
closed when leaving your vehicle.
If the sunroof is opened, rain or
snow may leak through the sun-
roof and wet the interior as well
as cause theft.
Features of your vehicle
544
Sunshade
• To open the sunshade, pull the sunroof
control lever backward to the first
detent position.
• To close the sunshade when the sun-
roof glass is closed, push the sunroof
control lever forward.
To stop the sliding at any point, pull or push
the sunroof control lever momentarily.
Sliding the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the second detent position, the
sunshade will slide all the way open then
the sunroof glass will slide all the way
open. To stop the sunroof movement at
any point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward, the sunroof glass will slide all the
way open. To stop the sunroof movement
at any point, pull or push the sunroof con-
trol lever momentarily.
WARNING
• Never adjust the sunroof or sun-
shade whilst driving. This could
result in loss of control and an
accident that may cause death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
• If you would like to carry items on
the roof using a cross bar, do not
operate the sunroof.
• When carrying cargo on the roof,
do not load heavy items above
the sunroof or glass roof.
• Do not allow children to operate
the sunroof.
OYF049214 OVF041028
455
Features of your vehicle
Tilting the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunshade will slide all the
way open then the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
Closing the sunroof
To close the sunroof glass only
Push the sunroof control lever forward to
the first detent position or pull the lever
downward.
To close the sunroof glass with the
sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever forward to
the second detent position. The sunroof
glass will close then the sunshade close
automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is detect-
ed whilst the sunroof glass or sunshade
is closing automatically, it will reverse the
direction, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not work
if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding
glass or sunshade and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all passen-
gers and objects are away from the sun-
roof before closing it.
OYF049215OVF041029
Features of your vehicle
564
Resetting the sunroof
Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the fol-
lowings)
- Battery is discharged or disconnected
or the related fuse has been replaced
or disconnected
- The one-touch sliding function of the
sunroof does not normally operate
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the sunshade and sunroof
completely if opened.
3. Release the sunroof control lever.
4. Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close (about 10 sec-
onds) until the sunroof moves a little.
Then, release the lever.
5. Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close, until the sun-
roof operates as follows again:
SUNSHADE OPEN → TILT OPEN →
SLIDE OPEN → SLIDE CLOSE →
SUNSHADE CLOSE
Then, release the lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof sys-
tem has been reset.
WARNING -
Sunroof
• Be careful that no head, hands
and body parts are obstructed by
a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sunroof
whilst driving.
• Make sure your hands and head
are safely out of the way before
closing a sunroof.
CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be dam-
aged.
457
Features of your vehicle
A driver position memory system is pro-
vided to store and recall the driver seat
position with a simple button operation.
By saving the desired position into the
system memory, different drivers can
reposition the driver seat based upon
their driving preference. If the battery is
disconnected, the position memory will
be erased and the driving position should
be restored in the system.
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Change the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat comfortable for
the driver.
3. Press SET button on the control panel.
The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or
2) within 5 seconds after pressing the
SET button. The system will beep
twice when memory has been suc-
cessfully stored.
DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
Never attempt to operate the driver
position memory system whilst the
vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property damage.
OVF041030R
Features of your vehicle
584
Recalling positions from memory
1. Change the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. To recall the position in the memory,
press the desired memory button (1 or
2). The system will beep once, then the
driver’s seat will automatically adjust to
the stored position.
Adjusting the control switch for the dri-
ver’s seat whilst the system is recalling
the stored position will cause the move-
ment to stop and move in the direction
that the control switch is moved.
Easy access function
(if equipped)
The system will move the driver's seat
automatically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rearward
when the ignition key is removed and
the driver’s door is open.
- It will move the driver’s seat forward
when the ignition key is inserted.
• With smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rearward
when the engine start/stop button is
changed to the OFF position and the
driver’s door is open.
- It will move the driver’s seat forward
when the engine start/stop button is
changed to the ACC or START posi-
tion.
You can activate or deactivate this feature.
Refer to "User setting" in this section.
WARNING
Use caution when recalling the
adjustment memory whilst sitting
in the vehicle. Push the seat posi-
tion control switch to the desired
position immediately if the seat
moves too far in any direction.
459
Features of your vehicle
Electronic power steering (EPS)
Power steering uses the motor to assist
you in steering the vehicle. If the engine
is off or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, the vehicle may
still be steered, but it will require
increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is con-
trolled by the power steering control unit
which senses the steering wheel torque
and vehicle speed to command the
motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed
decreases for better control of the steer-
ing wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, we recommend that
the system be checked by authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
✽
NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur dur-
ing normal vehicle operation:
• The steering effort is high immediate-
ly after turning the ignition switch on.
This happens as the system performs
the EPS system diagnostics. When the
diagnostics is completed, the steering
wheel will return to its normal condi-
tion.
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON or LOCK/OFF posi-
tion.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving
speed.
• When you operate the steering wheel
in low temperature, abnormal noise
could occur. If temperature rises, the
noise will disappear. This is a normal
condition.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the vehicle is stationary, if you
turn the steering wheel all the way to
the left or right continuously, the
steering wheel effort increases. This is
not a system malfunction. As time
passes, the steering wheel effort will
return to its normal condition.
If the Electronic Power Steering System
does not operate normally, the warning
light will illuminate on the instrument
cluster. The steering wheel may become
difficult to control or operate abnormally.
We recommend that you contact a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
STEERING WHEEL
Features of your vehicle
604
Tilt steering
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust
the steering wheel before you drive. You
can also raise it to give your legs more
room when you exit and enter the vehi-
cle.
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
whilst permitting you to see the instru-
ment panel warning lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down the lock release lever (1), adjust
the steering wheel to the desired angle
(2) and height (3), then pull up the lock-
release lever to lock the steering wheel in
place. Be sure to adjust the steering
wheel to the desired position before driv-
ing.
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion, pressing the heated steering wheel
button warms the steering wheel. The
indicator on the button will illuminate and
notify you on the LCD display.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The indica-
tor on the button will turn off and notify
you on the LCD display.
✽
NOTICE
The heated steering wheel will turn off
automatically approximately 30 minutes
after the heated steering wheel is turned
on.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle and height
of steering wheel whilst driving.
You may lose your steering con-
trol and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
OVF041031R OVF041032R
461
Features of your vehicle
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn sym-
bol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area indi-
cated by the horn symbol on your steer-
ing wheel (see illustration). The horn
will operate only when this area is
pressed.
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do
not press on the horn with a sharp-
pointed object.
OVF041033
CAUTION
Do not install any grip to operate
the steering wheel. This causes
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.
Features of your vehicle
624
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
centre view through the rear window is
seen. Make this adjustment before you
start driving.
Day/night rearview mirror (if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and whilst the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automatical-
ly controls the glare from the headlights
of the car behind you in nighttime or low
light driving conditions. The sensor
mounted in the mirror senses the light
level around the vehicle, and automati-
cally controls the headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare is
automatically controlled by the sensor
mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into R
(Reverse), the mirror will automatically
go to the brightest setting in order to
improve the drivers view behind the vehi-
cle.
MIRRORS
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision out the
rear window.
OVF041034
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the liq-
uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-
ing.
Day
Night
WARNING
Do not adjust the rearview mirror
whilst the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident which could cause
death, serious injury or property
damage.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror and
do not install a wide mirror. It could
result in injury, during an accident
or deployment of the air bag.
463
Features of your vehicle
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn
the automatic dimming function on.
The mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
automatic dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
• The mirror defaults to the ON position
whenever the ignition switch is turned
on.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both left-
hand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. The mir-
ror heads can be folded back to prevent
damage during an automatic car wash or
when passing in a narrow street.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with very warm
water.
OVF041202
WARNING - Rearview mir-
rors
• The outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mir-
ror are closer than they appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to deter-
mine the actual distance of fol-
lowing vehicles when changing
lanes.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use
an approved spray de-icer (not radi-
ator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors whilst the vehicle
is moving. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious injury
or property damage.
S
S
e
e
n
n
s
s
o
o
r
r
I
I
n
n
d
d
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
o
o
r
r
Features of your vehicle
644
Remote control
Electric type
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To
adjust the position of either mirror, move
the lever (1) to R (Right) or L (Left) to
select the right side mirror or the left side
mirror, then press a corresponding point
on the mirror adjustment control to posi-
tion the selected mirror up, down, left or
right.
After adjustment, put the lever into neu-
tral (centre) position to prevent inadver-
tent adjustment.
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the
housing of mirror and then fold it toward
the rear of the vehicle.
OVF041035R
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate whilst the switch is
pressed. Do not press the switch
longer than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the parts.
OVF041036/H
465
Features of your vehicle
Electric type
To fold the outside rearview mirror, press
the button.
To unfold it, press the button again.
OVF041037R
CAUTION
In case it is an electric type outside
rearview mirror, don’t fold it by
hand. It could cause motor failure.
CAUTION
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the
ignition switch is in the OFF posi-
tion. However, to prevent unneces-
sary battery discharge, do not
adjust the mirrors longer than nec-
essary whilst the engine is not run-
ning.
Features of your vehicle
664
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
6. Turn signal indicators
7. LCD display
OVF045040R/OVF045041R
* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to "Gauges" in the
following pages.
■
Type A
■
■
Type B
467
Features of your vehicle
Instrument panel illumination
The instrument panel illumination intensi-
ty can be adjusted as follows:
• Ignition switch in the ON position
• Parking light or headlight on
• Pushing the control switch up or down
The illumination intensity is shown on the
instrument cluster LCD display.
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the vehicle
speed.
The speedometer is calibrated in mile
per hour and kilometers per hour.
OVF041042R
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVF041043L
■ Type C
OVF041043N
OVF041043
WARNING
Never adjust the instrument cluster
whilst driving. This could result in
loss of control and lead to an acci-
dent that may cause death, serious
injury, or property damage.
Features of your vehicle
684
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
■ Petrol Engine
■ Diesel Engine
OVF041045
OVF041044
■
■
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
A
A
■
■
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
B
B
OVF041047
OVF041047L
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“130/H” position, it indicates over-
heating that may damage the
engine.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
469
Features of your vehicle
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
✽
NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-
tion 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will illu-
minate when the fuel tank is nearly
empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier
than usual due to the movement of
fuel in the tank.
Outside temperature
The current outside temperature is dis-
played in 1°C (1°F) increments. The tem-
perature range is between -40°C ~ 60°C (-
40°F ~ 140°F).
• The outside temperature on the display
may not change immediately like a gen-
eral thermometer to prevent the driver
from being inattentive.
• To convert from °C to °F or °F to °C
press the ( ) button form more than 5
seconds in the Distance to empty (DTE)
mode.
■
■
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
A
A
■
■
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
B
B
OVF041046
OVF041046L
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addition-
al fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
“O/E (Empty)” level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire damag-
ing the catalytic converter.
OVF043089
Features of your vehicle
704
Transaxle shift indicator
Manual transaxle shift indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator informs you which gear is
desired whilst driving to save fuel.
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shift
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the
3rd gear is desired (currently the
shift lever is in the 4th or 5th gear).
When the system is not working proper-
ly, the indicator is not displayed.
* Not applicable when towing.
Automatic transaxle shift indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator displays which automatic
transaxle shift lever is selected.
Automatic transaxle shift indicator
(Sports mode) (if equipped)
In the sports mode, this indicator informs
you which gear is desired whilst driving
to save fuel.
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shift
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the
3rd gear is desired (currently the
shift lever is in the 4th or 5th gear).
When the system is not working proper-
ly, the indicator is not displayed.
OVF041048 OVF041049 OVF041048
471
Features of your vehicle
Dual Clutch Transmission Shift
Indicator (if equipped)
This indicator displays which shift lever is
selected.
•Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive :D
• Sports Mode : D
1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7
Icy road warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driver
the road may be icy when:
• Ignition ON
• Temperature range: approximately
below 4°C (39.2°F).
The warning light will blink for 10 sec-
onds and then illuminate. Also, the warn-
ing chime will sound.
✽
NOTICE
If the icy road warning light appears
whilst driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sud-
den braking or sharp turning, etc.
LCD display
The Trip computer, User setting,
Warnings, etc. are displayed on the LCD
display.
To change between groups, press the
( ) button.
To change between modes in groups,
press the ( ) button.
OVF041090OVF045049K OVF045050K
Features of your vehicle
724
Trip computer
The trip computer is a microcomputer-
controlled driver information system that
displays information related to driving.
✽
NOTICE
Some driving information stored in the
trip computer (for example Average
Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is
disconnected.
Trip modes
To change the trip mode, select the “▼”
button on the steering wheel.
Trip A/B (km or mile, km/h or MPH)
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-
tance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km or
mi.
• To reset the tripmeter, press the [▼]
button on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the tripmeter is
displayed.
OVF045372E
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
TRIP B
• Distance To Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
Digital Speedometer
(if equipped)
473
Features of your vehicle
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is calculat-
ed by the total driving distance and
driving time since the last average
vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 km/h or MPH
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the [▼] button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second when
the average vehicle speed is displayed.
✽
NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less
than 300 meters (0.19 miles) or the
driving time is less than 10 seconds
since the ignition switch or the Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps calcu-
lating whilst the engine is running.
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driving
time since the last elapsed time reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press the
[▼] button on the steering wheel for
more than 1 second when the elapsed
time is displayed.
✽
NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
elapsed time keeps calculating whilst the
engine is running.
Fuel economy (km or mile, L/100km,
km/L or MPG)
Distance To Empty (1)
• The distance to empty is the estimated
distance the vehicle can be driven with
the remaining fuel.
- Distance range: 1 ~ 9999 km or
1 ~ 9999 mi.
• If the estimated distance is below
1 km (1 mi.), the trip computer will dis-
play “---” as distance to empty.
OVF045373E
Features of your vehicle
744
✽
NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupt-
ed, the distance to empty function
may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as it
is an estimate of the available driving
distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehi-
cle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving habits,
and condition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calculat-
ed by the total driving distance and fuel
consumption since the last average
fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range:
0.0 ~ 99.9 L/100km, km/L or MPG
• The average fuel economy can be
reset when the [▼] button is pressed
on the steering wheel for more than 1
second.
• The average fuel economy can be
reset after 4 hours when the ignition
switch or smart key is in the OFF posi-
tion.
• The average fuel economy will be
cleared to zero (---) when the vehicle
speed exceeds 1 km/h after refueling
more than 6 liters (1.6 gallons).
✽
NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not dis-
played for more accurate calculation if
the vehicle does not drive more than 10
seconds or 300 meters (0.19 miles) since
the ignition switch or the Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few seconds
when the vehicle speed is more than
10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 30
L/100km, km/L or 0 ~ 50 MPG
475
Features of your vehicle
Digital Speedometer (km/h or MPH)
(if equipped)
This message shows the speed of the
vehicle (km/h, MPH).
OVF045364K
Features of your vehicle
764
User settings mode
On this mode, you can change setting of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, and so on.
Driving Assist (if equipped)
Items Explanation
LKAS
(Lane Keep Assist System)
• Lane Departure Warning System : To activate LDWS function
• Pre-departure mode : To activate the pre-departure mode of LKAS function
• Post-departure mode : To activate the post-departure mode of LKAS function
For more details, refer to "LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) and LKAS (Lane Keeping
Assist System)" in chapter 5.
Speed limit info. The information of speed limit is showed on the LCD display.
477
Features of your vehicle
Items Explanation
Auto Lock
• Disable: The auto door lock operation will be deactivated.
• Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 15km/h
(9.3mph).
• Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is shift-
ed from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) posi-
tion.
Auto Unlock
• Disable: The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.
• On Key Out/Vehicle off: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed
from the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button is set to the OFF
position.
• On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is shift-
ed to the P (Park) position.
Door Lock Sound To activate or deactivate the lock sound when locking doors.
Smart Tailgate/Smart Boot
To activate or deactivate the Smart Tailgate/Smart Boot system.
For more details, refer to "Smart Tailgate/Smart Boot" in this chapter.
Door/Boot
Features of your vehicle
784
Items Explanation
Head Lamp Delay
• On: The head lamp delay function will be activated.
• Off: The headlamp delay function will be deactivated.
For more details, refer to “Lighting” in this chapter.
Welcome Light
• On: The welcome light function will be activated.
• Off: The welcome light function will be deactivated.
For more details, refer to “Lighting” in this chapter.
Travel Mode
If this item is checked, the traffic change function will be activated.
For more details, refer to “Lighting” in this chapter.
Sound
Items Explanation
Welcome Sound
• Off : The welcome sound function will be deactivated.
• On : The welcome sound function will be activated.
Lights
479
Features of your vehicle
Items Explanation
Seat Easy Access
• None: The seat easy access function will be deactivated.
• Normal/Extended:
- When you turn off the engine, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward short (Normal)
or long (Extended) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.
- If you change the Engine Start/Stop button from OFF position to the ACC, ON, or START posi-
tion, the driver’s seat will return to the original position.
For more details, refer to “Driver Position Memory System” in this chapter.
Items Explanation
Service Interval
(Except Europe)
On this mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage (km or mi.) and period
(months).
• Off : The service interval function will be deactivated.
• On :You can set the service interval (mileage and months).
Service interval
Seat/Steering
Features of your vehicle
804
Items Explanation
Fuel Economy Auto Reset
• Off : The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.
• After Refueling : The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Fuel Economy Unit Choose the fuel economy unit. (Km/L, L/100)
Temperature Unit Choose the temperature unit. (°C,°F)
Tire Pressure Unit Choose the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, bar)
Language Choose the language.
Other features
481
Features of your vehicle
LCD display informations
Clock (if equipped)
The time is displayed when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
•
Time format mode
To change the 12 hour format to 24 hour
format:
1. Press the TIME button for more than
1second.
2. Press the button to switch from
12H to 24H or 24H to 12H.
3. Press the ▼ button to select the time
format you desire.
•
Time adjust mode
To change the time (hour/minute) :
1. Press the ▼ button when in the time
format mode.
2. Press the button to change the
hour (advance by 1 hour).
3. Press the ▼ button to move the
minute.
4. Press the button to change the
time by 1 minute (advance by 1
minute).
5. Press the ▼ button to move out of the
Time mode.
OVF041065
OVF045131K/Q
OVF045131K/Q
Features of your vehicle
824
Door/Boot (Tailgate) open
The indicator appears to inform the driv-
er which door or tailgate/boot is opened.
Heated steering wheel ON/OFF
The indicator will appear when the heat-
ed steering wheel is turned on.
The indicator will appear when the heat-
ed steering wheel is turned off.
For more details, refer to “Steering
wheel” in section 4.
OVF043066
■ Door
OVF043067
■ Tailgate
OVF045068L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF045069L
■ Type A ■ Type B
483
Features of your vehicle
Illumination intensity
The illumination intensity of the instru-
ment panel is shown when adjusting it
with the illumination control switch.
For more details, refer to “Instrument
panel illumination” in section 4.
Parking assist warning
Displays the area an obstacle is detected
whilst moving forward or rearward.
For more details, refer to “Parking assist
system” in section 4.
Low tyre pressure (if equipped)
The low tyre pressure position telltale will
appear when one or more of your tyres
are under-inflated. It will indicate the cor-
responding under-inflated tyre.
For more details, refer to “TPMS” in sec-
tion 6.
OVF041071
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF041070
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF045367L
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
844
Turn on FUSE SWITCH (mode switch)
The notice appears to inform the driver to
turn on the fuse switch in the instrument
panel under the steering wheel.
For more details, refer to “Fuses” in sec-
tion 7.
Check active air flap system
The notice appears to inform the driver
when:
• The flaps malfunction
• The active air flap controller malfunc-
tions
• The air flaps are not opened in a con-
dition that has to be opened
When all of the above conditions are
fixed, the warning will disappear.
✽
NOTICE
• The above warning message may
appear even though the active air flap
has not malfunctioned. Please check
for foreign matter or if the flap has
frozen.
• In winter, the warning may not illumi-
nate immediately.
OVF045366L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF045365L
■ Type A ■ Type B
485
Features of your vehicle
Key not in vehicle
If the smart key is not in the vehicle and
if any door is opened or closed with the
engine start/stop button in the ACC, ON,
or START position, the warning illumi-
nates on the LCD display. Also, the chime
sounds for 5 seconds when the smart
key is not in the vehicle and the door is
closed.
Always have the smart key with you.
Key not detected
If the smart key is not in the vehicle or is
not detected and you press the engine
start/stop button, the warning illuminates
on the LCD display for 10 seconds. Also,
the immobiliser indicator blinks for 10
seconds.
Press start button with key
If you press the engine start/stop button
whilst the warning “Key is not detected”
illuminates the warning “Press the start
button with smart key” illuminates for 10
seconds on the LCD display. Also, the
immobiliser indicator blinks for 10 sec-
onds.
Warning messages (if equipped)
OVF045375L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF045376L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF045377L
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
864
Low key battery
If the engine start/stop button changes to
the OFF position when the smart key in
the vehicle discharges, the warning illu-
minates on the LCD display for about 10
seconds. Also, the warning chime
sounds once.
Replace the battery with a new one.
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for automatic transaxle/
Dual clutch transmission)
If the engine start/stop button changes to
the ACC position twice by pressing the
button repeatedly without depressing the
brake pedal, the warning illuminates on
the LCD display for about 10 seconds to
indicate that you should depress the
brake pedal to start the engine.
Press clutch pedal to start engine
(for manual transaxle)
If the engine start/stop button turns to the
ACC position twice by pressing the but-
ton repeatedly without depressing the
clutch pedal, the warning illuminates on
the LCD display for about 10 seconds to
indicate that you should depress the
clutch pedal to start the engine.
OVF045378L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF045379L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF045380L
■ Type A ■ Type B
487
Features of your vehicle
Shift to P position
If you try to turn off the engine without the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, the
engine start/stop button will turn to the
ACC position. If the button is pressed
once more it will turn to the ON position.
The warning illuminates on the LCD dis-
play for about 10 seconds to indicate that
you should press the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position to turn off the engine.
Also, the warning chime sounds for about
10 seconds. (if equipped)
Press start button again
If you can not operate the engine
start/stop button when there is a problem
with the engine start/stop button system,
the warning illuminates for 10 seconds
and the chime sounds continuously to
indicate that you could start the engine
by pressing the engine start/stop button
once more.
The chime will stop if the engine
start/stop button system works normally
or the anti-theft alarm system is armed.
If the warning illuminates each time you
press the engine start/stop button, we
recommend that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
Shift to P or N to start engine
If you try to start the engine with the shift
lever not in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
position, the warning illuminates for
about 10 seconds on the LCD display.
You can also start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position, but
for your safety start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
OVF045381L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVF045382L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF045383L
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
884
Press START button whilst turning wheel
(if equipped)
If the steering wheel does not unlock nor-
mally when the engine start/stop button
is pressed, the warning illuminates for 10
seconds on the LCD display. Also, the
warning chime sounds once and the
engine start/stop button light blinks for 10
seconds.
When you are warned, press the engine
start/stop button whilst turning the steer-
ing wheel right and left.
Check steering wheel lock system
(if equipped)
If the steering wheel does not lock nor-
mally when the engine start/stop button
changes to the OFF position, the warning
illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD
display. Also, the warning chime sounds
for 3 seconds and the engine start/stop
button light blinks for 10 seconds.
Check BREAK SWITCH fuse
When the stop lamp fuse is disconnect-
ed, the warning illuminates for 10 sec-
onds on the LCD display.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If that
is not possible you can start the engine
by pressing the engine start/stop button
for 10 seconds in ACC.
OVF045384L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF045385L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF045386L
■ Type A ■ Type B
489
Features of your vehicle
Check exhaust system (Diesel only)
The notice appears to inform the driver
when the DPF system malfunctions.
In this case, please visit a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer and the check the
DPF system.
For more details, refer to "Diesel particu-
late filter" in section 7.
Check ECS (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction with the
Electronic Control Suspension (ECS)
system. We recommend that the vehi-
cle be inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer.
For more details, refer to "Electronic
Control Suspension (ECS)" in chapter 5.
✽
NOTICE -
ECS Warning
Message
When there is a malfunction with the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), the
Electronic Control Suspension (ECS)
warning message may illuminate as well
as the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) Indicator Light.
OVF045411OVF045387L
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
904
Warnings and indicators
(Instrument cluster)
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). If any light that does not illumi-
nate, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention.
The following warning and indicators are
introduced in the previous pages.
• Automatic transaxle shift lever indica-
tor
• Manual transaxle shift indicator
• Icy road warning
• Door/tailgate (or boot) open (LCD dis-
play)
• Heated steering wheel ON/OFF (LCD
display)
• Parking assist warning (LCD display)
• Low tyre pressure (LCD display)
Seat belt warning and
chime light
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink or illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch ON regardless of
belt fastening.
For more details, refer to the “Seat belt”
in section 3.
491
Features of your vehicle
Air bag warning light
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
This light also comes on when the SRS
is not working properly. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not come on, or con-
tinuously remains on after operating for
about 6 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position or start-
ed the engine, or if it comes on whilst
driving, we recommend that the system
be inspected by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
Immobiliser indicator
Without smart key system
This indicator illuminates when the
immobiliser key is inserted and turned to
the ON position to start the engine.
At this time, you can start the engine.The
indicator goes out after the engine is run-
ning.
If this indicator blinks when the ignition
switch is in the ON position before start-
ing the engine, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
With smart key system
If any of the following occurs in a vehicle
equipped with the smart key, the immo-
biliser indicator illuminates, blinks or
goes off.
• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if
the engine start/stop button is in the
ACC or ON position, the indicator will
illuminate for approximately 30 sec-
onds to indicate that you are able to
start the engine. However, when the
smart key is not in the vehicle, if the
engine start/stop button is pressed, the
indicator will blink for a few seconds to
indicate that you are not be able to
start the engine.
• If the indicator illuminates only for 2
seconds and goes out when the
engine start/stop button is turned to
ON position with the smart key in the
vehicle, we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
• When the battery is weak, if the engine
start/stop button is pressed, the indi-
cator will blink and you are not able to
start the engine. However, you are able
to start the engine by pressing the
engine start/stop button directly with
the smart key. Also, if the smart key
system related parts have a problem,
the indicator will blink.
Features of your vehicle
924
Door ajar warning light
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely.
Tailgate/Boot open warning
light
This warning light illuminates when the
tailgate/boot is not closed securely.
Low fuel level warning
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “O/E” can
cause the engine to misfire and damage
the catalytic converter (if equipped).
EPS (Electronic Power
Steering) system warning
light
This indicator light comes on after the
ignition key is turned to the ON position
and then it will go out.
This light also comes on when the EPS
has some problems. If it comes on whilst
driving, we recommend that the system
be checked by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
Turn signal indicator lights
The blinking green arrows on the instru-
ment panel show the direction indicated
by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,
a malfunction in the turn signal system is
indicated. Your repairer should be con-
sulted for repairs.
493
Features of your vehicle
Light on indicator
The indicator illuminates when the tail
lights or headlights are ON.
Low Beam Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates when the
headlights are on.
For vehicles equipped with instrument
cluster type B, the indicator illuminates
on the LCD display.
High beam indicator
This indicator illuminates when the head-
lights are on and in the high beam posi-
tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Smart high beam indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the high-beam is on with the
light switch in the AUTO light position.
• If your vehicle detects oncoming or
preceding vehicles, the smart high
beam system will switch the high
beam to low beam automatically.
For more details, refer to “Smart High
Beam” in this chapter.
AFLS (Adaptive Front
Lighting System)
malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
If the AFLS malfunction indicator illumi-
nates, the AFLS is not working properly.
Drive to the nearest safe location and
restart the engine. If the indicator contin-
uously remains on, we recommend that
the vehicle be inspected by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
Front fog light indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator illuminates when the front
fog lights are ON.
Rear fog light indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator illuminates when the rear
fog lights are ON.
Low washer fluid level
warning indicator
This warning light indicates the washer
fluid reservoir is nearly empty. Refill the
washer fluid as soon as possible.
AFLS
Features of your vehicle
944
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning
Parking brake warning
This light illuminates when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the START or ON position. The warning
light should go off when the parking
brake is released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly. We
recommend that the vehicle be towed
to any authorised HYUNDAI repairer
for a brake system inspection and nec-
essary repairs.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-
nal braking systems. This means you still
have braking on two wheels even if one
of the systems should fail. With only one
of the dual systems working, more than
normal pedal travel and greater pedal
pressure are required to stop the car.
Also, the car will not stop in as short a
distance with only a portion of the brake
system working. If the brakes fail whilst
you are driving, shift to a lower gear for
additional engine braking and stop the
car as soon as it is safe to do so.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
EPB (Electric Parking
Brake) malfunction indica-
tor
The EPB malfunction indicator will illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is turned
ON, but should go off after approximate-
ly 3 seconds. If the warning light does not
come on, or continuously remains on we
recommend that the system be checked
by an authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
Also, the EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator comes
on to indicate that the ESC is not working
properly, but if this occurs, it does not
indicate the EPB has malfunctioned.
For more details, refer to "EPB" in sec-
tion 5.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light on is dangerous. If the brake
warning light remains on, we rec-
ommend that the system be
checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
EPB
495
Features of your vehicle
AUTO HOLD indicator
(if equipped)
If you press the AUTO HOLD switch, the
AUTO HOLD indicator on the cluster
comes on white. And when you stop the
vehicle completely by pressing the brake
pedal, the indicator changes from white
to green.
If the AUTO HOLD malfunction indicator
lights up yellow, the AUTO HOLD is not
working properly. We recommend that
the system be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
For more details, refer to “AUTO HOLD”
in section 5.
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
This light illuminates if the ignition switch
is turned ON and goes off in approxi-
mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-
ing normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on whilst driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, this indicates
that there may be a problem with the
ABS.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer. The normal braking
system will still be operational, but with-
out the assistance of the anti-lock brake
system.
Electronic brake
force distribution
(EBD) system
warning light
If two warning lights illuminate at the
same time whilst driving, your vehicle’s
ABS and EBD system may have mal-
functioned.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. We rec-
ommend that the system be checked by
an authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
AUTO
HOLD
WARNING
If both ABS and Brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehi-
cle’s brake system will not work
normally. So you may experience
an unexpected and dangerous situ-
ation during sudden braking. In this
case, avoid high speed driving and
abrupt braking.
We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Features of your vehicle
964
✽
NOTICE
If the ABS warning light or EBD warn-
ing light is on and stays on, the
speedometer or odometer/tripmeter
may not work. Also, the EPS warning
light may illuminate and the steering
effort may increase or decrease. In this
case, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) indicator
The ESC indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 sec-
onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors
the driving conditions. Under normal driv-
ing conditions, the ESC indicator will
remain off. When a slippery or low trac-
tion condition is encountered, the ESC
will operate, and the ESC indicator will
blink to indicate the ESC is operating.
But, if the ESC system malfunctions the
indicator illuminates and stays on. We
recommend that the system be checked
by an authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
ESC OFF indicator
The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,
press the ESC OFF button. The ESC
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESC is deactivated.
497
Features of your vehicle
Auto stop indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator will illuminate when the
engine enters the Idle Stop mode of the
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system.
When the automatic starting occurrs, the
auto stop indicator on the cluster will
blink for 5 seconds.
For more details, refer to the ISG (Idle
Stop and Go) system in section 5.
For vehicles equipped with instrument
cluster type B, the indicator illuminates
on the LCD display.
✽
NOTICE
When the engine automatically starts by
the ISG system, some warning lights
(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or Parking
brake warning light) may turn on for a
few seconds.
This happens because of low battery
voltage. It does not mean the system is
malfunctioning.
Cruise indicator (if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
control system is enabled by pressing
/CRUISE button on the steering
wheel. The indicator goes off when the
/CRUISE button is pressed again to
deactivate the system.
OVF055028L
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
984
Cruise SET indicator
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
control switch (-SET or RES+) is
pressed.
The cruise SET indicator does not illumi-
nate when the cruise control switch
(CANCEL) is pushed or the system is
disengaged.
For more details, refer to "Cruise control
system" in section 5.
The cruise indicators illuminates on the
LCD display.
Speed limiter indicator (if equipped)
The indicator illuminates when the speed
limit control system is enabled by press-
ing button on the steering wheel.
The indicator goes off when the but-
ton is pressed again to deactivate the
system.
If there is a problem with the speed limit
control system, the “OFF” indicator will
blink.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
For more details, refer to “Speed limit
control system” in section 5.
The speed limiter indicators illuminates
on the LCD display.
OVF055029L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVF055024L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVF055027L
■ Type A
■ Type B
499
Features of your vehicle
LKAS (Lane Keeping
Assistant System)
indicator (if equipped)
The LKAS indicator will illuminate when
you turn the lane keeping assistant sys-
tem on by pressing the LKAS button.
If there is a problem with the system, the
yellow LKAS indicator will illuminate.
For more details, refer to "LKAS" in sec-
tion 5.
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System) indicator (if equipped)
Low tyre pressure telltale/
TPMS malfunction indicator
The low tyre pressure telltale comes on
for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
The low tyre pressure and position tell-
tales illuminates when one or more of
your tyres is significantly underinflated.
The TPMS malfunction indicator will illu-
minate after it blinks for approximately
one minute when there is a problem with
the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
For more details, refer to the TPMS in
section 6.
The low tyre pressure position telltale
illuminates on the LCD display.
WARNING
- Safe stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tyre damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instabili-
ty, immediately take your foot off
the accelerator pedal, apply the
brakes gradually and with light
force and steer the vehicle to a
safe position on the side of the
road.
Features of your vehicle
1004
Engine oil pressure warn-
ing
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates whilst driv-
ing:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, we rec-
ommend that you call an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Engine oil level warning
light (if equipped)
The engine oil level warning light illumi-
nates when the engine oil level should be
checked.
If the warning light comes on, check the
engine oil level as soon as possible and
add engine oil as required. NB When top-
ping up a delay will be experienced
before the light is extinguished.
Slowly pour the recommended oil little by
little into a funnel. (Oil refill capacity :
approximately 0.6 ~ 1.0 l)
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to "Recommended lubricants and capac-
ities" in section 8.)
Do not overfill the engine oil to ensure
the oil level is not above F mark on the
dipstick.
For vehicles equipped with instrument
cluster type B, the indicator illuminates
on the LCD display.
CAUTION
If the oil pressure warning light
stays on whilst the engine is run-
ning, serious engine damage may
result. The oil pressure warning
light comes on whenever there is
insufficient oil pressure. In normal
operation, it should come on when
the ignition switch is turned on,
then go out when the engine is
started. If the oil pressure warning
light stays on whilst the engine is
running, there is a serious malfunc-
tion.
If this happens, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so, turn off
the engine and check the oil level. If
the oil level is low, fill the engine oil
to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on
with the engine running, turn the
engine off immediately. In any
instance where the oil light stays on
when the engine is running, we rec-
ommend that the system be
checked by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
CAUTION
If the engine does not stop immedi-
ately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated, severe
damage could result.
4101
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
• If you travel approximately 30 ~ 60
miles after the engine warms up, after
adding the engine oil, the warning
light will go off.
• Cycle the ignition from OFF to ON 3
times within 10 seconds, the warning
light will go off immediately. However,
when you turn off the warning light
without adding the engine oil, the light
will come on again after travelling
approximately 30 ~ 60 miles after the
engine warms up.
Malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL) (check engine light)
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates whilst driving, it indi-
cates that a potential problem has been
detected somewhere in the emission
control system.
This light will also illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion, and will go out in a few seconds
after the engine is started. If it illuminates
whilst driving, or does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, we recommend that the system
be checked by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer promptly.
CAUTION
If the light comes on continuously
after adding the engine oil and trav-
eling approximately 30 ~ 60 miles
after the engine warms up, we rec-
ommend that the system be
checked by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
Even if this light doesn't come on
after the engine has started, the
engine oil should be checked and
supplied periodically.
CAUTION
Prolonged driving with the
Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-
nated may cause damage to the
emission control systems which
could effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
CAUTION -
Petrol engine
If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-
nates, potential catalytic converter
damage is possible which could
result in loss of engine power.
We recommend that the Engine
Control System be inspected by an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer as
soon as possible.
Features of your vehicle
1024
Engine coolant tempera-
ture warning light
(if equipped)
The warning light illuminates if the tem-
perature of the engine coolant is above
120±3°C (248±5.4°F).
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “Overheating” in section 6.
✽
NOTICE
If the engine coolant temperature warn-
ing light illuminates, it indicates over-
heating that may damage the engine.
CAUTION -
Diesel engine
If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light blinks,
some error related to the injection
quantity adjustment occurs which
could result in loss of engine
power, combustion noise and poor
emission. We recommend that the
Engine Control System be inspect-
ed by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer as soon as possible.
CAUTION - Diesel engine
(if equipped with DPF)
When the malfunction indicator
light blinks, it may stop blinking
after driving the vehicle at more
than 37 mph (60km/h) or at more
than second gear with 1500 ~ 2000
engine rpm for a certain time (for
about 25 minutes).
If the malfunction indicator light
continues to blink in spite of the
procedure, we recommend that the
DPF system be checked by an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
If you continue to drive with the
malfunction indicator light blinking
for a long time, the DPF system can
be damaged and fuel consumption
can worsen.
4103
Features of your vehicle
Glow indicator
(Diesel engine)
The indicator light illuminates when the
ignition switch is placed at the ON posi-
tion. The engine can be started after the
preheat indicator light goes off. The illu-
minating time varies with the water tem-
perature, air temperature and battery
condition.
✽
NOTICE
If the engine does not start within 10
seconds after the preheating is complet-
ed, turn the ignition key once more to
the LOCK/OFF position for 10 seconds,
and then to the ON position, in order to
preheat again.
Fuel filter warning light
(Diesel engine)
This warning light illuminates for 3 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is set to the
ON position and then it will go out. If it
lights up whilst the engine is running, it
indicates that water has accumulated
inside the fuel filter. If this happens,
remove the water from the fuel filter.
For more details, refer to “Fuel filter” in
section 7.
Charging system warning
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on whilst the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the genera-
tor drive belt for looseness or break-
age.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-
lem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. We recommend that
the system be checked by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
CAUTION
When the fuel filter warning light
illuminates, engine power (vehicle
speed & idle speed) may decrease.
If you keep driving with the warning
light on, you can damage your vehi-
cle's engine parts and injection sys-
tem of the Common Rail. If this
occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
CAUTION
If the preheat indicator light contin-
ues to illuminate or flash on and off
after the engine has warmed up or
whilst driving, we recommend that
the system be checked by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer as soon as
possible.
Features of your vehicle
1044
The parking assist system assists the
driver during movement of the vehicle by
chiming if any object is sensed within the
distance of 100 cm (39 in.) in front and
120 cm (47 in.) behind the vehicle. This
system is a supplemental system and it
is not intended to nor does it replace the
need for extreme care and attention of
the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limited.
Whenever moving pay as much attention
to what is in front and behind of you as
you would in a vehicle without a parking
assist system.
Operation of the parking assist
system
Operating condition
• This system activates when the park-
ing assist button is pressed with the
ignition switch ON.
• The indicator of the parking assist sys-
tem button turns on automatically and
activates the parking assist system
when you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position or press the SPAS
button. It will turn off automatically
when you drive above 20 km/h (12.4
mph), 30 km/h (18.6 mph). (If equipped
with SPAS)
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
The parking assist system should
only be considered as a supple-
mentary function. The driver must
check the front and rear view. The
operational function of the parking
assist system can be affected by
many factors and conditions of the
surroundings, so the responsibility
rests always with the driver.
OVF041104R
OVF045103K/OVF041100/OVF041338
■ Rear
- Wagon
■ Front
- Sedan
S
S
e
e
n
n
s
s
o
o
r
r
S
S
e
e
n
n
s
s
o
o
r
r
S
S
e
e
n
n
s
s
o
o
r
r
4105
Features of your vehicle
• The sensing distance whilst backing up
is approximately (front : 100 cm (39 in.),
rear : 120 cm (47 in.)) when you are
driving less than 10 km/h (6.2 mph).
• The sensing distance whilst moving
forward is approximately 60 cm (24 in.)
when you are driving less than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
✽
NOTICE
It may not operate if it’s distance from
the object is already less than approxi-
mately 25 cm (10 in.) when the system is
ON.
✽
NOTICE
• The actual warning sound and indicator may differ from the illustration accord-
ing to objects or sensor status.
• Do not wash the vehicle's sensor with high pressure water.
Type of warning indicator and sound
: with Warning sound
Distance from object
Warning indicator
Warning sound
When driving
forward
When driving
rearward
100cm~61cm Front -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
120cm~61cm Rear -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
60cm~31cm
Front
Buzzer beeps
frequently
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
frequently
30cm
Front
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Rear -
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Features of your vehicle
1064
Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system
Parking assist system may not oper-
ate normally when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when moisture
melts.)
2. Sensor is covered with foreign matter,
such as snow or water, or the sensor
cover is blocked. (It will operate nor-
mally when the material is removed or
the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Sensor is stained with foreign matter
such as snow or water. (Sensing range
will return to normal when removed.)
4.The parking assist button is off.
There is a possibility of parking
assist system malfunction when:
1. Driving on uneven road surfaces such
as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, or
gradient.
2. Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes can inter-
fere with the sensor.
3. Heavy rain or water spray.
4. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones present near the sensor.
5. Sensor is covered with snow.
Detecting range may decrease when:
1. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
2. Undetectable objects smaller than 1
metres (39 in.) and narrower than 14
cm (5 in.) in diameter.
The following objects may not be rec-
ognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects, which tend to absorb sensor
frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
CAUTION
• This system can only sense
objects within the range and loca-
tion of the sensors;
It can not detect objects in other
areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim
objects, such as poles or objects
located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the
vehicle when backing up.
• Be sure to inform any drivers of
the vehicle that may be unfamiliar
with the system regarding the
systems capabilities and limita-
tions.
4107
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
1. The warning may not sound sequen-
tially depending on the speed and
shapes of the objects detected.
2. The parking assist system may mal-
function if the vehicle bumper height
or sensor installation has been modi-
fied. Any non-factory installed equip-
ment or accessories may also interfere
with the sensor performance.
3. Sensor may not recognize objects less
than 30 cm (12 in.) from the sensor, or
it may sense an incorrect distance.
Use with caution.
4. When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow or water, the sensor may be
inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-
sor with any hard objects that could
damage the surface of the sensor.
Sensor damage could occur.
✽
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects with-
in the range and location of the sensors,
it can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, or objects located
between sensors may not be detected.
Always visually check in front and
behind the vehicle when driving.
Be sure to inform any drivers in the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabili-
ties and limitations.
Self-diagnosis
When you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position and if one or more of
the below occurs you may have a mal-
function in the rear parking assist sys-
tem.
• You don't hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-
tently.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants related to a parking assist
system. Always drive safely and
cautiously.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehi-
cle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visual
inspection to make sure the vehicle
is clear of all obstructions before
moving the vehicle in any direction.
(blinks)
• is displayed. (if equipped)
Features of your vehicle
1084
The Smart Parking Assist System helps
drivers park their vehicle by using sen-
sors to measure parallel parking spaces,
control the steering wheel to semi-auto-
matically park the car and provide
instruction on the LCD display to help
through parking.
✽
NOTICE
• The vehicle will not stop for pedestri-
ans or objects that may be in its path,
so the driver must monitor the
manoeuvre.
• Use the system only in parking lots
and places used for parking.
• The system does not work if there is
no car parked in front of the parking
space you are planning to park or if it
is a diagonal parking space.
• After parking your vehicle using the
system, the vehicle may not be parked
at the exact spot you have wished. For
example, the space between your vehi-
cle and wall may not be the distance
you have desired.
• Deactivate the system and park your
vehicle manually, when the situation
requires parking manually.
• The Parking Assist System's front and
rear warning sound activates when
the Smart Parking Assist System is
activated.
• After searching for a parking space is
completed, the Smart Parking Assist
System will be canceled if the Parking
Assist System is cancelled by pressing
the button to the OFF position.
SMART PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (SPAS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF041306R
WARNING
• The Smart Parking Assist System
should only be considered as a
supplementary function. The driv-
er must check the front and rear
view for objects. The operational
function of the Smart Parking
Assist System can be affected by
many factors and conditions of the
surroundings, so the responsibili-
ty rests always with the driver.
• The system may not operate nor-
mally if the vehicle needs wheel
alignment adjustment. We recom-
mend that the system be checked
by an authorised HYUNDAI repair-
er.
• If you use a different tyre or
wheel size rather than the size
recommended by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer, the system
may not work properly. Always
use the same size tyre and wheel.
4109
Features of your vehicle
Operating condition
The system will help park the vehicle in
the middle or back of a parked vehicle.
Use the system when all the below con-
ditions are met.
• When the parking space is a straight
line
• When parallel parking is required
• When there is a parked vehicle
• When there is enough space to move
the vehicle
Non-operating condition
Never use the Smart Parking Assist
System in the below conditions.
• Curved parking space
• Inclined roads
• A vehicle loaded with longer or wider
cargo compared to the vehicle
• Diagonal parking space
• Parking space with trash, grass or bar-
riers
• Heavy snow or rain
• A pole close to the parking line
• Bumpy roads
• A vehicle equipped with a snow chain
or spare tyre
• Tyre pressure lower or higher than the
standard tyre pressure
• A trailer connected to the vehicle
• Slippery or uneven road
• Big vehicles such as buses or trucks
parked
• Sensor covered with foreign matter,
such as snow or water
• Moisture frozen on the sensor.
• A motorcycle or bicycle parked
• A trash can or obstacle near
• Heavy wind
• Wheel changed to an unauthorised
size
• A problem with the wheel alignment
• Next to a garden or bush
OVF041307R
■ Right side
- parallel mode
■ Left side
-parallel mode
Features of your vehicle
1104
WARNING
Do not use the Smart Parking
Assist System in the following con-
ditions for unexpected results may
occur and cause a serious accident.
1. Parking on inclines
The driver must apply the accelera-
tor and brake pedal when parking
on inclines. If the driver is unfamil-
iar with applying the accelerator
and brake pedal, a car accident may
occur.
(Continued)
OVF041300
(Continued)
2. Parking in snow
Snow may interfere with sensor
operation or the system may cancel
if the road is slippery whilst park-
ing. Also, if the driver is unfamiliar
with applying the accelerator and
brake pedal, a car accident may
occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
3. Parking in narrow space
The system may not search for
parking spaces if the space is too
narrow. Even if it operates always
be careful.
(Continued)
OVF041301
OVF041302
4111
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
4. Parking diagonal
The system is a supplemental for
parallel parking. Diagonal line park-
ing is not available. Even if the vehi-
cle is able to enter the space, do
not operate the Smart Parking
Assist System. The system will
attempt parallel parking.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5. Parking in uneven road
Parking in uneven roads, the driver
needs to properly apply the pedal
(clutch, accelerator or brake). If not,
the system may cancel when the
vehicle slips or an accident may
occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6. Parking behind a truck
An accident may occur when park-
ing behind a vehicle higher than
yours. For example, bus, truck, etc.
(Continued)
OVF041308R OVF041304
OVF041305
Features of your vehicle
1124
How the system works
1. Activate the Smart Parking Assist
System
2. Select parking assist mode
3. Search for parking space (slowly move
forward.)
4. Search complete (automatic search by
sensor.)
5. Steering wheel control
(1) Shift according to the instruction on
the LCD display.
(2) Drive slowly with the brake pedal
applied.
6. Smart Parking Assist System com-
plete
7. If necessary, manually adjust position
of vehicle.
✽
NOTICE
• Before activating the system check if
the conditions are possible to use the
system.
• For your safety, always apply the
brake pedal except for when driving.
(Continued)
7. Obstacle in parking space
The system may search for a park-
ing space even though an obstacle
is in the parking space. An accident
may occur if you continue to park
the vehicle with the system.
Do not solely rely on the Smart
Parking Assist System.
OVF041309R
4113
Features of your vehicle
1. Activate Smart Parking Assist
System
• Press the Smart Parking Assist
System button (the button indicator will
illuminate).
• The Parking Assist System will be acti-
vated (the button indicator will illumi-
nate).
A warning sound will be heard if an
obstacle is detected.
• Press the Smart Parking Assist
System button again for more than 2
seconds to turn off the system.
• The Smart Parking Assist System
defaults to the OFF position whenever
the ignition switch is turned on.
2. Select parking assist mode
• Select the parking assist mode by
pressing the Smart Parking Assist
System button with the shift lever in N
(Neutral) or D (Drive) and the brake
pedal depressed.
• The right side parallel mode is select-
ed automatically when the Smart
Parking Assist System is activated.
• To select the left side parallel mode
press the Smart Parking Assist System
button once more.
• If the button is pressed again, the sys-
tem will turn off.
3. Search for parking space
• Slowly drive forward maintaining the
distance of approximately
50 cm ~ 150 cm (19.6 in. ~ 59.0 in.)
with the parked vehicles. The side sen-
sors will search for a parking space.
• If the vehicle speed is over 12 mph (20
km/h), a message will appear to notify
to reduce speed.
• If the vehicle speed is over 19 mph (30
km/h), the system will cancel.
OVF041105R OVF045388L
■ Right side
- parallel mode
■ Left side
-parallel mode
OVF045389L
■ Right side
- parallel mode
■ Left side
-parallel mode
Features of your vehicle
1144
✽
NOTICE
• Turn on the hazard warning flasher if
it is crowded with other vehicles.
• If the parking lot is small, slowly drive
more nearer to the parking space.
• The search for a parking space will be
completed only when there is enough
space for the vehicle to move to park.
✽
NOTICE
• When searching for a parking space,
the system may not be able to find a
parking space if there is no vehicle
parked, a parking space is available
after driving by or a parking space is
available before driving by.
• The system may not operate normally
in the following conditions:
(1) When the sensors are frozen
(2) When the sensors are dirty
(3) When it snows or rains heavily
(4) When a pillar or object is near
✽
NOTICE
Slowly drive forward maintaining the
distance of approximately
50 cm ~ 150 cm (19.6 in. ~ 59.0 in.) with
the parked vehicles. If not within the
distance, the system may not be able to
search for a parking space.
CAUTION
After searching for a parking space
is completed, continue using the
system after checking the sur-
rounding area.
CAUTION
Whilst using the Smart Parking
Assist System if the Auto Hold acti-
vates the above message will
appear. Turn the Auto Hold opera-
tion off. When you cancel the Auto
Hold operation by depressing the
accelerator pedal, always check the
surrounding area near your vehicle.
OVF041310R
50~150 cm
OVF045390L
4115
Features of your vehicle
4. Search complete
Whilst driving forward to search for a
parking space, the above message will
appear with a beep sound if the search is
complete. Stop the vehicle and shift to
the R (Reverse) position.
5. Steering wheel control
• The above message will appear if the
shift lever is in R (Reverse). The steer-
ing wheel will be controlled automati-
cally.
• The system will be cancelled if you
firmly hold the steering wheel whilst it
is controlled automatically.
• The system will be cancelled if vehicle
speed is over 4 mph (7 km/h).
✽
NOTICE
• If you do not follow the instructions
provided, you may fail to park your
vehicle.
However, if the Parking Assist System
warning sound (distance from object
is within 30cm (12 in.): continuous
beep) occurs, slowly drive the vehicle
to the reverse direction of the detected
object after checking the surrounding.
• Always check the surrounding before
driving your vehicle if the Parking
Assist System warning sound (dis-
tance from object is within 30cm (12
in.): continuous beep) is heard for the
object is close to your vehicle.
CAUTION
• Always drive slowly with the
brake pedal applied.
• Always check for objects around
your vehicle before driving.
• If the vehicle does not move even
though the brake pedal is not
depressed, check the surround-
ing before depressing the accel-
erator pedal. Be sure not to speed
over 4 mph (7 km/h).
CAUTION
• Always drive slowly with the
brake pedal applied.
• If the parking space is to small
the system may be cancelled at
the Steering wheel control stage.
Do not park your vehicle if the
space is too small.
WARNING
Do not put your hands between the
steering wheel whilst it is being
automatically controlled.
OVF045391L
■ Right side
- parallel mode
■ Left side
-parallel mode
OVF045392L
Features of your vehicle
1164
To cancel the system whilst parking
Press the Smart Parking Assist System
button or turn the steering wheel to the
left or right.
Gear shift whilst steering wheel control
When the above message appears with a
beep sound, shift the gear and drive the
vehicle with the brake pedal depressed.
WARNING
Always be careful whilst parking for
other vehicles or pedestrians.
CAUTION
Always check the surrounding
before releasing the brake pedal.
OVF045393L
OVF045394L
■ Manual transaxle
■ Automatic transaxle
4117
Features of your vehicle
6. Smart Parking Assist System com-
pleted
Complete parking your vehicle according
to the instructions on the LCD display. If
required, manually control the steering
wheel and complete parking your vehicle.
✽
NOTICE
The brake pedal must be depressed by
the driver whilst parking your vehicle.
The system may be cancelled in the below
conditions:
• Ignoring the gear shift message and
drive the vehicle approximately
150cm (60 in.).
• The front and rear Parking Assist
System warning sound (distance from
object is within 30 cm (12 in.): continu-
ous beep) is heard at the same time.
• 6 minutes have passed since the vehi-
cle has been controlled by the Smart
Parking Assist System.
• The shift lever is changed to the P
(Park) or R (Reverse) position whilst
searching for parking space.
Additional instructions(messages)
When the Smart Parking Assist System
is operating, a message may appear
regardless of the parking order.
The messages will appear according to
the circumstances. Follow the instruc-
tions provided whilst parking your vehicle
with the Smart Parking Assist System.
OVF041112 OVF045395L
Features of your vehicle
1184
✽
NOTICE
• In the below conditions the system
will be cancelled. Park your vehicle
manually.
1. Search for parking space
- When the ABS/ESC is activated
- When the vehicle speed is over 25
mph (40 km/h)
- When you press the Smart Parking
Assist System button (the front and
rear Parking Assist System operates)
- When you shift the shift lever to R
(Reverse)
2. Steering wheel control
- When the ABS/ESC is activated
- When the vehicle speed is over 4
mph (7 km/h)
- When you press the Smart Parking
Assist System button (the front and
rear Parking Assist System operates)
- When you shift the shift lever to D
(Drive) before entering the parking
space
- When you hold the steering wheel
firmly
System malfunction
• If there is a problem with the system,
when the system is turned on, the
above message will appear. Also, the
indicator on the button will not light up
and a beep sound will be heard 3
times.
• If there is a problem with only the
Smart Parking Assist System, the
Parking Assist System will operate
after 2 seconds.
If you notice any problem, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by
an authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
OVF045396L
4119
Features of your vehicle
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
The rearview camera will activate when
the back-up light is ON with the ignition
switch ON and the shift lever in the R
(Reverse) position.
Type A
Red line (
➀
) : Approximately 50cm from
the rear bumper of the
vehicle
Yellow line (
➁
) : Approximately 100cm
from the rear bumper of
the vehicle
Yellow line (
➂
) : Approximately 300cm
from the rear bumper of
the vehicle
The left side of the yellow line (
➃
) :
Trace of the left wheel
of the vehicle
The right side of the yellow line (
➄
) :
Trace of the right
wheel of the vehicle
Blue line (
➅
) : Neutral trace of steering
Type B
The rearview camera may be turned off
by pressing the ON/OFF button when the
rearview camera is activated.
To turn the camera on again, press the
ON/OFF button again when the ignition
switch is on and the shift lever in R
(Reverse). Also, the camera will turn on
automatically whenever the ignition
switch is turned off and on again.
✽
NOTICE
A notification "Warning ! Check sur-
roundings for safety " will appear on the
rearview display when the rearview
camera is activated.
WARNING
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsibili-
ty of the driver to always check the
inside/outside rearview mirror and
the area behind the vehicle before
and whilst backing up because
there is a dead zone that cannot
be seen through the camera.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If the lens is covered with
foreign matter, the camera may
not operate normally.
OVF043106
■ Type B
OVF043102
■ Type A
Rear view display
Rear view display
Features of your vehicle
1204
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the car in a hazardous location.
When you must make such an emer-
gency stop, always pull off the road as far
as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on
by pushing in the hazard switch. This
causes all turn signal lights to blink. The
hazard warning lights will operate even
though the key is not in the ignition
switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
OVF061001R
4121
Features of your vehicle
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when the
driver removes the ignition key and
opens the driver- side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will
be turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed, per-
form the following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Headlamp delay function
(if equipped)
The headlights (and/or taillights) remain
on for approximately 5 minutes after the
ignition key is removed or turned to the
ACC or LOCK position. However, if the
driver’s door is opened and closed, the
headlights are turned off after 15 sec-
onds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmit-
ter or smart key twice or turning off the
light switch from the headlight or Auto
light position.
Headlight (Headlamp) welcome
function (if equipped)
When the headlight switch is in the ON or
AUTO position and all doors (and tail-
gate/boot) are closed and locked, if you
press the door unlock button on the
transmitter or smart key, the headlights
will come on for about 15 seconds.
If the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position, the function can only operate at
night.
At this time, if you press the door unlock
button again or door lock button on the
transmitter or smart key, the headlights
will turn off immediately.
LIGHTING
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except dri-
ver’s door), the battery saver func-
tion does not operate and the head-
light escort function does not turn
off automatically. Therefore, it caus-
es the battery to be discharged. In
this case, make sure to turn off the
lamp before getting out of the vehi-
cle.
Features of your vehicle
1224
Static bending light
While driving the corner, for your sight
and safety, the static bending light turns
on automatically. The system will operate
automatically as follows:
• When vehicle speed is more than 3
km/h less than 10 km/h and steering
wheel angle approximately 100
degrees.
• When vehicle speed is more than 10
km/h less than 90 km/h and steering
wheel angle approximately 35 degrees.
• When moving rearwards with one of
the above conditions satisfied the lights
will light up the opposite direction.
• The static bending light will operate
only when the light switch is in the
AUTO position. (vehicles equipped with
AFLS)
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the fol-
lowing positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Auto light position (if equipped)
(3) Parking light position
(4) Headlight position
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the parking
light position, the tail, position, license
and instrument panel lights are ON.
OVF041120 OVF041122
4123
Features of your vehicle
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position the head, tail, position, license
and instrument panel lights are ON.
✽
NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
Auto light/AFLS position
(if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light
position, the taillights and headlights will
be turned ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light outside
the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the adap-
tive front lighting system (AFLS), it will
also operate when the headlamp is ON.
OVF041123
CAUTION
• Never place anything over the
sensor (1) located on the instru-
ment panel, this will ensure better
auto-light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleaner may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the
front windscreen, the Auto light
system may not work properly.
OVF041121
Features of your vehicle
1244
Traffic change (for Europe)
Use this function when you visit a country
with opposite traffic direction.
If the traffic change is activated when you
visit a country with opposite traffic direc-
tion, it will decrease the dazzle on
oncoming vehicle drivers.
Follow the below procedure.
1. Select “User Settings” by pressing the
mode button ( ) on the steering
wheel.
2. Select “Lights” by pressing the move
button ( ) and select button ( ) on
the steering wheel.
3. Check “Travel Mode” by pressing the
move button ( ) and select button
( ) on the steering wheel.
OVF045413
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVF045414
■ Type A
■ Type B
4125
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
If the engine is turned off with the traf-
fic change function activated, and the
engine turned on again, the above mes-
sage will appear. It is to notify the driv-
er the function is activated.
4. To cancel the change, follow the steps 1
to 3 from the previous page.
High - beam operation
1. Turn the light switch to the headlight
position.
2. Push the lever away from you.
✽
NOTICE
• The high-beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
• To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on for
a prolonged time whilst the engine is
not running.
WARNING
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles. Using high
beam could obstruct the other dri-
ver's vision.
OVF041128
OVF045415
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
1264
Flashing headlights
Pull the lever towards you. It will return to
the normal position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
✽
NOTICE
It could be broken if you rotate the end
of the lever by force.
Smart high beam (if equipped)
The Smart High Beam is a system that
automatically adjusts the headlamp
range (switches between high beam and
low beam) according to the brightness of
other vehicles and road conditions.
Operating condition
1.Place the light switch in the AUTO
position.
2.Turn on the high beam by pushing the
lever away from you.
The smart high beam ( ) indicator
will illuminate.
3.The Smart High Beam will turn on
when vehicle speed is above 45km/h
(28 mph).
If the lever is pulled towards you when
the Smart High Beam is operating, the
Smart High Beam will turn off.
4.If the light switch is placed to the head-
lamp position, the Smart High Beam
will turn off and the low beam will be on
continuously.
OVF041126 OVF045128L
4127
Features of your vehicle
The high beam switches to low beam in
the below conditions.
- When the Smart High Beam is off.
- When the light switch is not in the
AUTO position.
- When the headlamp is detected from
the on-coming vehicle.
- When the tail lamp is detected from the
front vehicle.
- When the surrounding is bright enough
high beams are not needed.
- When streetlights or other lights are
detected.
- When vehicle speed is below 35km/h
(22 mph).
CAUTION
The system may not operate nor-
mally in the below conditions.
• When the light from the on-com-
ing or front vehicle is not detect-
ed because of lamp damage, hid-
den from sight, etc.
• When the lamp of the on-coming
or front vehicle is covered with
dust, snow or water.
• When the light from the on-com-
ing or front vehicle is not detect-
ed because of exhaust fume,
smoke, fog, snow, etc.
• When the front window is covered
with foreign matters such as ice,
dust, fog, or is damaged.
• When there is a similar shape
lamp with the front vehicle’s
lamps.
• When it is hard to see because of
fog, heavy rain or snow.
• When the headlamp is not
repaired or replaced at an autho-
rised dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When headlamp aiming is not
properly adjusted.
• When driving on a narrow curved
road or rough road.
• When driving downhill or uphill.
• When only part of the vehicle in
front is visible on a crossroad or
curved road.
• When there is a traffic light,
reflecting sign, flashing sign or
mirror.
• When the road conditions are bad
such as being wet or covered
with snow.
• When the front vehicle’s head-
lamps are off but the fog lamps
on.
• When a vehicle suddenly appears
from a curve.
• When the vehicle is tilted from a
flat tire or being towed.
• When the LKAS (Lane Keeping
Assist System) warning light illu-
minates. (if equipped)
Features of your vehicle
1284
When HBA is not working properly, the
warning message will come on for a few
second. After the message disappears,
the master warning light will illuminate.
We recommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Turn signals and lane change sig-
nals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A). Green arrow indicators on the instru-
ment panel indicate which turn signal is
operating. They will self-cancel after a
turn is completed. If the indicator contin-
ues to flash after a turn, manually return
the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-
tion when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
OVF041127
WARNING
• Do not place any accessories,
stickers or tint the windscreen.
• Have the windscreen glass
replaced from an authorised deal-
er.
• Do not remove or impact related
parts of the Smart High Beam
system.
• Be careful that water doesn’t get
into the Smart High Beam unit.
• Do not place objects on the dash-
board that reflects light such as
mirrors, white paper, etc. The sys-
tem may malfunction if sunlight is
reflected.
• At times, the Smart High Beam
system may not work properly,
always check the road conditions
for your safety. When the system
does not operate normally, manu-
ally change between the high
beam and low beam.
OVF045412/OVF045416
■ Type A
■ Type B
4129
Features of your vehicle
One-touch lane change function
(if equipped)
To activate an one-touch lane change
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly and then release it. The lane
change signals will blink 3 times.
✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, bulb may be burned out or have
a poor electrical connection in the cir-
cuit.
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,
rain or snow, etc.
The fog lights will turn on when:
1. Park light is on.
2. The front fog light switch is on.
OVF041124R
OVF041129R
■ Type A
■ Type B
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
Features of your vehicle
1304
Rear fog light (if equipped)
To turn on the rear fog lights do one of
the following:
• Position the light switch in the headlight
position and then turn on the rear fog
light switch.
• Turn on the front fog light(if equipped)
and then turn on the rear fog light switch.
To turn the rear fog lights off, do one of
the following:
• Turn off the headlight switch.
• Turn off the rear fog light switch.
✽
NOTICE
To turn on the rear fog light switch, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position.
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make
it easier for others to see the front of your
vehicle during the day. DRL can be help-
ful in many different driving conditions,
and it is especially helpful after dawn and
before sunset.
The DRL system will turn off the dedicat-
ed lamp when:
1. The parklight or headlight (low beam)
switch is ON.
2. The engine is OFF.
Headlight levelling device
(if equipped)
Manual type
To adjust the headlight beam level
according to the number of the passen-
gers and the loading weight in the lug-
gage area, turn the beam levelling
switch.
OVF041125R
OVF041130R
4131
Features of your vehicle
The higher the number of the switch is
positioned, the lower the headlight beam
level. Always keep the headlight beam at
the proper levelling position, or head-
lights may dazzle other road users.
Listed below are the examples of proper
switch settings. For loading conditions
other than those listed below, adjust the
switch position so that the beam level
may be the nearest as the condition
obtained according to the list.
Automatic type
It automatically adjusts the headlight
beam level according to the number of
passengers and loading weight in the
luggage area.
And it offers proper headlight beam
under various conditions.
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting
System) (if equipped)
Adaptive front lighting system uses the
steering angle and vehicle speed, to
keep your field of vision wide by swiveling
and levelling the headlamp.
Change the switch to the AUTO position
when the engine is running. The adaptive
front lighting system will operate when
the headlamp is ON. To turn off the
AFLS, change the switch to other posi-
tions. After turning the AFLS off, head-
lamp swiveling no longer occurs, but lev-
elling operates continuously.
Loading condition Switch position
Driver only 0
Driver + Front passenger 0
Full passengers
(including driver)
1
Full passengers (including
driver) + Maximum permis-
sible loading
2
Driver + Maximum permis-
sible loading
3
OVF041123
WARNING
If it does not work properly even
though your car is inclined back-
ward according to passenger's
posture, or the headlight beam is
irradiated to the high or low posi-
tion, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the wiring yourself.
Features of your vehicle
1324
If the AFLS malfunction indicator comes
on, the AFLS is not working properly.
Drive to the nearest safe location and
restart the engine. If the indicator contin-
uously remains on, we recommend that
the system be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
OVF041132
■ Type A ■ Type B
4133
Features of your vehicle
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· / MIST – Single wipe
· O / OFF – Off
· --- / INT – Intermittent wipe
AUTO* – Auto control wipe
· 1 / LO– Low wiper speed
· 2 / HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*
D : Rear wiper/washer control*
· / ON – Continuous wipe
· --- / INT – Intermittent wipe
(if equipped)
· O / OFF – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
* : if equipped
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windscreen wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer (wagon)
OXM049230L/OXM049231L/OAM049048L/OAM049048N
■ Type A ■ Type A
■ Type B ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
1344
Windscreen wipers
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
/ MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
move the lever to this ( /
MIST) position and release
it. The wipers will operate
continuously if the lever is
held in this position.
O / OFF : Wiper is not in operation
--- / INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in light rain or mist.
To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob.
1 / LO : Normal wiper speed
2 / HI : Fast wiper speed
✽
NOTICE
• If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windscreen, defrost the
windscreen for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windscreen wipers to
ensure proper operation.
• If you do not remove the snow and/or
ice before using the wiper and washer,
it may damage the Wiper and washer
system.
Auto control (if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper end
of the windscreen glass senses the
amount of rainfall and controls the wiping
cycle for the proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper operates. When
the rain stops, the wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode
when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper
will operate once to perform a self-check
of the system. Set the wiper to OFF posi-
tion when the wiper is not in use.
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is ON and
the windscreen wiper switch is
placed in the AUTO mode, use cau-
tion in the following situations to
avoid any injury to the hands or
other parts of the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of the
windscreen glass facing the rain
sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of the
windscreen glass with a damp or
wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the wind-
screen glass.
OEL049900
OXM049123
■ Type A
■ Type B
Rain sensor
Rain sensor
4135
Features of your vehicle
Windscreen washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever gently
toward you to spray washer fluid on the
windscreen and to run the wipers 1-3
cycles.
Use this function when the windscreen is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will con-
tinue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not
sufficient, you will need to add appropri-
ate non-abrasive windscreen washer
fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
driver side.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set the
wiper switch in the OFF position to
stop the auto wiper operation.
The wiper may operate and be dam-
aged if the switch is set in the AUTO
mode whilst washing the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windscreen glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in winter,
set the wiper switch in the OFF
position. Otherwise, wipers may
operate and ice may damage the
windscreen wiper blades. Always
remove all snow and ice and defrost
the windscreen properly prior to
operating the windscreen wipers.
OXM049048E
OXM049102N
■ Type A
■ Type B
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windscreen with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
the windscreen and obscure your
vision.
Features of your vehicle
1364
Headlight washer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the head-
light washer it will operate at the same
time when you operate the windscreen
washer. It will operate when the headlight
switch is in the first or second position
and the ignition switch or engine
start/stop button is in the ON position.
The washer fluid will be sprayed on to the
headlights.
✽
NOTICE
Check the headlight washers periodical-
ly to confirm that the washer fluid is
being sprayed properly onto the head-
light lenses.
Rear window wiper and washer
switch (wagon)
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the wiper
and washer switch lever. Turn the switch
to the desired position to operate the rear
wiper and washer.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windscreen, do not
operate the wipers when the
windscreen is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use petrol,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers and washer system,
use anti-freezing washer fluids in
the winter season or cold weath-
er.
OXM049103E
OAM049103N
■ Type A
■ Type B
4137
Features of your vehicle
/ ON - Normal wiper operation
--- / INT - Intermittent wiper operation
(if equipped)
O / OFF - Wiper is not in operation
Push the lever away from you to spray
rear washer fluid and to run the rear
wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiper
operation will continue until you release
the lever. (if equipped)
OXM049125L
OXM049125
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
1384
Interior lamp AUTO cut
• When all entrances are closed, if you
lock the vehicle by using the transmit-
ter or the smart key, all interior lamp
will be off within 5 seconds.
• If you do not operate anything in the
vehicle after turning off the engine, the
lights will turn off after 20 minutes.
Map lamp
Press the lens (1) to turn the map lamp
on or off
• : The map lamp and room lamp
stays on at all times.
•:
- The map lamp and room lamp comes
on when a door is opened. The lamps
go out after approximately 30 sec-
onds.
- The map lamp and room lamp comes
on for approximately 30 seconds when
doors are unlocked with a transmitter
or smart key as long as the doors are
not opened.
- The map lamp and room lamp will stay
on for approximately 20 minutes if a
door is opened with the ignition switch
in the ACC or LOCK/OFF position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on continuously if the door is
opened with the ignition switch in the
ON position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will go
out immediately if the ignition switch
is changed to the ON position or all
doors are locked.
• : The lamps are off even if a door
is opened.
✽
NOTICE
When the lamp is turned on by pressing
the lens (1), the lamp does not turn off
even if the switch (2) is in the OFF posi-
tion.
INTERIOR LIGHT
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
OVF041133
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights when
driving in the dark. Accidents could
happen because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
4139
Features of your vehicle
Room lamp
Press the button to turn the light on or off.
Vanity mirror lamp
Opening the cover of the vanity mirror will
automatically turn on the mirror lamp.
Luggage room lamp
The luggage room lamp comes on when
the tailgate is opened.
OHG040128/H
OHG040124
■ Type B
OVF041134
■ Type A
OVF041135
OVF041339
■ Wagon
■ Sedan
Features of your vehicle
1404
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when the
glove box is opened.
Escort welcome (if equipped)
When the headlight(light switch in the
headlight or AUTO position) is on and all
doors (and tailgate/boot) are locked and
closed, the headlight, position light and
tail light will come on for 15 seconds if
any of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock but-
ton (on the transmitter or smart key), the
lights will turn off immediately.
Interior light
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and tail-
gate/boot) are locked and closed, the
room lamp and foot lamp (if equipped)
will come on for 30 seconds if any of the
below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside door
handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock but-
ton, the lamps will turn off immediately.
OVF041136/H
WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
4141
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windscreen, refer to “Windscreen
Defrosting and Defogging” in this sec-
tion.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
interior and exterior of the rear window,
whilst engine is running.
• To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the centre facia switch
panel. The indicator on the rear win-
dow defroster button illuminates when
the defroster is ON.
• To turn off the defroster, press the rear
window defroster button again.
✽
NOTICE
• If there is heavy accumulation of snow
on the rear window, brush it off before
operating the rear defroster.
• The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch is
turned off.
Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
The outside mirror defroster will operate
at the same time you turn on the rear
window defroster.
Front wiper deicer (if equipped)
The front wiper deicer will operate at the
same time you turn on the rear window
defroster.
DEFROSTER
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
OVF041141R
■ Type B
OVF041140R
■ Type A
Features of your vehicle
1424
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF041142R
1. Fan speed control switch
2. Air conditioning button
3. OFF button
4. Mode selection knob
5. MAX A/C selection button
6. Air intake control button
7. Temperature control switch
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position
could cause the battery to dis-
charge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.
4143
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of heat-
ing and cooling:
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
OVF041146R/OVF041144
Mode selection
The mode selection knob controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
Turn the knob to select the desired mode.
Features of your vehicle
1444
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, E, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windscreen and side win-
dow defrosters.
-
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windscreen with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windscreen with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
MAX A/C-Level
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the
inside of the vehicle faster.
In this mode, the air conditioning and the
recirculated air position will be selected
automatically.
OVF041145R
4145
Features of your vehicle
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control switch allows
you to control the temperature of the air-
flow in the vehicle.
To change the temperature:
• Press the ▲ (red) switch to increase
temperature.
• Press the ▼ (blue) switch to decrease
temperature.
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to select
the outside (fresh) air position or recircu-
lated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
press the control button.
OVF041147R
OVF041143
■ Front
OVF041174
■ Rear
OVF041148R
Features of your vehicle
1464
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated
air position selected,
air from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the
heating system and
heated or cooled
according to the func-
tion selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected,
air enters the vehicle
from outside and is
heated or cooled
according to the func-
tion selected.
✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fogging
of the windscreen and side windows and
the air within the passenger compart-
ment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air con-
ditioning with the recirculated air posi-
tion selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
WARNING
• The continuous use of recirculat-
ed air in the climate control sys-
tem may increase humidity inside
the vehicle, causing the glass to
fog and obscuring visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating sys-
tem on. It may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in the
oxygen level and/or body temper-
ature.
• The continuous use of recirculat-
ed air in the climate control sys-
tem can produce drowsiness or
sleepiness, which may result in a
loss of vehicle control. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible whilst driving.
4147
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control switch allows you
to control the fan speed of the airflow in
the vehicle.
To change the fan speed:
• Press the switch to increase fan
speed.
• Press the switch to decrease fan
speed.
To turn off the fan speed, press the OFF
button.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-
ditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate). Press the button again to turn
the air conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Press the OFF button to turn off the air
climate control system.
OVF041149 OVF041187R OVF041164R
Features of your vehicle
1484
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
• If the windscreen fogs up, set the mode
to the
or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the vehicle through the venti-
lation system, temporarily set the air
intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irrita-
tion has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windscreen. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
screen, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air condi-
tioning system, and adjust the temper-
ature control to desired temperature.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
This HYUNDAI Air Conditioning System
is filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-
tioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-
perature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired, set
the temperature control to the lowest
temperature, press the MAX A/C posi-
tion selection button, then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.
4149
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely whilst driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be used
with the windows closed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• Use air conditioning to reduce humidi-
ty and moisture inside the vehicle on
rainy or humid days.
• During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system opera-
tion characteristic.
Features of your vehicle
1504
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windscreen even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the climate
control air filter be replaced by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,
more frequent climate control air fil-
ter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-
ence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
✽
NOTICE
It is important when servicing the air
conditioning system that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, damage to the com-
pressor and abnormal system operation
may occur.
WARNING
Improper service may cause seri-
ous injury to the person performing
the service. For more detailed infor-
mation, we recommend that you
contact an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer. Improper service may
cause serious injury to the person
performing the service.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
4151
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF041150R/OVF041151R
1. Driver's temperature control button
2. Front windscreen defroster button
3. Air conditioning button
4. Mode selection button
5. Fan speed control knob
6. AUTO (automatic control) button
7. OFF button
8. Dual temperature control selection button
9. Air intake control button
10. Climate control information screen
selection button
11. Passenger's temperature control button
12. Climate control display
■
■
Type A (Vehicle equipped with audio system)
■
Type B (Vehicle equipped with AVN system)
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position
could cause the battery to dis-
charge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.
Features of your vehicle
1524
Automatic heating and air condi-
tioning
1.Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled auto-
matically according to the temperature
setting.
2.Set the temperature to the desired
temperature.
✽
NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windscreen defroster button
(Press the button one more time to
deselect the front windscreen
defroster function. The 'AUTO' sign
will illuminate on the information
display once again.)
- Fan speed control knob
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually whilst other func-
tions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate con-
trol, use the AUTO button and set the
temperature to 22°C/71°F (23°C/73°F
- Except Europe).
OVF041152
OVF041156R
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side
4153
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
Placing any object over the sensor on
the instrument panel may interfere with
the heating and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condition-
ing
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pressing buttons
or turning knob(s) other than the AUTO
button. In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons or knob(s) selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of heat-
ing and cooling:
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to con-
vert to full automatic control of the sys-
tem.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
If you push the button once, the corre-
sponding switch will turn on, and if you
push the button again, the switch will turn
off.
OVF041153
Features of your vehicle
1544
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windscreen.
Also you may select 2~3 modes at the
same time.
- face ( ) + floor ( ) mode
- face ( ) + defrost ( ) mode
- floor ( ) + defrost ( ) mode
- face ( ) + floor ( ) + defrost ( )
mode
OVF041146R/OVF041154R
4155
Features of your vehicle
Maximum (MAX) defrost mode
When you select the MAX defrost mode,
the following system will set automatically:
• The air conditioning system will be turn
on.
• The outside(fresh) air position will be
selected.
• The fan speed will set to the high
speed.
To turn the MAX defrost mode off, press
the mode button or MAX defrost button
again or AUTO button.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HIGH) by holding the ▲ but-
ton.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (LOW) by holding the ▼ button.
The temperature will increase or
decrease by 0.5°C/1°F. When set to the
lowest temperature, the air conditioning
will operate continuously.
OVF041156R
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side
OVF041174
■ Rear
OVF041147R
■ Front
OVF041155R
Features of your vehicle
1564
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate the
driver and passenger side temperature
individually. Also, if the passenger side
temperature control button is operat-
ed, it will automatically change to the
DUAL mode as well.
2. Operate the driver side temperature
control to adjust the driver side tem-
perature. Operate the passenger side
temperature control to adjust the pas-
senger side temperature.
When the driver side temperature is set
to the highest (HIGH) or lowest (LOW)
temperature, the DUAL mode deacti-
vates for maximum heating or cooling.
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-
tivate DUAL mode. The passenger
side temperature will be set to the
same temperature as the driver side.
2. Operate the driver side temperature
control button. The driver and passen-
ger side temperature will be adjusted
equally.
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature mode
between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as fol-
lows:
Whilst pressing the OFF button, press
the AUTO button for 3 seconds or more.
The display will change from Centigrade
to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to
Centigrade.
✽
NOTICE
• If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Centigrade.
• Vehicle's equipped with AVN system
refer to the navigation manual provid-
ed separately.
OVF041158R
OVF041157R
4157
Features of your vehicle
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air
enters the vehicle from out-
side and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fog-
ging of the windscreen and side windows
and the air within the passenger com-
partment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air con-
ditioning with the recirculated air posi-
tion selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
■ Type A
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type B
■
■
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
B
B
OVF041159R
■
■
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
A
A
Features of your vehicle
1584
Fan speed control
The fan speed control knob allows you
to control the fan speed of the airflow in
the vehicle.
To change the fan speed:
• Turn the knob to the right (+) to
increase fan speed.
• Turn the knob to the left (-) to decrease
fan speed.
To turn off the fan speed, press the OFF
button.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-
ditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
WARNING
• The continuous use of recirculat-
ed air in the climate control sys-
tem may increase humidity inside
the vehicle, causing the glass to
fog and obscuring visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating sys-
tem on. It may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in the
oxygen level and/or body temper-
ature.
• The continuous use of recirculat-
ed air in the climate control sys-
tem can produce drowsiness or
sleepiness, which may result in a
loss of vehicle control. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible whilst driving.
OVF041160
■ Type B
OVF041161R
■ Type A
4159
Features of your vehicle
OFF mode
Press the OFF button to turn off the air
climate control system. However, you can
still operate the air intake buttons as long
as the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
Climate information screen selection
(for type B)
Press the climate information screen
selection button to display climate infor-
mation on the screen.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
• If the windscreen fogs up, set the mode
to the
or position.
OVF041162 OVF041163R
Features of your vehicle
1604
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the vehicle through the venti-
lation system, temporarily set the air
intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irrita-
tion has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windscreen. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
screen, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air condi-
tioning system, and adjust the temper-
ature control to desired temperature.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
This HYUNDAI Air Conditioning System
is filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-
tioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-
perature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
✽
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely whilst driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be used
with the windows closed.
4161
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• Use air conditioning to reduce humidi-
ty and moisture inside the vehicle on
rainy or humid days.
• During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system opera-
tion characteristic.
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windscreen even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the climate
control air filter be replaced by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Features of your vehicle
1624
✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,
more frequent climate control air fil-
ter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-
ence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
✽
NOTICE
It is important when servicing the air
conditioning system that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, damage to the com-
pressor and abnormal system operation
may occur.
WARNING
Improper service may cause seri-
ous injury to the person performing
the service. For more detailed infor-
mation, we recommend that you
contact an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer. Improper service may
cause serious injury to the person
performing the service.
4163
Features of your vehicle
• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-
perature control to the hottest position
and the fan speed control to the high-
est speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired whilst
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windscreen, rear window, out-
side rear view mirrors, and all side win-
dows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the bonnet
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up the
inside of the windscreen.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windscreen
1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-
tion.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically. If the position is
selected, air conditioning (if equipped)
will also be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and/or outside
(fresh) air position are not selected auto-
matically, press the corresponding button
manually.
WINDSCREEN DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING
- Windscreen
heating
Do not use the position during
cooling operation in extremely
humid weather. The difference
between the temperature of the out-
side air and the windscreen could
cause the outer surface of the
windscreen to fog up, causing loss
of visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection to the position
and fan speed control to the lower
speed.
OVF041165R
Features of your vehicle
1644
To defrost outside windscreen
1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set the temperature to the hottest
position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-
tioning will be selected automatically.
Automatic climate control system
To defog inside windscreen
1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-
tion.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the button.
4. The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient tem-
perature and outside (fresh) air posi-
tion will be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning is not selected
automatically, adjust the corresponding
button manually. If the position is
selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a
higher fan speed.
To defrost outside windscreen
1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set the temperature to the hottest
(HIGH) position.
3. Press the button.
4. The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
OVF041165R OVF041166R
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVF041167R
■ Type A
■ Type B
4165
Features of your vehicle
Auto defogging system
(Only for automatic climate control
system, if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the possibility of
fogging up the inside of the windscreen
by
automatically sensing the moisture of
inside the windscreen.
The auto defogging system operates
when the AUTO mode is on.
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the moisture
of inside the windscreen and
operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle, higher
steps operate as follow.
Step 1 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 2 : Outside air position
Step 3 : Blowing air flow toward the wind-
screen
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward the
windscreen
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto
defogging system, it is automatically acti-
vated when the conditions are met.
However, if you would like to cancel the
auto defogging system, press the front
defroster button for 3 seconds.
The indicator will blink 3 times to notify
you that the system is cancelled.
To use the auto defogging system again,
press the front defroster button for 3 sec-
onds again.
The indicator will blink 6 times to notify
you that the system is activated.
If the battery has been disconnected or
discharged, it resets to the auto defog-
ging status.
✽
NOTICE
If the A/C off is manually selected whilst
the auto defogging system is on, the auto
defogging indicator will blink 3 times to
give notice that the A/C off can not be
selected.
OVF041170
CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windscreen glass.
Damage to the system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
Features of your vehicle
1664
Automatic ventilation
(if equipped)
When the recirculated air intake position
is selected for a certain period of time,
the air intake position will be automatical-
ly changed to the outside (fresh) air posi-
tion. To cancel or reset the automatic
ventilation, do the following.
Manual climate control system
1. Press the engine start/stop button.
2. Select Face Level mode.
3. While holding the air conditioning (A/C)
button pressed, press the air intake
control button (recirculated air position)
at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, it resets to the automatic ven-
tilation status.
Automatic climate control system
1. Press the engine start/stop button.
2. Select Face Level mode.
3. While holding the air conditioning (A/C)
button pressed, press the air intake
control button (recirculated air position)
at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, it resets to the automatic ven-
tilation status.
OVFS045401R OVF045169R
4167
Features of your vehicle
Centre console storage
To open the centre console storage, push
the lever (1) and then lift up the cover.
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with a key. (1)
To open the glove box, push the button
(2) and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other flamma-
ble/explosive materials in the vehi-
cle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed whilst
driving. Do not attempt to place
so many items in the storage
compartment that the storage
compartment cover can not close
securely.
OVF041171R OVF041172R
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
whilst driving.
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove box
for a long time.
Features of your vehicle
1684
Cool box (if equipped)
You can keep beverage cans or other
items cool in the glove box.
1. Turn on the air conditioning.
2. Slide the open/close lever (1) of the
vent installed in the glove box to the
open position.
3. When the cool box is not used, slide
the lever (1) to the closed position.
✽
NOTICE
If some items in the cool box block the
vent, the cooling effectiveness of the cool
box is reduced.
Sunglass holder (if equipped)
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses in the compart-
ment door with the lenses facing out.
Push to close.
OVF041173OVF041175R
WARNING
Do not put perishable food in the
cool box because it may not main-
tain the necessary consistent tem-
perature to keep the food fresh.
4169
Features of your vehicle
Luggage tray (wagon)
You can place a first aid kit, a reflector tri-
angle (front tray), tools, etc. in the box for
easy access.
• Grasp the handle on the top of the
cover and lift it.
Luggage side tray (wagon)
The luggage side tray can be used for
storing small items.
• To open the cover, pull up the handle
and lift the cover.
OVF041198
■ Centre tray
OVF041200
■ Front tray
OVF041199
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except sun-
glasses inside the sunglass hold-
er. Such objects can be thrown
from the holder in the event of a
sudden stop or an accident, pos-
sibly injuring the passengers in
the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglasses hold-
er whilst the vehicle is moving.
The rear view mirror of the vehi-
cle can be blocked by an open
sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly
into a sunglass holder to prevent
breakage or deformation of
glasses. It may cause personal
injury if you try to open it forcibly
when the glasses are jammed in
holder.
Features of your vehicle
1704
Luggage side partition (wagon)
✽
NOTICE
The luggage side partitions can be
removed to store long items in the lug-
gage compartment.
Rear seat floor pocket (wagon)
(if equipped)
OVF041210
WARNING
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the pockets. In an accident they
could come loose from the pocket
and injure vehicle occupants.
OVF041211
4171
Features of your vehicle
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ACC position
or the ON position.
To use the cigarette lighter:
1. Open the cover by pressing the switch.
2. Push the lighter all the way into the
socket.
When the element has heated, the lighter
will pop out to the "ready" position.
We recommend that you use parts for
replacement from an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Ashtray (if equipped)
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.
INTERIOR FEATURES
OVF041177R
CAUTION
Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter
should be used in the cigarette
lighter socket. The use of plug-in
accessories (shavers, hand-held
vacuums, and coffee pots, for
example) may damage the socket or
cause electrical failure.
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtray
as a waste receptacle.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other com-
bustible materials may cause a
fire.
WARNING
• Holding the lighter in after it is
heated will cause it to overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
• Do not insert foreign objects into
the socket of the cigarette lighter.
It may damage the cigarette
lighter.
OVF041205/H
CAUTION
When cleaning spilled liquid, do not
dry the cup holder at high tempera-
tures. This may damage the chrome
part of the cup holder.
Features of your vehicle
1724
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Front
To use the cup holder, open the cover. (1)
Rear
To use the cup holder, pull down the arm-
rest. (2)
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder whilst
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you burn yourself.
Such a burn to the driver could
lead to loss of control of the vehi-
cle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden stop
or collision, do not place uncov-
ered or unsecured bottles, glass-
es, cans, etc., in the cup holder
whilst the vehicle is in motion.
OVF041178/H
■ Front
WARNING
Keep cans and bottles out of direct
sunlight. Placing them in a hot vehi-
cle can cause them to explode.
OVF031019
■ Rear
4173
Features of your vehicle
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (3).
The vanity mirror light comes on.
The ticket holder (4) is provided for hold-
ing a tollgate ticket.
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to provide
power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle
electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine
running.
■ Front
■ Centre
OVF041180R/OVF041181/OVF041186
■ Rear (wagon)(if equipped)
WARNING
For your safety, do not block your
view when using the sunvisor.
OVF041319R
CAUTION
• Use power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using
the accessory plug for prolonged
periods of time with the engine
off could cause the battery to dis-
charge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in elec-
tric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static and
malfunctions in other electronic
systems or devices used in your
vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
1744
Aux, USB and iPod
(if equipped)
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port, you can
use an aux port to connect audio devices
and an USB port to plug in an USB and
an iPod.
✽
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign ele-
ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hand.
You may get electrocuted or fire
may occur.
OED040354
OVF041201
CAUTION
• Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
• Be careful when opening and clos-
ing the doors. Clothes, etc. may
get caught between the door gap.
■
■
T
T
ype A
ype A
■
■
T
T
ype B
ype B
OVF045182R
4175
Features of your vehicle
Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor
mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps
the floor mat from sliding forward.
WARNING
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to
the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle’s
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to the
vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat
should be installed in each posi-
tion.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation,
we recommend that the HYUNDAI
floor mat designed for use in your
vehicle be installed.
OEL049222
OVF043467
■ Front
■ Rear
• Type A
• Type B
WARNING
Do not hang other objects except
clothes. In an accident it may cause
vehicle damage or personal injury.
Features of your vehicle
1764
Rear curtain (Sedan) (if equipped)
To fold the rear curtain, press the button.
To unfold the rear curtain, press the but-
ton again.
The rear curtain will fold automatically
when you shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) and unfold automatically when
you shift the shift lever from R (Reverse)
into P (Park).
After the rear curtain is folded by shifting
the shift lever into R (Reverse) and drive
more than 20 km/h with the shift lever in
D (Drive), the rear curtain will unfold
automatically.
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the cargo
area, you can use the four holders locat-
ed in the cargo area to attach the lug-
gage net.
If necessary, we recommend that you
contact your authorised HYUNDAI
repairer to obtain a luggage net.
CAUTION
Do not pull or fold the rear curtain by
hand. It could cause motor failure.
OVF041212
OVF041340
■ Wagon
■ Sedan
OVF041341R
OVF041342R
4177
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
Vehicles equipped with a luggage rail
system may use the shackles to hook the
luggage net.
Barrier net (wagon) (if equipped)
When you load cargo on the rear seat or
rear cargo area, you must install the bar-
rier net behind the front seatback or rear
seatback.
It is designed to help protect the heads of
the occupants by preventing objects from
flying forward in frontal collisions.
There are four hook holders on both side
of the headliner over the head restraints
for upper side fixation and on the floor
behind the rear seats for lower side fixa-
tion.
To use the barrier net
1. Pull up the net by the handle in the
centre (1).
2. Open the cover (2).
3. Compress the one side net upper shaft
to lengh direction before you insert the
hook into the large hole (3) until it
reaches the very top.
4. Then secure it by sliding it into the
small hole (4).
5. Hold the hooked side and then with the
other hand, hook the other side of the
net.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky
objects in the luggage compart-
ment.
WARNING
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT over-
stretch the luggage net. ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of the
luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT
use the luggage net when the strap
has visible signs of wear or dam-
age.
OVF041192 OVF043193
Features of your vehicle
1784
When the barrier net is not in use :
1. Remove the hook by pulling it through
the large holes.
2. Slide the net down.
To remove the barrier net
1. Press the lock release button(1) locat-
ed at the end of both sides.
2. Whilst pressing the button(1), pull out
the barrier net(2).
✽
NOTICE
The cargo security screen must be
removed first to remove the barrier net.
WARNING
• Do not put passengers in the rear
seat or cargo area behind the bar-
rier net.
• Do not put passenger in the rear
centre seat when the barrier net
is installed behind the rear seats.
The barrier net may interfere with
use of the rear centre safety belt.
• Do not load cargo in the area
higher than the barrier net's
upper end.
• Do not load heavy cargo in the
area higher than the seatback to
avoid accident even if the barrier
net is installed.
• Do not load cargo which has
sharp edge that can pass through
the barrier net.
• Do not apply excessive force to
the barrier net by hanging on to
the net or by suspending heavy
cargo and so on.
OVF041194
CAUTION
Be careful not the scratch the side
panel when inserting the hook into
the hole.
4179
Features of your vehicle
Cargo security screen (wagon)
(if equipped)
Use the cargo security screen to hide
items stored in the cargo area.
To use the cargo security screen
1. Pull the cargo security screen towards
the rear of the vehicle by the handle
(1).
2. Insert the guide pin into the guide (2).
✽
NOTICE
Pull out the cargo security screen with
the handle in the centre to prevent the
guide pin from falling out of the guide.
When the cargo security screen is not in
use:
1. Push down the centre of the cargo
security screen (approximately 70
degree).
2. The cargo security screen will auto-
matically slide back in.
✽
NOTICE
The cargo security screen may not auto-
matically slide back in if the cargo secu-
rity screen is not fully pulled out. Fully
pull it out and then let go.
OVF041196OVF041195
Features of your vehicle
1804
To remove the cargo security screen
1. Push in the guide pin(1).
2. Push the lever (2) towards the rear of
the vehicle.
3. Whilst pushing the lever, pull out the
cargo security screen (3).
Luggage rail system (wagon)
The luggage rail system may prevent the
luggage from sliding around in the lug-
gage compartment.
WARNING
• Do not place objects on the cargo
security screen. Such objects
may be thrown about inside the
vehicle and possibly injure vehi-
cle occupants during an accident
or when braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage compartment. It is
designed for luggage only.
• Maintain the balance of the vehi-
cle and locate the weight as for-
ward as possible.
CAUTION
Since the cargo security screen
may be damaged or malformed, do
not put luggage on it when it is
used.
OVF041197 OVF041191
4181
Features of your vehicle
Build in segmentation bar
• Put both pillars (A) from the segmenta-
tion bar in the openings from the rail.
• To move the segmentation bar, put
your hand on the side of the pillar and
push down the lever arm (B).
• Make sure the pillars click into place.
• To release the belt, turn the upper ele-
ment (C) to the left or right until it
clicks.
• Now you can pull the belt (D) and
secure your luggage by putting the belt
around the luggage and put the hook
(E) into the middle of the segmentation
bar (F).
• For bulky luggage, you can hook both
hooks into each other.
• To make sure the belt locks, put the
upper element (C) back into the lock
position (1).
Applying the shackle on the guide
rail
• Put the shackle (A) in the position
where the shackle is put in the rail.
• To move the shackle, press the button
(1) and move the shackle along the
rail.
• Make sure the shackle is clicked into
place.
• To fix the luggage, pull up the hook (2)
in the middle cargo bay.
• Now you can mount e.g. belt to fix the
luggage in the hook.
• The shackle cannot be used in the
position where the shackle is put in
and out of the rail (3).
CAUTION
• The segmentation bar must be
mounted and demounted with
both pillars simultaneously.
• Max. load: 66 lbs. (30 kg) with
one belt
88 lbs. (40 kg) with
two belts
OVF041189
A
CAUTION
Tensile force : max. 30 kgf. for
1 shackle
Features of your vehicle
1824
Mounting bracket for roof carrier
To install or remove a roof carrier, you
can use the mounting bracket and cover
on the roof.
When you install a roof carrier, use the
following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool(flat blade driver) into
the slot and pry open the cover.
2. After using the roof carrier, install the
cover back on the roof in the reverse
order.
✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
be sure not to position cargo onto the
roof in such a way that it could interfere
with sunroof operation.
EXTERIOR FEATURES (WAGON)
OVF041208
WARNING
Use a coin or flat blade driver when
you remove the roof carrier cover.
If you use your fingernail, it may
damage your fingernail.
CAUTION
• When carrying cargo on the roof,
take the necessary precautions to
make sure the cargo does not
damage the roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects on
the roof, make sure they do not
exceed the overall roof length or
width.
OVF045207K
4183
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
• The vehicle centre of gravity will
be higher when items are loaded
onto the roof. Avoid sudden
starts, braking, sharp turns,
abrupt manoeuvres or high
speeds that may result in loss of
vehicle control or rollover result-
ing in an accident.
• Always drive slowly and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying
items on the roof. Severe wind
updrafts, caused by passing
vehicles or natural causes, can
cause sudden upward pressure
on items loaded on the roof. This
is especially true when carrying
large, flat items such as wood
panels or mattresses. This could
cause the items to fall off the roof
and cause damage to your vehi-
cle or others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
cargo whilst driving, check fre-
quently before or whilst driving to
make sure the items on the roof
are securely fastened.
Features of your vehicle
1844
✽
NOTICE
• If you install an aftermarket HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner,
and air freshener from contacting the
interior parts because they may cause
damage or discoloration.
Antenna (if equipped)
Roof antenna
Your car uses a roof antenna to receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals. This
antenna is a removable type. To remove
the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To
install the antenna, turn it clockwise.
(Type A)
AUDIO SYSTEM
CAUTION
• Before entering a place with a low
height clearance or a car wash,
remove the antenna by rotating it
counterclockwise. If not, the
antenna may be damaged.
• When reinstalling your antenna, it
is important that it is fully tight-
ened and adjusted to the upright
position to ensure proper recep-
tion. But it could be removed
when parking the vehicle or when
loading cargo on the roof rack.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof
rack, do not place the cargo near
the antenna pole to ensure proper
reception.
OVF041317K
OVF043381
■ Type A
■ Type B
4185
Features of your vehicle
Glass antenna (if equipped)
When the radio power switch is turned on
whilst the ignition switch is in either the
“ON” or “ACC” position, your car will
receive both AM and FM broadcast sig-
nals through the antenna in the rear win-
dow glass.
Audio remote control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio remote control
button is installed to promote safe driv-
ing.
OVF043368
CAUTION
• Do not clean the inside of the rear
window glass with a cleaner or
use a scraper to remove foreign
deposits as this may cause dam-
age to the antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coating
(such as Ni, Cd, and so on). These
can disturb receiving broadcast
signals.
• To prevent damage to the rear
glass antenna, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaner
containing abrasives to clean the
window. Clean the inside surface
of the rear glass window with a
piece of soft cloth.
• When putting a sticker on the
inside surface of the rear window,
be careful not to damage to the
rear glass antenna.
• Do not put sharp instruments
nearby the rear glass antenna.
• Tinted rear window may affect the
proper functioning of the anten-
na.
CAUTION
Do not operate the audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
OVF041183
Features of your vehicle
1864
MODE (1)
Press the button to select Radio or CD
(compact disc).
VOL (
+
/
-
) (2)
• Push up the lever to increase volume.
• Push down the lever to decrease vol-
ume.
SEEK ( / ) (3)
The SEEK/PRESET button has different
functions base on the system mode. For
the following functions the button should
be pressed for 0.8 seconds or more.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button.
CDP mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
CDC mode
It will function as the DISC UP/DOWN
button.
If the SEEK button is pressed for less
than 0.8 second, it will work as follows in
each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
select buttons.
CDP mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
CDC mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this section.
Audio / Video / Navigation system
(AVN)
Detailed information for the AVN system
is described in a separately supplied
manual.
4187
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
hands-free
You can use the phone wirelessly by
using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
(1) Call / Answer button
(2) Call end button
(3) Microphone
Detailed information for the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free is
described in the manual supplied sepa-
rately.
OVF041312K
OVG049175/H/Q
Features of your vehicle
1884
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around
your city. They are intercepted by the
radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal
is then received by the radio and sent to
your vehicle speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best pos-
sible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear. This
can be due to factors such as the dis-
tance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the pres-
ence of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts.
This is because AM radio waves are
transmitted at low frequencies. These
long, low frequency radio waves can fol-
low the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmos-
phere. In addition, they curve around
obstructions so that they can provide bet-
ter signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station.
Also, FM signals are easily affected by
buildings, mountains, or other obstruc-
tions. These can result in certain listening
conditions which might lead you to
believe a problem exists with your radio.
The following conditions are normal and
do not indicate radio trouble:
JBM001 JBM002
FM radio reception AM radio reception
JBM003
FM radio station
4189
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
When using a communication sys-
tem such a mobile phone or a radio
set inside the vehicle, a separate
external antenna must be fitted.
When a mobile phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adverse-
ly affect safe operation of the vehi-
cle.
• Fading - As your vehicle moves away
from the radio station, the signal will
weaken and sound will begin to fade.
When this occurs, we suggest that you
select another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the trans-
mitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering nois-
es to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the distur-
bance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful sig-
nal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clear-
est signal. If this occurs, select another
station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflect-
ed signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
Using a mobile phone or a two-
way radio
When a mobile phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the
mobile phone at a place as far as possi-
ble from the audio equipment.
JBM004 JBM005
WARNING
Do not use a mobile phone whilst
driving. Stop at a safe location to
use a mobile phone.
Features of your vehicle
1904
Caring for disc
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows to ventilate
before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA
files without permission. Use CDs that
are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for ana-
logue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from getting
damaged, hold CDs by the edges or the
center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of
soft cloth before playback (wipe it from
the center to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper.
• Make certain only CDs are inserted into
the CD player (Do not insert more than
one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-
RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally according to manufacturing
companies or making and recording
methods. In such circumstances, con-
tinued use may cause malfunctions to
your audio system.
✽
NOTICE - Playing an Incompatible
Copy Protected Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do not
comply with international audio CD
standards (Red Book), may not play on
your car audio. Please note that inabili-
ties to properly play a copy protected
CD may indicate that the CD is defec-
tive, not the CD player.
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order : to sequen-
tially.
2. Folder playing order :
❋ If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
4191
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE - USING THE USB
DEVICE
• To use an external USB device, make
sure the device is not connected when
starting up the vehicle. Connect the
device after starting up.
• If you start the engine when the USB
device is connected, it may damage
the USB device. (USB flashdrives are
very sensitive to electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or turned
off while the external USB device is
connected, the external USB device
may not work.
• The System may not play inauthentic
MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with the
compression rate between 8Kbps~
320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music files
with the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity
when connecting or disconnecting the
external USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of the
external USB device, the connected
external USB device can be unrecog-
nizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector set-
ting of External USB device is not
either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then
the device will not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted to
FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F authen-
tication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection termi-
nal does not come in contact with the
human body or other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or discon-
nect the USB device in a short period
of time, it may break the device.
• You may hear a strange noise when
connecting or disconnecting a USB
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB mode,
the external USB device can be dam-
aged or may malfunction. Therefore,
disconnect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or in
another mode. (e.g, Radio, CD)
• Depending on the type and capacity of
the external USB device or the type of
the files stored in the device, there is a
difference in the time taken for recog-
nition of the device.
• Do not use the USB device for purpos-
es other than playing music files.
• Playing videos through the USB is not
supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB I/F
may lower performance or cause trou-
ble.
• If you use devices such as a USB hub
purchased separately, the vehicle’s
audio system may not recognize the
USB device. In that case, connect the
USB device directly to the multimedia
terminal of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
1924
(Continued)
• If the USB device is divided by logical
drives, only the music files on the
highest-priority drive are recognized
by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/ Cellular
phone/Digital camera can be unrecog-
nizable by standard USB I/F can be
unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may not
be supported in some mobile devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to con-
nection failures due to vehicle vibra-
tions are not supported. ( i -
stick type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be
unrecognizable.
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM (DIGI-
TAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are
not recognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The data in the USB memory may be
lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on a
personal storage device.
• Please avoid using USB
memory products which
can be used as key chains
or cellular phone acces-
sories as they could cause
damage to the USB jack. Please make
certain only to use plug type connec-
tor products.
4193
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE - USING THE iPod
®
DEVICE
• Some iPod models may not support
communication protocol and files may
not properly play.
Supported iPod models:
- iPod Mini
- iPod 4th(Photo) ~ 6th(Classic) gen-
eration
- iPod Nano 1st~4th generation
- iPod Touch 1st~2nd generation
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod can be different
from the order searched in the audio
system.
• If the iPod disabled due to its own
malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset:
Refer to iPod manual)
• An iPod may not operate normally on
low battery.
• Some iPod devices, such as the
iPhone, can be connected through the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology inter-
face. The device must have audio
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology capabil-
ity (such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology). The
device can play, but it will not be con-
trolled by the audio system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• To use iPod features within the audio,
use the cable provided upon purchasing
an iPod device.
• Skipping or improper operation may
occur depending on the characteristics
of your iPod/Phone device.
• If your iPhone is connected to both the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology and
USB, the sound may not be properly
played. In your iPhone, select the Dock
connector or Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology to change the sound output
(source).
• When connecting iPod with the iPod
Power Cable, insert the connector to
the multimedia socket completely. If
not inserted completely, communica-
tions between iPod and audio may be
interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects of
the iPod and the audio system, the
sound effects of both devices will over-
lap and might reduce or distort the
quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod when adjusting
the audio system’s volume, and turn
off the equalizer of the audio system
when using the equalizer of an iPod.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When not using iPod with car audio,
detach the iPod cable from iPod.
Otherwise, iPod may remain in acces-
sory mode, and may not work proper-
ly.
Features of your vehicle
1944
■
CD Player (for RDS model) : AC111DFEE, AC101DFEE (For Europe)
❋No logo will be shown if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
4195
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND
FUNCTIONS
❈ Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
(for RDS model)
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Changes to FM/AM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the mode
is changed in order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟
FMA ➟ AM ➟ AMA.
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when [Mode
Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is displayed,
use the TUNE knob or keys
~ to select the desired mode.
3.
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod), AUX, My
Music, BT Audio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod),
AUX, My Music, BT Audio.
❈ In Setup Display, the media pop up
screen will be displayed when [Mode
Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is displayed,
use the TUNE knob or keys
~ to select the desired mode.
4. (for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
• Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
5.
• Radio Mode : Automatically searches
for broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): Moves to next or previous song
(file)
-
Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the cur-
rent song.
6. PWR/VOL knob
• Power Knob: Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
• Volume Knob: Sets volume by turn-
ing the knob left/right
7.
~
(Preset)
• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies (chan-
nels) or receives saved frequencies
(channels)
• CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu
pop up screen, the number menu is
selected.
2
RDM
1
RPT
61
SEEK
TRACK
5
1
On
MEDIA
5
1
On
RADIO
Features of your vehicle
1964
8.
• Each time the button is shortly pressed
(under 0.8 seconds), sets screen Off
➟
Screen On ➟ Screen Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any key
to turn the screen On again.
9.
• Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): TA On/Off
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds): Previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each
• Media mode
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds): Previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each
❈ Press and holding the key again to
continue listening to the current song
(file).
10.
• Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds) : Moves to the Display, Sound,
Clock, Phone, System setting modes
• Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds) : Move to the Time setting screen
11.
• Displays menus for the current mode.
12.
• CD MP3, USB mode : Folder Search
13. TUNE knob
• Radio mode : Changes frequency by
turning the knob left/right
• CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode:
Searches songs (files) by turning the
knob left/right
❈ When the desired song is displayed,
press the knob to play the song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus and
selects menus
14. DISC-IN LED
• LED that indicates whether a disc is
inserted
15.
•
Changes to FM mode.
•
Each time the key is pressed, the mode
changed in order of FM1
➟
FM2
➟
FMA.
16.
• Changes to AM
➟ AMA mode.
AM
FM
FOLDER
MEMU
TA
4197
Features of your vehicle
■
CD Player : AC111DFEG, AC101DFEG (For Europe)
❋No logo will be shown if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
Features of your vehicle
1984
Audio Head Unit
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Changes to FM/AM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the mode
is changed in order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟
AM.
❈ In Setup Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when [Mode
Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is displayed,
use the TUNE knob or keys
~ to select the desired mode.
3.
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod), AUX, My
Music, BT Audio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod),
AUX, My Music, BT Audio.
❈ In Setup Display, the media pop up
screen will be displayed when [Mode
Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is displayed,
use the TUNE knob or keys
~ to select the desired mode.
4. (for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
• Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
5.
• Radio Mode : Automatically searches
for broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod, My Music modes
-
Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds):
Moves to next or previous song (file)
-
Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the cur-
rent song.
6. PWR/VOL knob
• Power Knob: Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
• Volume Knob: Sets volume by turn-
ing the knob left/right
7.
~
(Preset)
• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies (chan-
nels) or receives saved frequencies
(channels)
• CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu
pop up screen, the number menu is
selected.
2
RDM
1
RPT
61
SEEK
TRACK
5
1
On
MEDIA
5
1
On
RADIO
4199
Features of your vehicle
8.
• Each time the button is shortly pressed
(under 0.8 seconds), sets screen Off
➟
Screen On ➟ Screen Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any key
to turn the screen On again.
9.
• Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds) : Previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each
• CD, USB, My Music mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds) : Previews each song (file) for
10 seconds each
10.
• Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds) : Moves to the Display, Sound,
Clock, Phone, System setting modes
• Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds) : Move to the Time setting screen
11.
• Displays menus for the current mode.
12.
• CD MP3, USB mode : Folder Search
13. TUNE knob
• Radio mode : Changes frequency by
turning the knob left/right
• CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode:
Searches songs (files) by turning the
knob left/right
❈ When the desired song is displayed,
press the knob to play the song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus and
selects menus
14. DISC-IN LED
• LED that indicates whether a disc is
inserted
15.
•
Changes to FM mode.
•
Each time the key is pressed, the mode
changed in order of FM1
➟
FM2.
16.
• Changes to AM mode.
AM
FM
FOLDER
MEMU
SCAN
Features of your vehicle
2004
SETUP
Display Settings
Press the key Select [Display]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes . selec-
tion mode
• During On state, press the or
key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Scroll text
[Scroll text] Set /
• : Maintains scroll
• : Scrolls only one (1) time.
Song Info
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’ or
‘Album/Artist/Song’.
Sound Settings
Press the key Select [Sound]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
2
RDM
Off
On
Off
On
MEDIA
RADIO
On
1
RPT
4201
Features of your vehicle
Audio Settings
This menu allows you to set the ‘Bass,
Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Fader and
Balance.
Select [Audio Settings] Select menu
through
TUNE knob
Tu r n
TUNE
knob
left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound
tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound fader
and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values, re-
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically con-
trol the volume level according to the
speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]
Turn SDVC On/Off by pressing the
TUNE
knob
Volume Dialogue
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Volume Dialogue] Set volume of
TUNE
knob
Features of your vehicle
2024
Clock Settings
Press the key Select [Clock]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Clock Settings
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings] Set through
TUNE
knob Press
TUNE
knob
❈ Adjust the number currently in focus to
set the [hour] and press the tune knob
to set the [minute].
Day Settings
This menu is used to set the date
(DD/MM/YYYY).
Select [Day Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
❈ Adjust the number currently in focus to
make the settings and press the tune
knob to move to the next setting. (Set
in order of Year/Month/Day)
Time Format
This function is used to set the 12/24
hour time format of the audio system.
Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr
through TUNE knob
Clock Display when Power is OFF
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)
Set /
through TUNE knob
• : Displays time/date on screen
• : Turn off.
Automatic RDS Time
This option is used to automatically set
the time by synchronizing with RDS.
Select [Automatic RDS Time]
Set
/ through TUNE knob
• : Turn on Automatic Time
• : Turn off.
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
3
4203
Features of your vehicle
Phone Settings
(for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
Press the key Select [Phone]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Pair Phone
Select [Pair Phone] Set through TUNE
knob
➀ Search for device names as displayed
on your mobile phone and connect.
➁ Input the passkey displayed on the
screen. (Passkey : 0000)
❈ The device name and passkey will be
displayed on the screen for up to 3
minutes. If pairing is not completed
within the 3 minutes, the mobile phone
pairing process will automatically be
canceled.
➂ Pairing completion is displayed.
❈ In some mobile phones, pairing will
automatically be followed by connec-
tion.
❈ It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phones.
4
CAUTION
To pair a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology enabled mobile phone,
authentication and connection
processes are first required. As a
result, you cannot pair your mobile
phone while driving the vehicle.
First park your vehicle before use.
Features of your vehicle
2044
Phone List
The names of up to 5 paired phones will
be displayed.
A [ ] is displayed in front of the currently
connected phone.
Select the desired name to setup the
selected phone.
•
Connecting a phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile phone
through TUNE knob Select [Connect
Phone]
➀ Select a mobile phone that is not cur-
rently connected.
➁ Connect the selected mobile phone.
➂ Connection completion is displayed.
❈ If a phone is already connected, dis-
connect the currently connected
phone and select a new phone to con-
nect.
•
Disconnecting a connected phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile phone
through TUNE knob Select [Disconnect
Phone]
➀ Select the currently connected mobile
phone.
➁ Disconnect the selected mobile
phone.
➂ Disconnection completion is dis-
played.
• Changing connection sequence (Priority)
This is used to change the order (priori-
ty) of automatic connection for the paired
mobile phones.
Select [Phone List] Select [Priority]
through TUNE knob Select No. 1
Priority mobile phone
➀ Select [Priority].
➁ From the paired phones, select the
phone desired for No.1 priority.
➂ The changed priority sequence is dis-
played.
❈ Once the connection sequence (prior-
ity) is changed, the new no. 1 priority
mobile phone will be connected.
- When the no. 1 priority cannot be con-
nected: Automatically attempts to con-
nect the most recently connected
phone.
- Cases when the most recently con-
nected phone cannot be connected:
Attempts to connect in the order in
which paired phones are listed.
- The connected phone will automati-
cally be changed to No. 1 priority.
4205
Features of your vehicle
• Delete
Select [Phone List] Select mobile phone
through TUNE knob Select [Delete]
➀ Select the desired mobile phone.
➁ Delete the selected mobile phone.
➂ Deletion completion is displayed.
❈ When attempting to delete a currently
connected phone, the phone is first
disconnected.
Phone book Download
This feature is used to download phone
book and call histories into the audio sys-
tem.
Select [Phone book Download] Select
through
TUNE
knob
Auto Download
When connecting a mobile phone, it is
possible to automatically download new
phone book and Call Histories.
Select [Auto Download] Set /
through TUNE knob
Audio Streaming
Songs (files) saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled
mobile phone
can be played through the audio system.
Select [Audio Streaming] Set /
through TUNE knob
Outgoing Volume
This is used to set the volume of your
voice as heard by the other party while
on a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call.
Select [Outgoing Volume] Set volume
through
TUNE
knob
❈ Even while on a call, the volume can
be changed by using the
key.
SEEK
TRACK
Off
On
OffOn
CAUTION
•
The download feature may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
• If a different operation is performed
while phone book is being down-
loaded, downloading will be discon-
tinued. Phone book already down-
loaded will be saved.
• When downloading new phone
book, delete all previously saved
phone book before starting down-
load.
CAUTION
The
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio streaming feature may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
CAUTION
• When you delete a mobile phone,
the mobile phone phone book will
also be erased.
•
For stable Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology communication, delete
the mobile phone from the audio
and also delete the audio from your
mobile phone.
Features of your vehicle
2064
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
System Off
This feature is used when you do not
wish to use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
system.
Select [Bluetooth System Off] Set through
TUNE knob
❈ If a phone is already connected, dis-
connect the currently connected
phone and turn the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology system off.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology System
To use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
when the system is currently off, follow
these next steps.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology through the key
Press the key Screen Guidance
❈ Moves to the screen where
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
functions can be
used and displays guidance.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology through the key
Press the key Select [Phone]
through TUNE knob or key
➀ A screen asking whether to turn on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
will be
displayed.
➁ On the screen, select to turn on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and
display guidance.
❈ If the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
system is turned on, the system will
automatically try to connect the most
recently connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
YES
3
CAUTION
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection may become intermit-
tently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these next
steps to try again.
1) Turn the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone ON/OFF and try
to connect again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power
ON/OFF and try to connect
again.
3) Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
try to connect again.
4) Reboot the audio system and
try to connect again
5) Delete all paired devices in
your mobile phone and the
audio system and pair again
for use.
4207
Features of your vehicle
System Settings
Press the key Select [System]
through tune knob or key Select
menu through TUNE knob
Memory Information (if equipped)
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is displayed
on the left side while the total system
memory is displayed on the right side.
VRS Mode
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal and
Expert modes.
Select [VRS Mode] Set through
TUNE
knob
• Normal : This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed instructions
during voice command operation.
• Expert : This mode is for expert users
and omits some information during
voice command operation. (When using
Expert mode, guidance instructions can
be heard through the [Help] or [Menu]
commands.
❈ May differ depending on the selected
audio.
Language
This menu is used to set the display and
voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through TUNE
knob
❈ The system will reboot after the lan-
guage is changed.
❈ Language support by region
-
5
Features of your vehicle
2084
RADIO (for RDS model)
Changing RADIO mode
Press the key to change the
mode in order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟
AM ➟ AMA.
Press the or key to
change the mode in order of FM1
➟ FM2
➟ FMA and AM ➟ AMA.
[Mode Pop up] On state : Displays the
change radio mode pop up screen.
While the pop up screen is displayed, you
can change the radio mode
( : FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟ AMA / :
FM1
➟ FM2
➟ FMA
: AM ➟ AMA)
through the tune knob or ~ keys.
Adjust Volume
Turn the VOL knob left/right to adjust
the volume.
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Automatically searches for
the next frequency.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): Plays the frequency saved in the
corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Pressing and holding the
desired key from ~ will
save the currently playing broadcast to
the selected key and sound a BEEP.
Selecting through manual search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to adjust
the frequency.
Traffic Announcement (TA)
Shortly pressing the key (under
0.8 seconds): Set
/
TA Traffic
Announcement) mode.
MENU
Within key are the A.Store (Auto
Store) and Info functions.
AST (Auto Store)
Press the key Set [ AST]
through TUNE knob or key.
Select AST (Auto Store) to save frequen-
cies with superior reception to presets
~
. If no frequencies are
received, then the most recently received
frequency will be broadcast.
❈ Saves only to the Preset memory
~ of FMA or AMA mode.
61
61
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
OffOn
TA
61
61
SEEK
TRACK
51
AM
FM
RADIO
AMFM
RADIO
4209
Features of your vehicle
AF (Alternative Frequency)
Press the key Set [ AF]
through TUNE knob or key.
The Alternative Frequency option can be
turned On/Off.
Region
Press the key Set [ Region]
through TUNE knob or key.
The Region option can be turned On/Off.
News
Press the key Set [ News]
through TUNE knob or key.
The News option can be turned On/Off.
Info Volume
Info Volume refers to the sound volume
upon receiving News or Traffic information.
The info volume can be controlled by
turning the VOL knob left/right while a
news or traffic broadcast is playing.
❈ AF, Region, and News are RDS Radio
menus.
RADIO
Changing RADIO mode
Press the key to change the
mode in order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ AM.
Press the or key to
change the mode in order of FM1
➟ FM2
and AM.
• When the power is off, press the
or key to turn on the
audio system and receive radio broadcasts.
[Mode Pop up] On state : Displays the
change radio mode pop up screen.
While the pop up screen is displayed,
you can change the radio mode
( : FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ AM /
: FM1
➟ FM2 / : AM) through the
tune knob or ~ keys.
Adjust Volume
Turn the VOL knob left/right to adjust
the volume.
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Automatically searches for
the next frequency.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): Plays the frequency saved in the
corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Pressing and holding the
desired key from ~ will
save the currently playing broadcast to
the selected key and sound a BEEP.
61
61
SEEK
TRACK
31
AM
FMRADIO
AMFM
RADIO
AMFM
RADIO
4
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
Features of your vehicle
2104
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): The broadcast frequency
increases and previews each broadcast
for 5 seconds each. After scanning all
frequencies, returns and plays the cur-
rent broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews the broadcasts
saved in Preset ~ for 5 sec-
onds each.
Selecting through manual search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to adjust
the frequency.
MENU
Within key are the AST (Auto
Store) and Info functions.
AST (Auto Store)
Press the key Set [
AST
]
through TUNE knob or key.
Select AST(Auto Store) to save frequen-
cies with superior reception to presets
~
. If no frequencies are
received, then the most recently received
frequency will be broadcast.
61
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
61
SCAN
4211
Features of your vehicle
BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod / My Music
Press the key to change the mod
mode in order of CD
➟USB(iPod)➟AUX
➟My Music➟BT Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on the
screen.
<Audio CD>
<CD MP3>
<USB>
<My Music>
❈ The CD is automatically played when
a CD is inserted.
❈ The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
Repeat
While song (file) is playing (RPT)
key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod, My Music
mode: RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (Shortly pressing
the key (under 0.8 seconds)): Repeats
the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current folder.
❈ Press the key again to turn off
repeat.
Random
While song (file) is playing (RDM)
key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds)): Plays all songs in
random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)): Plays all files
within the current folder in random
order.
2
RDM
1
RPT
1
RPT
MEDIA
Features of your vehicle
2124
iPod mode: RDM on screen
• Random (Shortly pressing the key):
Plays all files in random order.
❈ Press the key again to turn off
repeat.
Changing Song/File
While song (file) is playing key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): Plays the current song from the
beginning.
❈ If the key is pressed again
within 1 second, the previous song is
played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Rewinds the song.
While song (file) is playing key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): Plays the next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Fast forwards the song.
Scan (for RDS model)
While song (file) is playing key
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Scans all songs for 10 sec-
onds starting from the next song.
❈ Pressing and holding the key
again to turn off.
Scan
While song (file) is playing key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds) : Scans all songs from the next
song for 10 seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to turn off.
❈ The SCAN function is not supported in
iPod mode.
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
While file is playing (Folder
Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
While file is playing (Folder
Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing the
TUNE knob, the first file within the
selected folder will be played.
❈ In iPod mode, moves to the Parent
Folder.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning TUNE knob : Searches for
songs (files)
• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays select-
ed song (file).
FOLDER
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
TA
TA
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
2
RDM
4213
Features of your vehicle
MENU : Audio CD
Press the CD MP3 mode key to
set the Repeat, Random, Information
features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or key to
repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or key to
randomly play songs within the current
folder.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or key to
display information of the current song.
❈ Press the key to turn off info
display.
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the CD MP3 mode key to
set the Repeat, Folder Random, Folder
Repeat, All Random, Information, and
Copy features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or key to
repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Folder Random
Press the key Set [ F.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or key to
randomly play songs within the current
folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
Folder Repeat
Press the key Set [ F.RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or key
to repeat songs within the current folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Press the key Set [ A.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or key to
randomly play all songs within the CD.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or key
to display information of the current song.
❈ Press the key to turn off info
display.
MENU
5
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
Features of your vehicle
2144
Copy
Press the key Set [ Copy]
through the
TUNE
knob or key.
This is used to copy the current song into
My Music. You can play the copied Music
in My Music mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while copy-
ing is in progress, a pop up asking you
whether to cancel copying is dis-
played.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod, AUX) while
copying is in progress, copying is can-
celed.
❈ Music will not be played while copying
is in progress.
MENU : iPod
In iPod mode, press the key to set
the Repeat, Album Random, All Random,
Information and Search features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or key
to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [
RDM
]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Plays albums within the currently playing
category in random order.
❈ Press Alb.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or key.
Displays information of the current song.
❈ Press the key to turn off info
display.
Search
Press the key Set [ Search]
through the
TUNE
knob or key.
Displays iPod category list.
❈ Searching iPod category is
key pressed, move to parent category.
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
6
MENU
4215
Features of your vehicle
MENU : My Music Mode
(if equipped)
In My Music mode, press the key
to set the Repeat, Random, Information,
Delete, Delete All, and Delete Selection
features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or key.
Displays information of the current song.
❈ Press the key to turn off info
display.
Delete
Press the key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete will
delete the currently playing song.
Deletes file from list
➀ Select the file you wish to delete by
using the TUNE knob.
➁ Press the key and select the
delete menu to delete the selected
file.
Delete All
Press the key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [ Del.Sel]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Songs within My Music are selected and
deleted.
➀ Select the songs you wish to delete
from the list.
➁ After selecting, press the key
and select the delete menu.
MENU
6
MENU
5
MENU
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
Features of your vehicle
2164
✽
NOTICE - USING THE My
Music
• Even if memory is available, a maxi-
mum of 6,000 songs can be stored.
• The same song can be copied up to
1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in the
System menu of Setup.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA cur-
rently connected with the AUX terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start when
an external device is connected with the
AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected, you
can also press the key to change
to AUX mode.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started unless
there is an external device connected
to the AUX terminal.
✽
NOTICE - USING THE AUX
• Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
AUDIO
(if equipped)
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology is a wire-
less technology that allows multiple
devices to be connected in a short range,
low-powered devices like hands-free,
stereo headset, wireless remote con-
troller, etc. For more information, visit
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
website at
www.Bluetooth.com
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
audio features
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio
may not be supported depending on
the compatibility of your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio, you must first pair
and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio
can be used only when the [Audio
Streaming] of Phone is turned On.
❈ Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Streaming : Press the
key Select [Phone] through the tune
knob Select [Audio Streaming]
through the TUNE knob Set
/
Starting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Audio
• Press the key to change the
mode in order of CD ➟ USB➟ AUX ➟
My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start play-
ing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
audio features
• Play / Pause
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
❈ The previous song / next song / play /
pause functions may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
MEDIA
Off
On
MEDIA
4217
Features of your vehicle
PHONE (if equipped)
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone features
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, you must first pair
and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or con-
nected, it is not possible to enter Phone
mode. Once a phone is paired or con-
nected, the guidance screen will be dis-
played.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition
(IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone will be automatical-
ly connected. Even if you are outside,
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically connected
once you are in the vicinity of the vehicle.
If you do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone connection,
set the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power to OFF.
Making a call using the Steering
remote controller
(VOICE COMMAND equipped model)
❈ The actual feature in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
1. VOLUME button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
2. button : Activates voice recogni-
tion.
3. button : Places and transfers
calls.
4. button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
• Check call history and making call
➀ Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the
key on the steering remote con-
troller.
➁ The call history list will be displayed
on the screen.
➂ Press the key again to connect a
call to the selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called num-
ber
➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the
key on the steering remote con-
troller.
➁ The most recently called number is
redialed.
Features of your vehicle
2184
Making a call using the Steering
remote controller
❈ The actual feature in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
1. VOLUME button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
Phone MENU (if equipped)
Press the key to display three
menus (Call History, Phone Book, Phone
Setup).
Call history
Press the key Set [ History]
through the TUNE knob or key.
The call history is displayed and can be
used to select a number and make a call.
If call history does not exist, a screen ask-
ing whether to download call history is dis-
played. (The download feature may not be
supported in some mobile phones)
Phone Book
Press the key Set [
P. Book
]
through the TUNE knob or key.
The phone book is displayed and can be
used to select a number and make a call.
❈ If more than one number is saved to
one contact, then a screen showing
the mobile phone number, Home and
office number is displayed. Select the
desired number to make the call.
❈ If phone book do not exist, a screen
asking whether to download phone
book is displayed. (The download fea-
ture may not be supported in some
mobile phones)
Phone Setup
Press the key Set [ Setup]
through the TUNE knob or key.
The
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile
phone setup screen is displayed. For
more information, refer to “Phone Setup”.
3
2
RDM
1
RPT
4219
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE - USING THE
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology CELLULAR
PHONE
• Do not use a cellular phone or per-
form Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
settings (e.g. pairing a phone) while
driving.
• Some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled phones may not be recog-
nized by the system or fully compati-
ble with the system.
• Before using Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features of the
audio system, refer your phone’s
User’s Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
operations.
• The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology related fea-
tures.
• You will not be able to use the
hands-free feature when your
phone (in the car) is outside of the
cellular service area (e.g. in a tun-
nel, in a underground, in a moun-
tainous area, etc.).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicles interior noise is too
loud, it may be difficult to hear the
other person’s voice during a call.
• Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects, otherwise
communications with Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology system or cel-
lular service stations can be dis-
turbed.
• While a phone is connected through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology your
phone may discharge quicker than
usual for additional Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology-related operations.
• Some cellular phones or other
devices may cause interference
noise or malfunction to audio sys-
tem. In this case, store the device in
a different location may resolve the
condition.
• Phone contact names should be
saved in English or they may not be
displayed correctly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected.
Even if you are outside, the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle.
If you do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology con-
nection, turn the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature off.
• The hands-free call volume and
quality may differ depending on the
mobile phone type.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures can be used only when the
mobile phone has been paired and
connected with the device. For
more information on pairing and
connecting Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology enabled mobile phones,
refer to the “Phone Setup” section.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
2204
(Continued)
•
When a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone is connected, a ( )
icon will appear at the top of the
screen. If a ( ) icon is not displayed,
this indicates that a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled device
has not been connected. You must
connect the device before use. For
more information on Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phones,
refer to the “Phone Setup” section.
• Pairing and connecting a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled mobile
phone will work only when the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology option
within your mobile phone has been
turned on. (Methods of turning on
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled feature may differ depend-
ing on the mobile phone.)
• In some mobile phones, starting the
ignition while talking through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled
handsfree call will result in the call
becoming disconnected. (Switch the
call back to your mobile phone
when starting the ignition.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
Some features may not be supported in
some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone and devices.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled
operation may be unstable depending
on the communication state.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
4221
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE - USING VOICE
COMMAND
• The voice recognition feature of this
product supports recognition of the
commands listed within this user’s
manual.
• While using voice recognition, oper-
ating the steering remote control or
the device will terminate voice recog-
nition and allow you to manually
operate desired functions.
• Position the microphone above the
head of the driver’s seat. For supe-
rior performance, maintain good
posture when saying voice com-
mands.
• Voice recognition may not function
properly due to outside noise. The
following conditions can affect the
performance of Voice Recognition:
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the heating/cooling system
is on
- When passing a tunnel
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
(Continued)
(Continued)
• After downloading Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book,
the system requires some times to
convert the phone book into voice
information. During this time, voice
recognition may not operate prop-
erly.
• Upon inputting your phone book,
special symbols and numbers can-
not be recognized by voice. For
example, “# John Doe%&” will be
recognized as “John Doe”.
Features of your vehicle
2224
VOICE COMMAND
(if equipped)
Starting Voice Command
• To start voice command, shortly press
the key on the steering wheel
remote controller.
• If voice command is in [Normal Mode],
then the system will say “Please say a
command. Beep”
❈ If voice command is in [Expert Mode],
then the system will only say a “Beep-”
❈ Setting Voice command [Normal
Mode]/[Expert Mode]:
Press the key Select
[System] through the TUNE knob
or key Select [Voice Command
Mode] through the TUNE knob
Set [Normal Mode]/[Expert Mode]
• Say the voice command.
✽
NOTICE
For proper voice recognition, say the
voice command after the guidance mes-
sage and the “Beep” sound.
Skipping the Guidance Message
While the guidance message is being
stated, shortly press the key (under
0.8 seconds) to discontinue the guidance
message and sound the “beep”.
After the “beep”, say the voice command.
Ending Voice Command
• While using voice command, press and
hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) to
end voice command.
• While using voice command, pressing
the steering wheel remote controller or
a different key will end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting
for your voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting
for your voice command, shortly press
the key (under 0.8 seconds) to end
voice command.
5
4223
Features of your vehicle
❈ Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
while guidance message is being stated
More Help
Phone book
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command
Please say a...
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB,
Aux, My Music, iPod, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Phone book
Please say the name of the Phone book
you want to call.
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB,
Aux, My Music, iPod, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Beep-
Beep-
Beep-
Beep Beep.. (end beep)
Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds)
Features of your vehicle
2244
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in
phone book
Ex) Call “John”
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say “Call
History”, “
Phone book
”, “Dial Number” to exe-
cute corresponding functions.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Phone book
Displays the
phone book
screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a
phone book
saved in the
phone book
to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number what
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Radio
•
When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1
➟ FM2➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟
AMA)
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
Command Function
FM
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
FMA Displays the FMA screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
AMA Displays the AMA screen.
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
TA on Enable Traffic Announcement
TA off Disable Traffic Announcement
News on Enable RDS News feature
News off Disable RDS News feature
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These are commands that can be used in all situations. (However, some commands may not be support-
ed in special circumstances.)
4225
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
Play Track 1~30 If a music CD has been inserted, plays the
corresponding track.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
Search CD Moves to the CD track or file selection screen.
•
For audio CDs, move to the screen and say the
track number to play the corresponding track.
•
Moves to MP3 CD file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and
play music.
USB Plays USB music.
Search USB Moves to USB file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
iPod Plays iPod music.
Search iPod Moves to the iPod file selection screen. After,
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
Search My Music Moves to My Music file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
Command Function
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth Audio Plays the music saved in connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
Mute Mutes the radio or music volume.
Pardon? Repeats the most recent comment.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
Features of your vehicle
2264
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands that can be used while
listening to FM, AM radio.
• Audio CD commands: Commands that can be used while lis-
tening to Audio CD.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Auto Store Automatically selects radio broadcast fre-
quencies with superior reception and saves in
Presets 1~6.
Preset Save 1~6 Saves the current broadcast frequency to
Preset 1~6.
Seek up Plays the next receivable broadcast.
Seek down Plays the previous receivable broadcast.
Next Preset Selects the preset number next to the most
recently selected preset. (Example: When cur-
rently listening to preset no. 3, then preset no.
4 will be selected.)
Previous Preset Selects the preset number previous to the
most recently selected preset. (Example:
When currently listening to preset no. 3, then
preset no. 2 will be selected.)
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
AF on Enable Alternative Frequency feature
AF off Disable Alternative Frequency feature
Region Enable Region feature
Command Function
Region off Disable Region feature
Program Type Moves to the RDS Program type selection
screen. After, manually operate the device to
select a desired program type.
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Next Track Plays the next track.
Previous Track Plays the previous track.
Scan Scans the tracks from the next track for 10
seconds each.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Search Track Moves to the track selection screen. After, say
the track name to play the corresponding track.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
track.
4227
Features of your vehicle
• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands that can be used
while listening to music files saved in CD and USB.
• iPod Commands: Commands that can be used while playing
iPod.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
All Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Folder Repeat Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Search Folder Moves to the folder selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Copy Copies the current file into My Music.
Command Function
All Random Randomly plays all saved songs.
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Next Song Plays the next song.
Previous Song Plays the previous song.
Search Song Moves to the song selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
song.
Features of your vehicle
2284
• My Music Commands: Commands that can be used while
playing My Music.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands that can be used while playing Phone Music.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
Delete All Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will
bypass an additional confirmation process.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
4229
Features of your vehicle
■
CD Player : AC112DFEG (For Europe)
Features of your vehicle
2304
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND
FUNCTIONS
❈ Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Converts to Radio(FM/AM) mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the mode
is changed in order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟
AM.
3.
• Start Media mode
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod)
AUX, My Music, BT Audio.
4.
• Converts to Phone mode
❈ When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
5. PWR/VOL knob
• Power : Press to turn power on/off.
• Volume : Turn left/right to control vol-
ume.
6.
• When pressed shortly(under 0.8 sec-
onds)
- Radio mode : plays previous/next fre-
quency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes
: changes the track, Song(file)
• When pressed and held (0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode : continuously changes
the frequency. Upon release, plays the
current frequency.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes :
rewinds or fast forwards the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls the
call volume.
7.
• CD MP3, USB modes : searches fold-
ers.
FOLDER
SEEK
TRACK
MEDIA
RADIO
4231
Features of your vehicle
8.
• Turns the monitor display on/off.
9.
• Shortly press the key(under 0.8 sec-
onds) : Display time screen
• Press and hold the key(over 0.8 sec-
onds) : Move to the time setting mode
10.
• Radio Mode : previews all receivable
broadcasts for 5 seconds each
• Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes :
previews each song (file) for 10 sec-
onds each.
11.
• Converts to Setup mode.
12. TUNE knob
• Radio mode : turn to change broadcast
frequencies.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music)
modes : turn to search tracks/chan-
nels/files.
13. DISC-IN LED
• LED that indicates whether a disc is
inserted.
SCAN
Features of your vehicle
2324
■
CD Player : AC113DFEE(for RDS model), AC1C1DFEE(for RDS+DAB model)
4233
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND
FUNCTIONS
❈ Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Converts to Radio(FM/AM) mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the mode
is changed in order of (for RDS model)
FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟ AMA,
(for RDS+DAB model)
FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟ DAB1➟ DAB2 ➟
AM.
3.
• Start Media mode
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod)
AUX, My Music, BT Audio.
4.
• Converts to Phone mode
❈ When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
5. PWR/VOL knob
• Power : Press to turn power on/off.
• Volume : Turn left/right to control vol-
ume.
6.
• When pressed shortly(under 0.8 sec-
onds)
- Radio mode : plays previous/next fre-
quency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes
: changes the track, Song(file)
• When pressed and held (0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode : continuously changes
the frequency. Upon release, plays the
current frequency.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes :
rewinds or fast forwards the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls the
call volume.
7.
• CD MP3, USB modes : searches fold-
ers.
FOLDER
SEEK
TRACK
MEDIA
RADIO
Features of your vehicle
2344
8.
• Turns the monitor display on/off.
9.
• Shortly press the key(under 0.8 sec-
onds) : Display time screen
• Press and hold the key(over 0.8 sec-
onds) : Move to the time setting mode
10.
• Radio Mode :
- Short key : TA On/Off
- Long key : previews all receivable
broadcasts for 5 seconds each.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes :
previews each song (file) for 10 sec-
onds each.
11.
• Converts to Setup mode.
12. TUNE knob
• Radio mode : turn to change broadcast
frequencies.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes
: turn to search tracks/channels/files.
13. DISC-IN LED
• LED that indicates whether a disc is
inserted.
TA/SCAN
4235
Features of your vehicle
Steering remote controller
❈ The actual feature in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
1. VOLUME
• Used to control volume.
2. SEEK
• When pressed shortly (under 0.8 sec-
onds)
- Radio mode : searches broadcast
frequencies saved to presets.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod/My Music/BT
Audio) modes : changes the track,
file or chapter.
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-
onds)
- Radio mode, automatically searches
broadcast frequencies and channels
- Media(CD/USB/iPod/My Music)
modes, rewinds or fast forwards the
track or song(file)
- BT Audio mode may not be support-
ed in some mobile phones.
3.
• Each time this key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of
(for RDS model)
FM1
➟
FM2
➟
FMA
➟
AM
➟
AMA
➟
CD
➟
USB(iPod)
➟
AUX
➟
My Music
➟
BT Audio
(for RDS+DAB model)
FM1
➟
FM2
➟
FMA
➟
DAB1
➟
DAB2
➟
AM
➟
AMA
➟
CD
➟
USB(iPod)
➟
AUX
➟
My Music
➟
BT Audio
• If the media is not connected or a disc
is not inserted, corresponding modes
will be disabled.
4.
• When pressed shortly
- Starts voice recognition
- When selecting during a voice
prompt, stops the prompt and con-
verts to voice command waiting state
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-
onds)
- Ends voice recognition
Features of your vehicle
2364
5.
• When pressed shortly (under 0.8 sec-
onds)
- When pressed in the phone screen,
displays call history screen
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming call
screen, answers the call
- When pressed during call waiting,
switches to waiting call (Call Waiting)
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-
onds)
- When pressed in the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree wait
mode, redials the last call
- When pressed during a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree call,
switches call back to mobile phone
(Private)
- When pressed while calling on the mobile
phone, switches call back to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree (Operates
only when
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is connected)
6.
• Ends phone call
4237
Features of your vehicle
RADIO MODE (for RDS model)
- AC113DFEE, AC1C1DFEE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode
2. Frequency
Displays the current frequency
3. Preset
Displays current preset number
~
4. Preset Display
Displays saved presets
5. Auto Store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons
6. RDS Menu
Displays the RDS Menu
7. RDS Info
Displays RDS broadcast information
Switching to Radio Mode
Pressing the key will change the
operating mode in order of FM1
➟
FM2
➟
FMA
➟
AM
➟
AMA.
If [Pop-up Mode] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Radio Pop-
up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
RADIO
RADIO
6
1
Features of your vehicle
2384
Searching Radio Frequencies
Using Seek
Press the key to play the pre-
vious/next frequency.
Using TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the desired
frequency.
• FM : Increases/decreased by 50kHz
• AM : Increases/decreased by 9kHz
Using Radio Mode
Selecting /Saving Presets
Press the ~ buttons to play the
desired preset.
Press the button to display the
broadcast information for the frequency
saved to each button.
✽
NOTICE
While listening to a frequency you want
to save as a preset, press and hold one of
the
~ preset buttons (over 0.8
seconds) to save the current frequency
to the selected preset.
Auto Store
Press the button to automatically
save receivable frequencies to Preset
buttons.
✽
NOTICE
While Auto Store is operating, pressing
the [Cancel] button again will cancel
Auto Store and restore the previous fre-
quency.
61
61
SEEK
TRACK
4239
Features of your vehicle
RDS Menu
Press the button to set the AF
(Alternative Frequency), Region and
News features.
✽
NOTICE
The RDS Menu is not supported within
AM or AMA mode.
Scan
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to preview frequencies with
superior reception for 5 seconds each.
✽
NOTICE
Once scan is complete, the previous fre-
quency will be restored.
While Scan is operating, pressing and
holding the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds) will cancel the scan operation.
TA (Traffic Announcement)
Press the key to turn the TA
(Traffic Announcement) feature On/Off.
TA/SCAN
TA/SCAN
TA/SCAN
Features of your vehicle
2404
RADIO MODE (for DAB model)
- AC1C1DFEE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode
2. DAB Info
Displays DAB broadcast information
3. Preset
Displays current preset number
~
4. Preset Display
Displays saved presets
5. EPG (Electronic Program Guide)
Displays program schedules.
6. Info
Shows detailed information about the
current broadcast
7. DAB Setup
Used to set Service Following and L-
Band features.
Searching DAB Stations
Using Seek
Press the key to play the pre-
vious/next station.
Using TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired station.
Once you find the desired station, press
the TUNE knob to broadcast the sta-
tion.
SEEK
TRACK
6
1
4241
Features of your vehicle
Using Folder
Press the key to search the
Ensemble.
Select the desired Ensemble to select
stations within the Ensemble.
Using DAB Mode
Selecting/Saving Presets
Press the ~ buttons to play the
desired preset.
Press the button to display the
broadcast information for the station
saved to each button.
✽
NOTICE
While listening to a station you want to
save as a preset, press and hold one of
the
~ preset buttons (over 0.8
seconds) to save the current station to
the selected preset.
EPG
Press the button to view program
schedules.
61
61
FOLDER
Features of your vehicle
2424
INFO
Press the button to display details
about the current station.
DAB Setup
Preset the button to set the
Service Following and L-Band features.
Service Following
When the DAB signal is weak, the
Service Following feature will automati-
cally convert to the identical FM broad-
cast when such a broadcast is available.
L-Band
DAB Broadcasts include BAND III and L-
BAND according to the Range. BAND III
is always set as the default while the L-
BAND feature can be turned on to search
for L-BAND broadcasts when in regions
where L-BAND broadcasts are available.
Scan
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to preview stations with
superior reception for 5 seconds each.
✽
NOTICE
While Scan is operating, pressing and
hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) will can-
cel the scan operation.
TA/SCAN
4243
Features of your vehicle
RADIO MODE
- AC112DFEG
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode
2. Frequency
Displays the current frequency
3. Preset
Displays current preset number
~
4. Preset Display
Displays preset buttons
5. Auto Store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons
Switching to Radio Mode
Pressing the key will change the
operating mode in order of FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
If [Mode Pop-up] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Radio Pop-
up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the focus.
Press the knob to select.
RADIO
RADIO
6
1
Features of your vehicle
2444
Searching Radio Frequencies
Using Seek
Press the key to play the pre-
vious/next frequency.
Using TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
• FM : Increases/decreased by 100kHz
• AM : Increases/decreased by 9kHz
Using Radio Mode
Selecting /Saving Presets
Press the button to display the
broadcast information for the frequency
saved to each button.
Press the ~ buttons to play the
desired preset.
✽
NOTICE
While listening to a frequency you want
to save as a preset, press and hold one of
the
~ preset buttons (over 0.8
seconds) to save the current frequency
to the selected preset.
Auto Store
Press the button to automatically
save receivable frequencies to Preset
buttons.
Scan
Press the key to preview fre-
quencies with superior reception for 5
seconds each.
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5
seconds each.
✽
NOTICE
• Once scan is complete, the previous
frequency will be restored.
• While Scan is operating, pressing the
key will cancel the scan oper-
ation.
SCAN
SCAN
SCAN
61
61
SEEK
TRACK
4245
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE - USING THE
DISCS
• This device has been manufactured to
be compatible with software bearing
the following logo marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical solu-
tions, such as record sprays, antistatic
sprays, antistatic liquids, benzene, or
thinners.
• After using a disc, put the disc back in
its original case to prevent disc
scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or within the
center hole to prevent damages to disc
surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign substances
into the disc insert/eject slot. Introducing
foreign substances could damage the
device interior.
• Do not insert two discs simultaneously.
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs, dif-
ferences in disc reading and playing
times may occur depending on the
disc manufacturer, production method
and the recording method as used by
the user.
• Clean fingerprints and dust off the
disc surface (coated side) with a soft
cloth.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result in disc
slot jams or difficulties in disc
removal. Such discs may also result in
noise while playing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may not
properly operate depending on the
disc manufacturer, production method
and the record method as used by the
user. If problems persist, trying using
a different CD as continued use may
result in malfunctions.
• The performance of this product may
differ depending on the CD-RW
Drive Software.
• Copy-protected CDs such as S-type
CDs may not function in the device.
DATA discs cannot be played.
(However, such discs may still operate
but will do so abnormally.)
• Do not use abnormally shaped discs
(8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-shaped)
as such discs could lead to malfunc-
tions.
• If the disc is straddled on the disc slot
without removal for 10 seconds, the
disc will automatically be re-inserted
into the disc player.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R,
CDs with labels)
Features of your vehicle
2464
MP3 File Information
• Supported Audio Formats
ISO 9660 Level 1
ISO 9660 Level 2
Romeo / Juliet (128 characters)
MPEG1 Audio Layer3
MPEG2 Audio Layer3
MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3
Windows Media Audio Ver 7.X
& 8.X
❈ File formats that do not comply with
the above formats may not be proper-
ly recognized or play without properly
displaying file names or other informa-
tion.
• Support for Compressed Files
1. Supported Bitrates (Kbps)
MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA
Layer3 Layer3 Layer3
High Range
32 8 8 48
40 16 16 64
48 24 24 80
56 32 32 96
64 40 40 128
80 48 48 160
96 56 56 192
112 64 64
128 80 80
160 96 96
192 112 112
224 128 128
256 144 144
320 160 160
2. Sampling Frequencies (Hz)
MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA
44100 22050 11025 32000
48000 24000 12000 44100
3000 16000 8000 48000
• For MP3/WMA compression files, differ-
ences in sound quality will occur depend-
ing on the bitrate. (Higher sound quality
can be experienced with higher bitrates.)
• This device only recognizes files with
MP3/WMA extensions. Other file exten-
sions may not be properly recognized.
3. Maximum number of recognized fold-
ers and files
- Folder : 255 folders for CD, 2,000
folders for USB
- File : 999 files for CD, 6,000 files for
USB
❈ There are no limitations to the number
of recognized folder levels
• Language Support (Unicode Support)
1. English: 94 characters
2. Special characters and Symbols : 986
characters
3. Special characters and Symbols : 986
characters
❈ Languages other than Korean and
English (including Chinese) are not
included.
File System
Audio
Compression
BIT RATE(kbps)
4247
Features of your vehicle
4. Text Display (Based on Unicode)
- File name: Maximum 64 English
characters
- Folder name: Max 32 English char-
acters
❈ Using the scroll feature allows you to
see the entire name of files with
names that are too long to be dis-
played at once.
•
Compatibility by Disc Type
1. Playing MIXED CDs: First plays the
audio CD, then plays the compressed
file(s).
2. Playing EXTRA CDs: First plays the
audio CD, then plays the compressed
file(s).
3. Playing multisession CDs: Plays in
order of sessions
- MIXED CD : CD type in which both
MP3 and audio CD files are recog-
nized in one disc.
- Multisession CD CD type that
includes more than two sessions.
Different from Extra CDs, multises-
sion CDs are recorded by sessions
and have no media limitation.
•
Precautions upon Writing CDs
1. In all cases except when creating mul-
tisession discs, check the close ses-
sion option before creating the disc.
Though product malfunctions will not
occur, some time may be required for
the device to check whether the ses-
sion state is closed (approximately 25
seconds). (Additional time may also
be required depending on the number
of folders or files.)
2. Changing the MP3/WMA file exten-
sions or changing files of other exten-
sions to MP3/WMA may result in
product malfunction.
3. When naming files with MP3/WMA file
extensions, write using only Korean
and English. (Languages other than
Korean and English are not supported
and are displayed as blank.)
4. Unauthorized use or duplication of
music files are prohibited by law.
5. Prolonged use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
that do not satisfy related standards
and/or specifications could result in
product malfunction.
6. Unauthorized use or duplication of
MP3/WMA files is prohibited by law.
Features of your vehicle
2484
MEDIA MODE
Switching to Media Mode
Pressing the key will change the
operating mode in order of
CD
➟
USB(iPod)
➟
AUX
➟
My Music
➟
BT
Audio.
If [Pop-up Mode] / [Mode Pop-up] is
turned on within [Display], then
pressing the key will display the
Media Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the focus.
Press the knob to select.
✽
NOTICE
• The media mode pop up screen can be
displayed only when there are two or
more media modes turned on.
Title Icon
When a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology,
iPod, USB, or AUX device is connected or a
CD is inserted, the corresponding mode
icon will be displayed.
Icon Title
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
CD
iPod
USB
AUX
MEDIA
MEDIA
4249
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random/ Scan, displays the
currently operating function
3. Track Info
Displays information about the current
track
4. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
5. Play Time
Displays the current play time
6. Info
Shows detailed information about the
current track
7. Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
9. List
Moves to the list screen
Features of your vehicle
2504
Using Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the mode
will automatically start and begin playing.
While playing, press the button to
pause and press button to play.
✽
NOTICE
• Only genuine audio CDs are support-
ed. Other discs may result in recogni-
tion failure (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with
labels)
• The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track infor-
mation is included within the audio
CD.
Changing Tracks
Press the key to move to the
previous or next track.
✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
track has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current track from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before the
track has been playing for 1 second
will start the previous track.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.
Once you find the desired track, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current track.
Scan(for RDS model)
Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds) to play the first 10 seconds of
each track.
Scan
Press the key to play the first 10
seconds of each file.
SCAN
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
4251
Features of your vehicle
Audio CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have access to
the Info, Random, Repeat and List fea-
tures.
Info
Press the button to display details
about the current disc.
Random
Press the button to play tracks in
random order.
Press the button again to turn the
Random feature off.
• Random : Plays all tracks in random
order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the cur-
rent track. Press the button again to turn
the repeat feature off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current track.
List
Press the button to display the
track list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search
for tracks. Once the desired track is dis-
played, press the knob to select and play.
Features of your vehicle
2524
MP3 CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random/Scan, displays the
currently operating function
3. File Index
Displays the current file number
4. File Info
Displays information about the current file
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time
7. Info
Shows detailed information about the
current file
8. Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
11. List
Moves to the list screen
4253
Features of your vehicle
Using MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the mode
will automatically start and being playing.
While playing, press the button to
pause and press button to play.
✽
NOTICE
• If there are numerous files and folders
within the disc, reading time could
take more than 10 seconds and the list
may not be displayed or song searches
may not operate. Once loading is com-
plete, try again.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to the
previous or next file.
✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds will
start the current file from the begin-
ning.
• Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 second will
start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search
for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press the
TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan(for RDS model)
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to play the first 10 seconds
of each file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first 10
seconds of each file.
Searching Folders
Press the key to select and
search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will
begin playing.
FOLDER
SCAN
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
2544
MP3 CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have access to
the Info, Random, Repeat, Copy and List
features.
Info
Press the button to display details
about the current file.
✽
NOTICE
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file infor-
mation.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
is set as the default display, the folder
name/file name are displayed as
detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are dis-
played only when such information are
recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.
Random
Press the button to play files in
random order.
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-
ture changes in order of Random Folder
➟ Random All➟ Off.
• Random Folder : Plays all files within
the current folder in Random order.
• Random All : Plays all files in Random
order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the cur-
rent file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-
ture changes in order of Repeat
➟Repeat
Folder
➟Off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files within
the current Folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the cur-
rent file into My Music.
✽
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during copy-
ing will display a pop-up asking whether
you wish to cancel copying. To cancel,
select “Yes”.
List
Press the button to display the file
list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file is
displayed, press the knob to select and
play.
4255
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE - USING THE USB
DEVICE
• Connect the USB device after turn-
ing on the engine. The USB device
may become damaged if it is
already connected when the igni-
tion is turned on.The USB device
may not operate properly if the car
ignition is turned on or off with the
USB device connected.
• Heed caution to static electricity when
connecting/disconnecting USB devices.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not be
recognized when connected as an
external device.
• When connecting an external USB
device, the device may not properly
recognize the USB is in some states.
• Only products formatted with
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be
recognized.
• This device recognizes USB devices
formatted in FAT 12/16/32 file for-
mats. This device does not recog-
nize files in NTFS file format.
• Some USB devices may not be sup-
ported due to compatibility issues.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Avoid contact between the USB
connector with bodily parts or for-
eign objects.
• Repeated connecting/disconnecting
of USB devices within short periods
of time may result in product mal-
function.
• A strange noise may occur when
disconnecting the USB.
• Make sure to connect/disconnect
external USB devices with the
audio power turned off.
• The amount of time required to rec-
ognize the USB device may differ
depending on the type, size or file
formats stored in the USB. Such
differences in time are not indica-
tions of malfunctions.
• The device only supports USB
devices used to play music files.
• USB images and videos are not sup-
ported.
• Do not use the USB I/F to charge
batteries or USB accessories that
generate heat. Such acts may lead
to worsened performance or dam-
age to the device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The device may not recognize the
USB device if separately purchased
USB hubs and extension cables are
being used. Connect the USB
directly with the multimedia termi-
nal of the vehicle.
• When using mass storage USB
devices with separate logical drives,
only files saved to the root drive can
be played.
• Files may not properly operate if
application programs are installed
to the USBs.
• The device may not operate nor-
mally if MP3 Players, cellular
phones, digital cameras, or other
electronic devices (USB devices not
recognized as portable disk drives)
are connected with the device.
• Charging through the USB may not
work for some mobile devices.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB mem-
ory type besides (Metal Cover
Type) USB Memory.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using formats such
as HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
2564
(Continued)
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by con-
necting an Adaptor (SD Type or CF
Type) may not be properly recog-
nized.
• The device may not operate proper-
ly when using USB HDDs or USBs
subject to connection failures
caused by vehicle vibrations. (e.g. i-
stick type)
• Avoid use of USB
memory products that
can also be used as key
chains or mobile phone
accessories.
Use of such products may cause
damage to the USB jack.
• Connecting an MP3 device or
phone through various channels,
such as AUX/BT or Audio/USB
mode may result in pop noises or
abnormal operation.
4257
Features of your vehicle
USB MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random/Scan, displays the
currently operating function
3. File Index
Displays the current file number
4. File Info
Displays information about the current file
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time
7. Info
Displays detailed information for the cur-
rent file
8. Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
11. List
Moves to the list screen
Features of your vehicle
2584
Using USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode will
automatically start and begin playing a
USB file.
While playing, press the button to
pause and press button to play.
✽
NOTICE
• Loading may require additional time
if there are many files and folders
within the USB and result in faulty list
display or file searching. Normal
operations will resume once loading is
complete.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memory
type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB
Memory.
Changing Files
Press the keys to move to the
previous or next file.
✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds will
start the current file from the begin-
ning.
• Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 second will
start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search
for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press the
TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan(for RDS model)
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to play the first 10 seconds
of each file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first 10
seconds of each file.
Searching Folders
Press the key to select and
search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will
begin playing.
FOLDER
SCAN
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
4259
Features of your vehicle
USB Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have access to
the Info, Random, Repeat, Copy and List
features.
Info
Press the button to display details
about the current file.
✽
NOTICE
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file infor-
mation.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
is set as the default display, the folder
name/file name are displayed as
detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are dis-
played only when such information are
recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.
Random
Press the button to play files in
random order.
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-
ture changes in order of Random
Folder
➟Random All➟Off.
• Random Folder : Plays the files in the
current folder in random order.
• Random All : Plays all files in random
order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the cur-
rent file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-
ture changes in order of Repeat
➟ Repeat
Folder
➟ Off.
• Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all files
within the current folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the cur-
rent file into My Music.
✽
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during copy-
ing will display a pop-up asking whether
you wish to cancel copying. To cancel,
select “Yes”.
List
Press the button to display the file
list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search
for files. Once the desired file is dis-
played, press the knob to select and play.
Features of your vehicle
2604
✽
NOTICE - USING THE
iPod
®
DEVICE
•iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
• In order to use the iPod while oper-
ating the keys, you must use a dedi-
cated iPod cable. (the cable that is
supplied when purchasing iPod/iPhone
products)
• If the iPod is connected to the vehi-
cle while it is playing, a high pitch
sound could occur for approximate-
ly 1-2 seconds immediately after
connecting. If possible, connect the
iPod to the vehicle with the iPod
stopped/paused.
• During ACC ON state, connecting
the iPod through the iPod cable will
charge the iPod through the car
audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod
cable, make sure to fully insert the
jack to prevent communication
interference.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the EQ features of an exter-
nal device, such as the iPod, and the
audio system are both active, EQ
effects could overlap and cause
sound deterioration and distortion.
Whenever possible, turn off the EQ
feature within the external device
upon use by connecting with the
audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod or
AUX device is connected. When such
devices are not being used, disconnect
the device for storage.
• When the iPod or AUX device power
is connected to the power jack, play-
ing the external device may result in
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
• Skipping or improper operation may
occur depending on the characteris-
tics of your iPod/Phone device.
• If your iPhone is connected to both
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and USB, the sound may not be
properly played. In your iPhone,
select the Dock connector or
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology to
change the sound output (source).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• iPod mode cannot be operated when
the iPod cannot be recognized due to
the playing of versions that do not
support communication protocols,
cases of iPod abnormalities and
defects.
• For fifth generation iPod Nano
devices, the iPod may not be recog-
nized when the battery level is low.
Please charge the iPod for use.
• Search/play orders shown within the
iPod device may differ with the
orders shown within the audio sys-
tem.
• If the iPod malfunctions due to an
iPod device defect, reset the iPod and
try again. (To learn more, refer to
your iPod manual)
• Some iPods may not sync with the
System depending on its version. If
the Media is removed before the
Media is recognized, then the system
may not properly restore the previ-
ously operated mode. (iPad charging
is not supported.)
4261
Features of your vehicle
iPod MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random, displays the cur-
rently operating function
3. Song Index
Displays the current song/total number of
songs
4. Song Info
Displays information about the current
song
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time
7. Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
9. List
Moves to the list screen
Features of your vehicle
2624
Using iPod Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod Songs
Once an iPod is connected, the mode will
automatically start and begin playing an
iPod song.
While playing, press the button to
pause and press button to play.
✽
NOTICE
• iPods with unsupported communica-
tion protocols may not properly oper-
ate in the audio system.
Changing Songs
Press the key to move to the
previous or next song.
✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
song has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current song from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before the
song has been playing for 1 second
will start the previous song.
• Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod product.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Songs
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current song.
Searching Categories
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search
for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category, press
the TUNE knob to select and play.
✽
NOTICE
There are eight categories that can be
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Audiobooks and Podcasts.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
4263
Features of your vehicle
Category Menu
Within the iPod Category menu, you will
have access to the , , and
features.
1. : Displays the play screen
2. : Moves to the iPod root category
screen
3. : Moves to the previous category
✽
NOTICE
• If the search mode is accessed while
playing a song, the most recently
searched category is displayed.
• Search steps upon initial connection
may differ depending on the type of
iPod device.
iPod Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have access to
the Random, Repeat and List features.
Random
Press the button to play songs in
random order.
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-
ture changes in order of Random
Album
➟Random All➟Off.
• Random Album : Shuffle Album plays
album in Random order.
• Random All : Plays all songs in
Random order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the cur-
rent song. Press the button again to turn
the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
Features of your vehicle
2644
List
Press the button to display the
Category Menu.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search
for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category, press
the TUNE knob to select and play.
AUX MODE
Using AUX Mode
Press the key Select [AUX]
An external device can be connected to
play music.
Connecting an External Device
External audio players (Camcorders, car
VCR, etc.) can be played through a ded-
icated cable.
✽
NOTICE
• If an external device connector is con-
nected with the AUX terminal, then
AUX mode will automatically operate.
Once the connector is disconnected,
the previous mode will be restored.
• AUX mode can be used only when an
external audio player (camcorder, car
VCR, etc.) has been connected.
• The AUX volume can be controlled
separately from other audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to AUX
mode, but only output noise. When an
external device is not being used, also
remove the connector jack.
• When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, playing
the external device may output noise.
In such cases, disconnect the power
connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX
jack upon use.
MEDIA
4265
Features of your vehicle
MY MUSIC MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random/Scan, displays the
currently operating function
3. File Index
Displays the current file/total number of
files
4. File Info
Displays information about the current
file
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time
7. Info
Displays detailed information for the cur-
rent file
8. Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
10. Delete
Deletes the current file
11. List
Moves to the list screen
Features of your vehicle
2664
Using My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
While playing, press the button to
pause and press button to play.
✽
NOTICE
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the [My Music] button will be
disabled.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to the
previous or next file.
✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds will
start the current file from the begin-
ning.
• Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 second will
start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search
for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press the
TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan(for RDS model)
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to play the first 10 seconds
of each file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first 10
seconds of each file.
SCAN
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
4267
Features of your vehicle
My Music Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have access to
the Info, Random, Repeat, Delete and
List features.
Info
Press the button to display details
about the current file.
✽
NOTICE
The title, artist and album info are dis-
played only when such information is
recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.
Random
Press the button to play files in
random order. Press the button again to
turn the Random feature off.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the cur-
rent song. Press the button again to turn
the repeat feature off.
Deleting Files
Press the button to delete the cur-
rent file.
List
Press the button to display the file
list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search
for files. Once the desired file is dis-
played, press the knob to select and play.
Features of your vehicle
2684
List Menu
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into My
Music.
Press the button or individually
select the files you want to delete. Once
files are selected, the button and
buttons will be enabled.
1) : Moves to the previous screen
2) : Selects all files
3) : Deselects all selected files
4) : Deletes selected files
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the button to delete
the selected files.
✽
NOTICE
• If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved.
• Identical files cannot be copied more
than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go to
[System] [Memory Information]
✽
NOTICE - USING THE
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
Mode can be used only when a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone has been
connected.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
Mode will not be available when con-
necting mobile phones that do not sup-
port this feature.
• While Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio is playing, if the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone is connected,
then the music will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while playing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio
mode may result in pop noises in some
mobile phones.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology stream-
ing audio may not be supported in some
mobile phones.
• When returning to Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio mode after ending a
call, the mode may not automatically
restart in some mobile phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or making an
outgoing call while playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio may result
in audio interference.
4269
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO MODE
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Audio
Once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected, the mode will auto-
matically start.
While playing, press the button to
pause and press button to play.
✽
NOTICE
The play/pause feature may operate dif-
ferently depending on the mobile phone.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to the
previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device
has not been connected, press the
key [Phone] button to display
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology con-
nection screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone, con-
nect/disconnect and delete features from
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone.
✽
NOTICE
• If the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio is not operating properly, check
whether the feature is turned off at
[Phone] [Audio stream-
ing] (Streaming Audio). If the feature
is off, turn back on and try again.
• If music is not yet playing from your
mobile device after converting to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play button
once may start playing the mode.
Check to see that music is playing from
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device after converting to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Mode.
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
2704
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology refers to
a short-distance wireless networking
technology which uses a 2.45GHz fre-
quency to connect various devices within
a certain distance.
• Supported within PCs, external devices,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phones,
PDAs, various electronic devices, and
automotive environments,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology allows data to be
transmitted at high speeds without having
to use a connector cable.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
refers to a device which allows the user to
conveniently make phone calls with
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile
phones through the audio system.
CAUTION
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is a feature that enables
drivers to practice safe driving.
Connecting the car audio system
with a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone allows the user to conve-
niently make calls, receive calls,
and manage the phone book.
Before using the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology , carefully read
the contents of this user’s manual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent
driving practices and be the
cause of accidents.
• Do not operate the device exces-
sively while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driv-
ing, view the screen only for short
periods of time.
4271
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE - USING UPON
CONNECTING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology PHONE
• Before connecting the car audio system
with the mobile phone, check to see that
the mobile phone supports Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology features.
• Even if the phone supports Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology, the phone will
not be found during device searches if
the phone has been set to hidden state
or the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power is turned off. Disable the hidden
state or turn on the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology power prior to
searching/connecting with the car
audio system.
• If you do not want to automatically
connect your Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone, try the following.
1. Turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your mobile
phone.
- For more information on Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology features within
your mobile, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
2. Turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your car
audio system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- To turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your car
audio system, go to
[Phone] and [turn off] the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature.
• Park the vehicle when connecting the
car audio system with your mobile
phone.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology con-
nection may become intermittently
disconnected in some mobile phones.
Follow these steps to try again.
1.Turn the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone off/on and try again.
2.Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3.Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4. Reboot the audio system and try
again.
5. Delete all paired devices, pair and
try again.
• The Handsfree call volume and quali-
ty may differ depending on the mobile
phone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures supported within the vehicle are
as follows. Some features may not be
supported depending on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technologydevice.
- Answering and placing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
calls
- Menu operation during call
(Switch to Private, Switch to call
waiting, Outgoing volume)
- Download Call History
- Download Mobile Phone book
- Phone book/Call History Auto
Download
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio
• It is possible to pair up to five Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices to the car
system.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device can be connected at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired while a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technologydevice
is already connected.
• When a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is being connected, the connec-
tion process cannot be canceled.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
2724
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of synchroniz-
ing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone or device with the car audio sys-
tem for connection. Pairing is necessary
to connect and use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature.
Pairing Key / Key on
the Steering Remote Controller
When No Devices have been Paired
1. Press the key or the key
on the steering remote controller. The
following screen is displayed.
2. Press the button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
(Continued)
•Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio related features will
operate within this system.
• Normal operation is possible only for
devices that support Handsfree or
audio features, such as a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone or
a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio device.
• Only one function can be used at a time
between the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio. (While playing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio,
streaming will end upon entering the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone
screen.)
• If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes discon-
nected for various reasons, such as
being out of range, turning the device
OFF, or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
communication error, Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices are automatically
searched and connected.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may result
in noise interference.
4273
Features of your vehicle
1) Device : Name of device as shown
when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
3. From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.
4. After a few moments, a screen is dis-
played where the passkey is entered.
Here, enter the passkey “0000” to pair
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device with the car audio system.
5. Once pairing is complete, the follow-
ing screen is displayed.
✽
NOTICE
•If Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are cur-
rently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering remote controller displays the
following screen. Press the [Pair] but-
ton to pair a new device or press the
[Connect] to connect a previously pair
device.
Pairing through [PHONE] Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone] Select
TUNE knob
1. The following steps are the same as
the steps described in the “When No
Devices have been Paired” section.
Features of your vehicle
2744
✽
NOTICE
• The waiting period during phone
pairing will last for one minute. The
pairing process will fail if the device is
not paired within the given time. If the
pairing process fails, you must start
the process from the beginning.
• Generally, most Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices will automatically
connect once pairing is complete.
However, some devices may require a
separate verification process to con-
nect. Check to see whether Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology has been properly
connected within your mobile phone.
• List of paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be viewed at
[Phone] [Paired Phone List].
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select [Phone]
Select [Paired Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is cur-
rently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is paired
but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and press the
button.
4275
Features of your vehicle
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices with the car
audio system. As a result, the “Change
Priority’ feature is used to set the con-
nection priority of paired phones.
However, the most recently connected
phone will always be set as the highest
priority.
Press the key Select [Phone]
Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
phone you want to change to the highest
priority, then press the button
from the Menu. The selected device will
be changed to the highest priority.
✽
NOTICE
When a device is currently connected,
even if you change the priority to a differ-
ent device, the currently connected phone
will always be set as the highest priority.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select [Phone]
Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and press the
button.
Features of your vehicle
2764
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select [Phone]
Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press the
button.
✽
NOTICE
• When deleting the currently connect-
ed device, the device will automatical-
ly be disconnected to proceed with the
deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is deleted, the device’s call his-
tory and phone book data will also be
deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.
USING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device connected, press the key
to display the Phone menu screen.
1) Dial Number : Displays the dial screen
where numbers can be dialed to make
calls
2) Call History : Displays the call history
list screen
3) Phone book : Displays the Phone
book list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related set-
tings
✽
NOTICE
• If you press the [Call History] button
but there is no call history data, a
prompt is displayed which asks
whether to download call history data.
• If you press the [Phone book] button
but there is no phone book data, a
prompt is displayed which asks
whether to download phone book
data. .
• This feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones. For more infor-
mation on download support, refer to
your mobile phone user’s manual.
4277
Features of your vehicle
Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the key Select [Dial
Number]
1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone num-
ber
2) Call : If a number has been entered,
calls the number If no number has
been entered, switches to call history
screen
3) End : Deletes the entered phone num-
ber
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers one
digit at a time
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connected
will display the following screen.
1) Caller : Displays the other part’s name
when the incoming caller is saved
within your phone book
2) Incoming Number : Displays the incom-
ing number
3) Accept : Accept the incoming call
4) Reject : Reject the incoming call
✽
NOTICE
• When the incoming call pop-up is dis-
played, most Audio and SETUP mode
features will not operate. Only the call
volume can be operated.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will auto-
matically convert to Private mode.
Features of your vehicle
2784
During a Handsfree Call
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is saved
within your phone book
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Call time : Displays the call time
4) End : Ends call
5) Private : Converts to Private mode
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as heard by
the other party
7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off
✽
NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party will
not be able to hear your voice.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and missed
calls is displayed.
Press the [Download] button to download
the call history.
1) Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download : Download Recent Call
History
✽
NOTICE
• The call history list will display up to
30 outgoing, incoming, and missed
calls.
• Upon downloading call histories, pre-
viously saved histories are deleted.
• Incoming calls with hidden caller IDs
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Previously saved phone book entries
are stored even if a device is discon-
nected and re-connected.
• The download feature may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones. Check
to see that the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device supports the down-
load feature.
4279
Features of your vehicle
Phone Book
Press the key Select [Phone
book]
The list of saved phone book entries is
displayed. Press the [Download] button
to download the call history.
1) Contact List :
- Displays downloaded phone book
entries
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download : Download phone book
entries
✽
NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be
copied into car phone book.
• Upon downloading phone book data,
previously saved phone book data will
be deleted.
• Downloading is not possible if the phone
book download feature is turned off
within the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device. Also, some devices may require
device authorization upon attempting to
download. If downloading cannot be
normally conducted, check the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device setting or
the screen state.
• Caller ID information will not be dis-
played for unsaved callers.
• The download feature may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones. Check
to see that the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device supports the down-
load feature.
Features of your vehicle
2804
✽
NOTICE - USING THE Voice
Recognition
• When using the voice recognition fea-
ture, only commands listed within the
user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation of
the voice recognition system, pressing
any key other than the key or
touching the screen will terminate
voice recognition mode.
• For superior voice recognition per-
formance, position the microphone
used for voice recognition above the
head of the driver’s seat and maintain
a proper position when saying com-
mands.
• Within the following situations, voice
recognition may not function properly
due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof are
open
- When the wind of the cooling / heat-
ing device is strong
- When entering and passing through
tunnels
- When driving on rugged and uneven
roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands can be
used only when a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a name,
the corresponding contact must be
downloaded and stored within the
audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book, it
takes some times to convert the phone
book data into voice information.
During this time, voice recognition
may not properly operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands natu-
rally and clearly as if in a normal con-
versation.
4281
Features of your vehicle
VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the steer-
ing remote controller .Say a command
If voice recognition is in [Normal Mode],
then the system will say “Please say a
command. Beep~”
• If voice recognition is in [Expert Mode],
then the system will only say a “Beep~”
• To change the Normal Mode/Expert
Mode setting, go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback].
✽
NOTICE
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stated
Shortly press the key on the steer-
ing remote controller (under 0.8 sec-
onds)
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice command.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the steer-
ing remote controller (under 0.8 sec-
onds)
The command wait state is immediately
ended and the beep ton will sound. After
the “beep”, say the voice command.
Features of your vehicle
2824
ENDING VOICE RECOGNITION
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the steer-
ing remote controller (over 0.8 seconds)
✽
NOTICE
• While using voice command, pressing
a steering wheel remote control or a
different key will end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting
for a voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting
for a voice command, press and hold
the key on the steering remote
controller to end voice command.
4283
Features of your vehicle
❈ Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
More Help
Phone book
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command
Please say a command
Please say a...
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Phone book.
Please say the name of the phone book you
want to call.
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Ding~
Ding~
Ding~
Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)
Ding~
Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds)
Features of your vehicle
2844
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in
phone book
Ex) Call “John”
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say “Call
History”, “
Phone book
”, “Dial Number” to exe-
cute corresponding functions.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Phone book
Displays the
phone book
screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a
phone book
saved in the
phone book
to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number what
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Radio
•
When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1
➟ FM2➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟
AMA)
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
Command Function
FM
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
FMA Displays the FMA screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
AMA Displays the AMA screen.
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
TA on Enable Traffic Announcement
TA off Disable Traffic Announcement
News on Enable RDS News feature
News off Disable RDS News feature
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These are commands that can be used in all situations. (However, some commands may not be support-
ed in special circumstances.)
4285
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
Play Track 1~30 If a music CD has been inserted, plays the
corresponding track.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
Search CD Moves to the CD track or file selection screen.
•
For audio CDs, move to the screen and say the
track number to play the corresponding track.
•
Moves to MP3 CD file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and
play music.
USB Plays USB music.
Search USB Moves to USB file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
iPod Plays iPod music.
Search iPod Moves to the iPod file selection screen. After,
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
Search My Music Moves to My Music file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
Command Function
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth Audio Plays the music saved in connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
Mute Mutes the radio or music volume.
Pardon? Repeats the most recent comment.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
Features of your vehicle
2864
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands that can be used while
listening to FM, AM radio.
• Audio CD commands: Commands that can be used while lis-
tening to Audio CD.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Auto Store Automatically selects radio broadcast fre-
quencies with superior reception and saves in
Presets 1~6.
Preset Save 1~6 Saves the current broadcast frequency to
Preset 1~6.
Seek up Plays the next receivable broadcast.
Seek down Plays the previous receivable broadcast.
Next Preset Selects the preset number next to the most
recently selected preset. (Example: When cur-
rently listening to preset no. 3, then preset no.
4 will be selected.)
Previous Preset Selects the preset number previous to the
most recently selected preset. (Example:
When currently listening to preset no. 3, then
preset no. 2 will be selected.)
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
AF on Enable Alternative Frequency feature
AF off Disable Alternative Frequency feature
Region Enable Region feature
Command Function
Region off Disable Region feature
Program Type Moves to the RDS Program type selection
screen. After, manually operate the device to
select a desired program type.
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Next Track Plays the next track.
Previous Track Plays the previous track.
Scan Scans the tracks from the next track for 10
seconds each.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Search Track Moves to the track selection screen. After, say
the track name to play the corresponding track.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
track.
4287
Features of your vehicle
• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands that can be used
while listening to music files saved in CD and USB.
• iPod Commands: Commands that can be used while playing
iPod.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
All Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Folder Repeat Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Search Folder Moves to the folder selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Copy Copies the current file into My Music.
Command Function
All Random Randomly plays all saved songs.
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Next Song Plays the next song.
Previous Song Plays the previous song.
Search Song Moves to the song selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
song.
Features of your vehicle
2884
• My Music Commands: Commands that can be used while
playing My Music.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands that can be used while playing Phone Music.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
Delete All Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will
bypass an additional confirmation process.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
4289
Features of your vehicle
SETUP
Starting Mode
Press the key to display the Setup
screen.
You can select and control options relat-
ed to [Display], [Sound], [Clock/Day],
[Phone] and [System].
Display Settings
Adjusting the Brightness
Press the key Select [Display]
Select [Brightness]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
screen brightness or set the Brightness
on Automatic, Day, or Night mode.
Press the button to reset.
1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically
2) Day : Always maintains the brightness
on high
3) Night : Always maintains the bright-
ness on low
Pop-up Mode
Press the key Select [Display]
Select [Pop-up Mode]
This feature is used to display the Pop-up
Mode screen when entering radio and
media modes.
When this feature is turned on, pressing
the or key will display
the Pop-up Mode screen.
✽
NOTICE
The media Pop-up Mode screen can be
displayed only when two or more media
modes have been connected.
MEDIA RADIO
Default
Features of your vehicle
2904
Scroll Text
Press the key Select [Display]
Select [Scroll text]
This feature is used to scroll text dis-
played on the screen when it is too long
to be displayed at once.
When turned on, the text is repeatedly
scrolled. When turned off, the text is
scrolled just once.
MP3 Information Display
Press the key Select [Display]
Select [Song Info]
This feature is used to change the infor-
mation displayed within USB and MP3
CD modes.
1) Folder File : Displays file name and
folder name
2) Album Artist Song : Displays album
name/artist name/song
4291
Features of your vehicle
Sound Settings
Sound Settings
Press the key Select [Sound]
Select [Audio Setting]
Use the , , , buttons to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the button to reset.
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
Press the key Select [Sound]
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]
The volume level is controlled automati-
cally according to the vehicle speed.
SDVC can be set by selecting from
On/Off.
Default
Features of your vehicle
2924
Voice Recognition Setting
Press the key Select [Sound]
Select [Volume Dialogue]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Volume Dialog.
Touch Screen Beep
Press the key Select [Sound]
Select [Touch Screen Beep]
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
Clock/Day Setting
Clock Setting
Press the key Select [Clock/
Day] Select [Clock Settings]
Use the , buttons to set the Hour,
Minutes and AM/PM setting.
✽
NOTICE
Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds) to display the Clock/Day
screen.
4293
Features of your vehicle
Calendar Setting
Press the key Select [Clock/
Day] Select [Day Settings]
Use the , buttons to set the Day,
Month and Year setting.
Time Format
Press the key Select [Clock/
Day] Select [Time Format]
This feature is used to change the clock
format between 12hr or 24hr.
Clock Display
Press the key Select [Clock/
Day] Select [Clock Display (Power off)]
This feature is used to display a clock on
the screen when the audio system is
turned off.
Automatic RDS Time
Press the key Select [Clock/
Day] Select [Automatic RDS Time]
This feature is used to set time automat-
ically by synchronizing with RDS.
Features of your vehicle
2944
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Setting
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select [Phone]
Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices
can be paired with the audio system.
For more information, refer to the “Pairing
through Phone Setup” section within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select [Phone]
Select [Paired Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with the
audio system. Upon selecting a paired
phone, the setup menu is displayed.
For more information, refer to the “Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Connection”
section within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
1) : Moves to the previous screen
2) Connect/Disconnect Phone : Connect/
disconnects currently selected phone
3) Delete : Deletes the currently selected
phone
4) Change Priority : Sets currently selected
phone to highest connection priority
✽
NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-
LOADING PHONE BOOKS
• Only phone books within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile phone
supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports phone book
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The Phone book for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded. Before
downloading, check to see whether
your phone supports the download
feature.
4295
Features of your vehicle
Downloading Phone books
Press the key Select [Phone]
Select [Phone book Download]
The Phone book is downloaded from the
mobile phone and the download progress is
displayed.
✽
NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be
copied into car phone book.
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be
saved for each paired device.
• Upon downloading phone book data,
previously saved phone book data will
be deleted. However, Phone book
entries saved to other paired phones
are not deleted.
Auto Download (Phone Book)
Press the key Select [Phone]
Select [Auto Download]
This feature is used to automatically
download mobile phone book entries
once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected.
✽
NOTICE
• The Auto Download feature will
download mobile phone book entries
every time the phone is connected.
The download time may differ
depending on the number of saved
phone book entries and the communi-
cation state.
• When downloading a phone book,
first check to see that your mobile
phone supports the phone book down-
load feature.
Audio Streaming
Press the key Select [Phone]
Select [Audio Streaming]
When Audio Streaming is turned on, you
can play music files saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device
from the car.
Features of your vehicle
2964
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select [Phone]
Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select [Phone]
Select [Bluetooth System Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology is
turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
related features will not be supported
within the audio system.
✽
NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
back on, go to [Phone] and
press “Yes”.
CAUTION
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio streaming may not be sup-
ported in some Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phones.
4297
Features of your vehicle
System Setting
Memory Information
Press the key Select [System]
Select [Memory Information]
This feature displays information related
to system memory.
1) Using : Displays capacity currently in
use
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity
Voice Recognition Mode Setting
(if equipped)
Press the key Select [System]
Select [Voice Recognition System]
This feature is used to select the desired
prompt feedback option from Normal and
Expert.
1)Normal : When using voice recognition,
provides detailed guidance prompts
2)Expert : When using voice recognition,
omits some guidance prompts
✽
NOTICE
Voice Recognition is depend on the
Audio System.
Language
Press the key Select [System]
Select [Language]
If the language is changed, the system
will restart and apply the selected lan-
guage.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
(if equipped)
• The system has been equipped with a
rear view camera for user safety by
allowing a wider rear range of vision.
• The rear view camera will automatical-
ly operate when the ignition key is
turned ON and the transmission lever is
set to R.
• The rear view camera will automatical-
ly stop operating when set to a different
lever.
CAUTION
The rear view camera has been
equipped with an optical lens to
provide a wider range of vision and
may appear different from the actu-
al distance. For safety, directly
check the rear and left/right sides.
4 298
Features of your vehicle
APPENDIX
Name Description
12hr 12 HOUR
24hr 24 HOUR
AST(A.Store) AUTO STORE
AMA AM RADIO (AUTO STORE)
FMA FM RADIO (AUTO STORE)
AUX External Audio mode
BASS BASS
TREBLE TREBLE
BT Bluetooth
PRESET PRESET
RDS Search Radio Data System Search
TA Traffic Announcement
Radio Radio
FM/AM/USB FM/AM/USB
Max MAXIMUM
Min minimum
Low Low
Mid Middle
On On
Off Off
PowerBass PowerBass
Setting Setting
OK OK
MENU MENU
PowerTreble PowerTreble
Name Description
SDVC Speed Dependent
VolumeControl
Setup Setup
Service Following Service Following
CURRENT CURRENT
Current/Total Current/Total
DEVICE NAME DEVICE NAME
NAME NAME
NAME HERE NAME HERE
NUMBER NUMBER
PHONE NAME PHONE NAME
Received Date Received Date
Received Received Message
Message
Received Time Received Time
TIME TIME
AST AUTO STORE
AM AM RADIO
CD COMPACT DISC
FM FM RADIO(AUTO STORE)
L=R LEFT=RIGHT
Middle Middle
My Music My Music
Track Track
USB USB
Features of your vehicle
2994
APPENDIX
Name Description
Phone Phone
Engineering Mode Engineering Mode
SEEK SEEK
Icon Icon
4 300
Features of your vehicle
5
Before driving / 5-3
Key positions / 5-5
Engine start/stop button / 5-9
Isg (Idle stop and go) system / 5-15
Manual transaxle / 5-21
Automatic transaxle / 5-24
Dual clutch transmission (DCT) / 5-31
Drive mode integrated control system / 5-40
Electronic control suspension (ECS) / 5-42
Brake system / 5-43
Cruise control system / 5-62
Speed limit control system / 5-67
Speed limit information function (SLIF) / 5-70
Lane keeping assist system (LKAS) / 5-75
Economical operation / 5-83
Special driving conditions / 5-85
Winter driving / 5-90
Trailer towing / 5-94
Vehicle weight / 5-104
Driving your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
25
WARNING
- ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust gases are potentially lethal. If at any time engine exhaust gas is detected within the passenger compartment,
move the vehicle to an open area and open all windows.
• Never inhale exhaust gas.
Exhaust gases contain Carbon Monoxide which is colourless and odourless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause
unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
• Exhaust System Maintenance.
Ensure that the exhaust system is maintained in good condition and is free from excessive corrosion and damage which may
result in leakage. If the vehicle is driven over an object which strikes the exhaust system, ensure that the exhaust system is
inspected at the first available opportunity to ensure that no leakage exists.
• Confined Areas.
Do not run the engine in confined spaces, allowing the engine to idle in a garage, even when the doors are open is dangerous
practice. Only start the engine immediately prior to moving the vehicle out of the garage.
• Prolonged Idling.
If it is necessary to allow the vehicle to idle for prolonged periods, ensure that the heating system air intake control is set to the
"Fresh" position, the blower is set to high speed operation and that the vehicle is standing in an open area.
• Load Carrying.
If it is necessary to carry long objects which do not permit the tailgate door to be fully closed, the side windows must remain
closed and the heating air intake control set to the "Fresh" position with the blower running at the highest speed setting.
To ensure correct operation of the heater system, the air intake grilles at the base of the windscreen must not be obstructed by
snow leaves etc.
53
Driving your vehicle
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tyres.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in
Section 7, “Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are famil-
iar with your vehicle and its equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
All passengers must be properly
belted whenever the vehicle is mov-
ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section
3 for more information on their
proper use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding areas
near your vehicle for people, espe-
cially children, before putting a vehi-
cle into “D (Drive)” or “R (Reverse)”.
WARNING
Driving whilst distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control, that
may lead to an accident, severe
personal injury, and death. The dri-
ver’s primary responsibility is in
the safe and legal operation of a
vehicle, and use of any handheld
devices, other equipment, or vehi-
cle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle
or which are not permissible by law
should never be used during oper-
ation of the vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
45
WARNING
- Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgement.
Driving whilst under the influence
of drugs is as dangerous or more
dangerous than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-
er who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
WARNING
• When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. It may overheat the engine
or exhaust system and cause fire.
• When you make a sudden stop or
turn the steering wheel rapidly,
loose objects may drop on the
floor and it could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Keep all things in the vehicle
safely stored.
• If you do not focus on driving, it
may cause an accident. Be care-
ful when operating what may dis-
turb driving such as audio or
heater. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always drive safely.
55
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated ignition switch
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will be illuminated for your
convenience, provided the ignition switch
is not in the ON position. The light will go
off immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30 sec-
onds when the door is closed.
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-
trical accessories are operative.
✽
NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position, turn
the key whilst turning the steering wheel
right and left to release the tension.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is the
normal running position after the engine
is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent battery
discharge.
START
Turn the ignition key to the START posi-
tion to start the engine. The engine will
crank until you release the key; then it
returns to the ON position. The brake
warning lamp can be checked in this
position.
KEY POSITIONS
OTF050001
■ Type B
OED046001
■ Type A
Driving your vehicle
65
Starting the engine
WARNING - Ignition key
• Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC whilst the vehicle is
moving. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock (if equipped) is not a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Before
leaving the driver’s seat, always
make sure the shift lever is
engaged in 1
st
gear for the manual
transaxle or P (Park) for the auto-
matic transaxle/dual clutch trans-
mission, set the parking brake
fully and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these pre-
cautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the ignition
switch, or any other controls
through the steering wheel whilst
the vehicle is in motion. The pres-
ence of your hand or arm in this
area could cause a loss of vehicle
control, an accident and serious
bodily injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING
• Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with
your ability to use the brake and
accelerator pedal, and clutch (if
equipped).
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed. The
vehicle can move and lead to an
accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is nor-
mal. The vehicle may suddenly
move if the brake padel is
released when the rpm is high.
(Continued)
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they
may move whilst driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an acci-
dent.
57
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE -
Kick down mecha-
nism
If your vehicle is equipped with a kick
down mechanism in the accelerator
pedal, it prevents you from driving at
full throttle unintentionally by making
the driver require increased effort to
depress the accelerator pedal. However,
if you depress the pedal more than
approximately 80%, the vehicle can be
at full throttle and the accelerator pedal
will be easier to depress. This is not a
malfunction but a normal condition.
Starting the petrol engine
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
whilst turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
3.Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then release
the key.
It should be started without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
4.Do not wait for the engine to warm up
whilst the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and decel-
erating should be avoided.)
CAUTION
If the engine stalls whilst you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position whilst the vehicle
is still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION
• Do not engage the starter for more
than 10 seconds. If the engine
stalls or fails to start, wait 5 to 10
seconds before re-engaging the
starter. Improper use of the starter
may damage it.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to
the START position with the
engine running. It may damage
the starter.
Driving your vehicle
85
Starting the diesel engine
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated
before starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle/Dual clutch trans-
mission - Depress the clutch pedal
fully and shift the transaxle into
Neutral. Keep the clutch pedal and
brake pedal depressed whilst turning
the ignition switch to the start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P(park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N(neutral) position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion to pre-heat the engine. Then the
glow indicator light will illuminate.
4. If the glow indicator light goes out, turn
the ignition switch to the START posi-
tion and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
✽
NOTICE
If the engine does not start within 10
seconds after the preheating is complet-
ed, turn the ignition key once more to
the LOCK position for 10 seconds, and
then to the ON position, in order to pre-
heat again.
Starting and stopping the engine for tur-
bocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the engine
immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrication is
ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving,
requiring a heavy engine load, run the
engine on idle condition about 1
minute before turning it off.
This idle time will allow the tur-
bocharger to cool prior to shutting the
engine off.
W-60
Glow indicator light
CAUTION
Do not turn off the engine immedi-
ately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or
turbo charger unit.
59
Driving your vehicle
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
Illuminated engine start/stop but-
ton
Whenever the front door is opened, the
engine start/stop button will illuminate for
your convenience. The light will go off
after about 30 seconds when the door is
closed. It will also go off immediately
when the theft-alarm system is armed.
Engine start/stop button position
OFF
With manual transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN posi-
tion) or vehicle power (ON position), stop
the vehicle then press the engine
start/stop button.
With automatic transaxle/
Dual clutch transmission
To turn off the engine (START/RUN posi-
tion) or vehicle power (ON position),
press the engine start/stop button with
the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
When you press the engine start/stop
button without the shift lever in the P
(Park) position, the engine start/stop but-
ton will not change to the OFF position
but to the ACC position.
Vehicles equipped with anti-theft steering
column lock
The steering wheel locks when the
engine start/stop button is in the OFF
position to protect you against theft.
It locks when the door is opened.
If the steering wheel is not locked prop-
erly when you open the driver's door, the
warning chime will sound. Try locking the
steering wheel again. If the problem is
not solved, we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
In addition, if the engine start/stop button
is in the OFF position after the driver's
door is opened, the steering wheel will
not lock and the warning chime will
sound. In such a situation, close the door.
Then the steering wheel will lock and the
warning chime will stop.
✽
NOTICE
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock
properly, the engine start/stop button
will not work. Press the engine
start/stop button whilst turning the
steering wheel right and left to release
the tension.
OVF051001R
White
Driving your vehicle
105
ACC(Accessory)
With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the OFF position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
With automatic transaxle/
Dual clutch transmission
Press the engine start/stop button whilst
it is in the OFF position without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
The steering wheel unlocks (if equipped
with anti-theft steering column lock) and
electrical accessories are operational.
If the engine start/stop button is in the
ACC position for more than 1 hour, the
button is turned off automatically to pre-
vent battery discharge.
ON
With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the ACC position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
With automatic transaxle/
Dual clutch transmission
Press the engine start/stop button whilst
it is in the ACC position without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not leave
the engine start/stop button in the ON
position for a long time. The battery may
discharge, because the engine is not
running.
Orange
Blue
CAUTION
You are able to turn off the engine
(START/RUN) or vehicle power (ON),
only when the vehicle is not in
motion. In an emergency situation
whilst the vehicle is in motion, you are
able to turn the engine off and to the
ACC position by pressing the engine
start/stop button for more than 2 sec-
onds or 3 times successively within 3
seconds. If the vehicle is still moving,
you can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by press-
ing the engine start/stop button with
the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-
tion.
511
Driving your vehicle
START/RUN
With manual transaxle
To start the engine, depress the clutch
pedal and brake pedal, then press the
engine start/stop button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position.
With automatic transaxle/
Dual clutch transmission
To start the engine, depress the brake
pedal and press the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the P (Park)
or the N (Neutral) position. For your safe-
ty, start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
✽
NOTICE
If you press the engine start/stop button
without depressing the clutch pedal for
manual transaxle vehicles or without
depressing the brake pedal for automat-
ic transaxle vehicles/dual clutch trans-
mission, the engine will not start and the
engine start/stop button changes as fol-
low:
OFF
➔
ACC
➔
ON
➔
OFF or ACC
✽
NOTICE
If you leave the engine start/stop button
in the ACC or ON position for a long
time, the battery will discharge.
WARNING
• Never press the engine start/stop
button whilst the vehicle is in
motion. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock (if equipped) is not a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Before
leaving the driver's seat, always
make sure the shift lever is
engaged in P (Park), set the park-
ing brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sud-
den vehicle movement may occur
if these precautions are not
taken.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never reach for the engine start/
stop button or any other controls
through the steering wheel whilst
the vehicle is in motion.The pres-
ence of your hand or arm in the
area could cause loss of vehicle
control, an accident and serious
bodily injury or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver's seat as they
may move whilst driving, inter-
fere with the driver and lead to an
accident.
Not illuminated
Driving your vehicle
125
Starting the engine
Starting the petrol engine
1.Carry the smart key or leave it inside
the vehicle.
2.Make sure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
3.Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
whilst starting the engine.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
4.Press the engine start/stop button.
It should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
5.Do not wait for the engine to warm up
whilst the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and decel-
erating should be avoided.)
Starting the diesel engine
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated
before starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
whilst pressing the engine start/stop
button to the START position.
Automatic Transaxle/Dual clutch
transmission - Place the transaxle
shift lever in P (Park). Depress the
brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
WARNING
• Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with
your ability to use the brake and
accelerator pedal.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed. The
vehicle can move and lead to an
accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is nor-
mal. The vehicle may suddenly
move if the brake padel is
released when the rpm is high.
513
Driving your vehicle
3. Press the engine start/stop button
whilst depressing the brake pedal.
4. Continue depressing the brake pedal
until the illuminated glow indicator
goes off. (approximately 5 seconds)
5. The engine starts running when the
glow indicator goes off.
✽
NOTICE
If the engine start/stop button is pressed
once more whilst the engine is pre-heat-
ing, the engine may start.
Starting and stopping the engine for tur-
bocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the engine
immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrication is
ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving,
requiring a heavy engine load, idle the
engine about 1 minute before turning it
off.
This idle time will allow the tur-
bocharger to cool prior to shutting the
engine off.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,
if it is far away from you, the engine
may not start.
• When the engine start/stop button is in
the ACC position or above, if any door
is opened, the system checks for the
smart key. If the smart key is not in the
vehicle, a message “Key not in vehicle”
will appear on the LCD display. And if
all doors are closed, the chime will
sound for 5 seconds. The indicator or
warning will turn off whilst the vehicle is
moving. Always have the smart key
with you.
WARNING
The engine will start, only when the
smart key is in the vehicle.
Never allow children or any person
who is unfamiliar with the vehicle
touch the engine start/stop button
or related parts.
CAUTION
Do not turn the engine off immedi-
ately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or tur-
bocharger unit.
W-60
Glow indicator light
Driving your vehicle
145
✽
NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart key
does not work correctly, you can start
the engine by pressing the engine
start/stop button with the smart key.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you
cannot start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If it
is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the engine
start/stop button for 10 seconds
whilst it is in the ACC position. The
engine can start without depressing
the brake pedal. But for your safety
always depress the brake pedal before
starting the engine.
CAUTION
• Do not press the engine
start/stop button for more than 10
seconds except when the stop
lamp fuse is blown.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to
the START position with the
engine running. It may damage
the starter.
OVF051003R
CAUTION
If the engine stalls whilst the vehi-
cle is in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position. If the traffic and road con-
ditions permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
whilst the vehicle is still moving
and press the engine start/stop but-
ton in an attempt to restart the
engine.
515
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ISG system, which reduces fuel con-
sumption by automatically shutting down
the engine, when the vehicle is at a
standstill. (For example : red light, stop
sign and traffic jam)
The engine starts automatically as soon
as the starting conditions are met.
The ISG system is ON whenever the
engine is running.
✽
NOTICE
When the engine automatically starts by
the ISG system, some warning lights
(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or Parking
brake warning light) may turn on for a
few seconds.
This happens because of low battery
voltage. It does not mean the system has
malfunctioned.
Auto stop
To stop the engine in idle stop mode
M/T type
1. Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than 5 km/h (3 mph).
2. Shift into N (Neutral) position.
3. Release the clutch pedal.
A/T or DCT type
1. Decrease the vehicle speed to 0 km/h.
2. Shift into D (Drive) / N (Neutral) posi-
tion.
3. Release the brake pedal.
The engine will stop and the green AUTO
STOP( ) indicator on the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
Also, a message "Auto Stop" will appear
on the LCD display.
✽
NOTICE
You must reach a speed of at least 10
km/h (6 mph) since last idle stop.
ISG (IDLE STOP AND GO) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF051030/OVF051068
OVF055134L
■ Type A ■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
165
✽
NOTICE
If you unfasten the seatbelt or open the
driver's door (or engine bonnet) in auto
stop mode, the following will happen:
• The ISG system will deactivate (the
light on the ISG OFF button will illu-
minate).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• A message "Auto Start Deactivated.
Start Manually" will appear on the
LCD display.
Auto start
To restart the engine from idle stop
mode
OVF051031R
OVF055135L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF055120L
■ M/T Type
• Type A • Type B
OVF045397L
■ A/T or DCT type
• Type A • Type B
517
Driving your vehicle
M/T type
• Press the clutch pedal when the shift
lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
• A message "Press Clutch Pedal for
Auto Start" will appear on the LCD dis-
play.
• The engine will start and the green
AUTO STOP ( ) indicator on the
instrument cluster will go out.
A/T or DCT type
• Release the brake pedal.
• When AVH (auto vehicle hold) is oper-
ating, if you release the brake pedal,
the engine keeps the stop state. But if
you press the accelerator pedal, the
engine will start again.
The engine will also restart automati-
cally without the driver’s any actions
if the following occurs:
- The fan speed of manual climate con-
trol system is set above the 3rd position
when the air conditioning is on.
- The fan speed of automatic climate
control system is set above the 6th
position when the air conditioning is on.
- When a certain amount of time has
passed with the climate control system
on.
- When the defroster is on.
- The brake vaccum pressure is low.
- The battery charging status is low.
- The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5
km/h). - M/T
- The vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2
km/h). - A/T or DCT type
- You shift the gear to P (park) position or
you press the EPB switch in the AVH
(auto vehicle hold) state - A/T or DCT
type
- The door is open while the seat belt is
released in the AVH (auto vehicle hold)
state. - A/T or DCT type
The green AUTO STOP ( ) indicator
on the instrument cluster will blink for 5
seconds and a message “Auto Start” will
appear on the LCD display.
OVF055121L
■ Type A ■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
185
Condition of ISG system opera-
tion
The ISG system will operate under
the following condition:
- The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
- The driver’s door and engine bonnet
are closed.
- The brake vaccum pressure is ade-
quate.
- The battery is sufficiently charged.
- The outside temperature is between
-2°C to 35°C (28.4°F to 95°F).
- The engine coolant temperature is not
too low.
- The slope way is gentle.
(A/T or DCT type)
✽
NOTICE
• If the ISG system does not meet the
operation condition, the ISG system is
deactivated. The light on the ISG OFF
button will illuminate and a message
“Auto Stop Conditions not met” will
appear on the LCD display.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the light or notice comes on contin-
uously, please check the operation
condition.
OVF051031R/OVF055122L
■ Type A ■ Type B
519
Driving your vehicle
ISG system deactivation
• If you wish to deactivate the ISG sys-
tem, press the ISG OFF button. The
light on the ISG OFF button will illumi-
nate and a message “Auto Stop System
Off” will appear on the LCD display.
• If you press the ISG OFF button again,
the system will be activated and the
light on the ISG OFF button will turn off.
ISG system malfunction
The system may not operate when:
The ISG related sensors or system error
occurs.
The following will happen:
• The yellow AUTO STOP ( ) indica-
tor on the instrument cluster will stay
on after blinking for 5 seconds.
• The light on the ISG OFF button will
illuminate.
• A message "Enable Battery Sensor"
will appear on the LCD display.
OVF051031R/OVF055124L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF051031R/OVF055123L
■ Type A ■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
205
✽
NOTICE
• If the ISG OFF button light is not
turned off by pressing the ISG OFF
button again or if the ISG system con-
tinuously does not work correctly, we
recommend that you contact an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer as
soon as possible.
• When the ISG OFF button light comes
on, it may stop illuminating after driv-
ing your vehicle at approximately 80
km/h for a maximum of two hours
and setting the fan speed control
below the 2nd position. If the ISG
OFF button light continues to illumi-
nate in spite of the procedure, we rec-
ommend that you contact an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
When the engine is in Idle Stop
mode, it's possible to restart the
engine without the driver taking
any action.
Before leaving the car or doing any-
thing in the engine room area, stop
the engine by turning the ignition
switch to the LOCK/OFF position or
removing the ignition key.
CAUTION
The ISG may not operate in the fol-
lowing situations.
- When a component of the ISG
system is broken
- When the battery cannot be fully
charged
(ex: Using a after market supply
such as a black box)
- When the brake pressure is low
We recommend that you visit a
HYUNDAI dealer and have your
vehicle checked.
521
Driving your vehicle
Manual transaxle operation
• The manual transaxle has 6 forward
gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on the
shift knob. The transaxle is fully syn-
chronized in all forward gears so shift-
ing to either a higher or a lower gear is
easily accomplished.
• Depress the clutch pedal down fully
whilst shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an igni-
tion lock switch, the engine will not
start when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal.
• The shift lever must return to the neu-
tral position before shifting into R
(Reverse). The button located immedi-
ately below the shift knob must be
pushed upward whilst moving the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) position.
•
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R
(Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF051004
The button (1) must be pushed whilst
moving the shift lever.
The shift lever can be moved without
pushing the button (1).
CAUTION
• When downshifting from 5 (Fifth)
gear to 4 (Fourth) gear, caution
should be taken not to inadver-
tently move the shift lever side-
ways in such a manner that sec-
ond gear is engaged. Such a dras-
tic downshift may cause the
engine speed to increase to the
point that the tachometer will
enter the red-zone. Such over-
revving of the engine may possi-
bly cause engine and transaxle
damage.
• Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear when
the engine is running at high
speed (5,000 RPM or higher).
Such a downshifting may damage
the engine, clutch and the
transaxle.
N
Driving your vehicle
225
• During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant has
warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1 (First) or R
(Reverse), put the shift lever in neutral
position and release the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down, and then
shift into 1 (First) or R (Reverse) gear
position.
Using the clutch
The clutch pedal should be depressed all
the way to the floor before shifting, then
released slowly. The clutch pedal should
always be fully released whilst driving.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
whilst driving. This can cause unneces-
sary wear. Do not partially engage the
clutch to hold the vehicle on an incline.
This causes unnecessary wear. Use the
foot brake or parking brake to hold the
vehicle on an incline. Do not operate the
clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
CAUTION
• To avoid premature clutch wear
and damage, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch
pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch
to hold the vehicle stopped on an
uphill grade, whilst waiting for a
traffic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as this
can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
• To prevent possible damage to
the clutch system, do not start
with the 2nd (second) gear
engaged except when you start
on a slippery road.
WARNING
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then
make sure the transaxle is shifted
into 1 (First) gear when the vehi-
cle is parked on a level or uphill
grade, and shifted into R
(Reverse) on a downhill grade.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement can occur if these pre-
cautions are not followed in the
order identified.
• If your vehicle has a manual
transaxle not equipped with a
ignition lock switch, it may move
and cause a serious accident
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal
whilst the parking brake is
released and the shift lever not in
the neutral position.
• Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slippery
roads. The vehicle may slip caus-
ing an accident.
CAUTION
When operating the clutch pedal,
depress the clutch pedal down fully.
If you don’t depress the clutch
pedal fully, the clutch may be dam-
aged or noise may occur.
523
Driving your vehicle
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traf-
fic or whilst driving up steep hills, down-
shift before the engine starts to labour.
Downshifting reduces the chance of
stalling and gives better acceleration
when you again need to increase your
speed. When the vehicle is travelling
down steep hills, downshifting helps
maintain safe speed and prolongs brake
life.
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This is extremely
hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in
gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction.
Instead, when you are driving down a
long hill, slow down and shift to a lower
gear. When you do this, engine braking
will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. This will help avoid over-revving
the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross
winds. This gives you much better con-
trol of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
R (Reverse). The transaxle can be
damaged if you do not. To shift into R
(Reverse), depress the clutch, move
the shift lever to neutral, wait three sec-
onds, then shift to the R (Reverse)
position.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
Driving your vehicle
245
Automatic transaxle operation
The highly efficient automatic transaxle
has 6 forward speeds and one reverse
speed. The individual speeds are select-
ed automatically, depending on the posi-
tion of the shift lever.
✽
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if
the battery has been disconnected, may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the TCM (Transaxle Control
Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control
Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF051005R
+
+
(
(
U
U
P
P
)
)
-
-
(
(
D
D
O
O
W
W
N
N
)
)
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the lock release button when shifting.
Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal.
However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle.)
525
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator lights in the instrument
cluster displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transaxle and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
shifting a vehicle into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order iden-
tified.
• Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slippery
roads. The vehicle may slip caus-
ing an accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.
• When stopped on an upgrade, do
not hold the vehicle stationary
with engine power. Use the serv-
ice brake or the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) whilst the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
and set the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged if
you shift into P (Park) whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
Driving your vehicle
265
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving posi-
tion. The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator pedal fully (more than 80%)
until the kick down mechanism works
with a clicking noise, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
✽
NOTICE
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive).
• A clicking noise heard from the kick
down mechanism by depressing the
accelerator pedal fully is a normal
condition.
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by push-
ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-
tion into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a
manual transaxle, the sports mode
allows gearshifts with the accelerator
pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) whilst the vehicle is in
motion, except as explained in
“Rocking the vehicle”, in this manu-
al.
OVF051069R
Sports
mode
+
+
(
(
U
U
P
P
)
)
-
-
(
(
D
D
O
O
W
W
N
N
)
)
WARNING
Do not drive with the shift lever in N
(Neutral).
The engine brake will not work and
lead to an accident.
527
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
• In sports mode, the driver must exe-
cute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position
as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety, the
system may not execute certain
gearshifts when the shift lever is oper-
ated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving on
a slippery road. Push the shift lever to
the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st
gear.
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when the
shift lever is in the D (Drive) position or
the sports mode.
With the shift lever in the D position
The paddle shifter will operate when the
vehicle speed is more than 6 mph (10
km/h).
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear and the system
changes from automatic mode to manual
mode.
When the vehicle speed is lower than
10km/h, if you depress the accelerator
pedal for more than 5 seconds or if you
shift the shift lever from D (Drive) to
sports mode and shift it from sports
mode to D (Drive) again, the system
changes from manual mode to automatic
mode.
With the shift lever in the sports mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear.
✽
NOTICE
If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle shifters
at the same time, you cannot shift the
gear.
OVF051007R
Driving your vehicle
285
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the automatic transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless the
brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
Type A
1. Press the shift-lock release button.
2. Move the shift lever.
3. We recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
Type B
1. Carefully remove the cap covering the
shift-lock override access hole.
2. Insert a screwdriver into the access
hole and press down on the screwdriv-
er.
3. Move the shift lever.
4. We recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and whilst shifting out
of the P (Park) position into anoth-
er position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the
vehicle.
OVF051006R
529
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-
tion with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P (Park)
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
vehicle in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc-
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear. When you do this, engine
braking will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in P
(Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelera-
tor pedal.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
Driving your vehicle
305
Moving up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start
To move up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually whilst releasing the
service brakes.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
531
Driving your vehicle
Dual clutch transmission opera-
tion
The dual clutch transmission has seven
forward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected auto-
matically in the D (Drive) position.
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF051005R
+
+
(
(
U
U
P
P
)
)
-
-
(
(
D
D
O
O
W
W
N
N
)
)
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the lock release button when shifting.
Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal.
However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle.)
Driving your vehicle
325
• The Dual Clutch Transmission gives
the driving feel of a manual transmis-
sion, yet provides the ease of a fully
automatic transmission. Unlike a tradi-
tional automatic transmission, the gear
shifting can be felt (and heard) on the
dual clutch transmission
- Think of it as an automatically shifting
manual transmission.
- Shift into Drive range and get fully
automatic shifting, similar to a con-
ventional automatic transmission.
• Dual clutch transmission adopts dry-
type dual clutch, which is different from
torque converter of automatic trans-
mission, and shows better acceleration
performance during driving. But, initial
launch might be little bit slower than
Automatic Transmission.
• The dry-type clutch transfers torque
and provides a direct driving feeling
which may feel different from a con-
ventional automatic transmission with
a torque converter. This may be more
noticeable when starting from a stop or
low vehicle speed.
• When rapidly accelerating at low vehi-
cle speed, engine could rev at high
rpm depending on vehicle drive condi-
tion.
• For smooth launch uphill, press down
the accelerator pedal smoothly
depending on the current conditions.
• If you release your foot from the accel-
erator pedal at low vehicle speed, you
may feel strong engine brake, which is
similar to manual transmission.
• When driving downhill, you may use
Sports Mode and press the paddle
shifters to downshift to a lower gear in
order to control your speed without
using the brake pedal excessively.
• When you turn the engine on and off,
you may hear clicking sounds as the
system goes through a self test. This is
a normal sound for the Dual Clutch
Transmission.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury
or death:
• ALWAYS check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
shifting a vehicle into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position, then
set the parking brake, and place
the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed.
• Do not use engine braking (shift-
ing from a high gear to lower
gear) rapidly on slippery roads.
The vehicle may slip causing an
accident.
533
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
• To hold the vehicle on a hill use
the foot brake or the parking
brake. If the vehicle is held by
applying the accelerator pedal on
a hill the clutch and transmission
will be overheated resulting in
damage.
At this time, a warning message
will appear on the LCD display
and you may feel a vibration.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the clutch becomes overheated
by excessive use of the clutch to
hold on a hill, you may notice a
shudder feeling and a blinking
display on the instrument cluster.
When this occurs, the clutch is
disabled until the clutch cools to
normal temperatures. If this
occurs, pull over to a safe loca-
tion, shift into P (Park) and apply
the foot brake for a few minutes.
• If the LCD warning is active, the
foot brake must be applied.
• Ignoring the warnings can lead to
damage to the transmission.
• If the display continues to blink,
for your safety, we recommend
that you contact a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Under certain conditions such as
repeated launch on steep grades,
the clutch in the transmission
could overheat. When the clutch
is overheated, the safe protection
mode engages. If the safe protec-
tion mode engages, the gear posi-
tion indicator on the cluster
blinks with a chime sound.
(Continued)
OVF055125L
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A ■ Type B■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF055127L
OVF055126L
Driving your vehicle
345
The indicator in the instrument cluster
displays the shift lever position when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must depress
firmly on the brake pedal and make sure
your foot is off the accelerator pedal.
The shift lever must be in P (Park) before
turning the engine off.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
(Continued)
At this time, a warning message
will appear on the LCD display
and driving may not be smooth.
If you ignore this warning, the
driving condition may become
worse. To return the normal driv-
ing condition, stop the vehicle
and apply the foot brake for a few
minutes before driving off.
• Gear shifts may be more notice-
able than a conventional automat-
ic transmission. This is a normal
characteristic of this type of dual
clutch transmission.
• During the first 1,500 km (1,000
miles), you may feel that the vehi-
cle may not be smooth when
accelerating at low speed. During
this break-in period, the shift
quality and performance of your
new vehicle is continuously opti-
mized.
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive) or R
(Reverse).
• Do not put the shift lever in N
(Neutral) whilst driving.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) whilst the
vehicle is in motion may cause
you to lose control of the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift lever
is in P (Park), apply the parking
brake, and turn the engine off.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) whilst the vehicle is in
motion.
535
Driving your vehicle
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart a
stalled engine, or if it is necessary to stop
with the engine ON. Shift into P (Park) if
you need to leave your vehicle for any
reason.
Always depress the brake pedal when
you are shifting from N (Neutral) to
another gear.
D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position. The
transmission will automatically shift
through a seven-gear sequence, provid-
ing the best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or driving uphill depress the
accelerator pedal further until you feel
the transmission downshift to a lower
gear.
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by push-
ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-
tion into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In Sports Mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
select the desired range of gears for the
current driving conditions.
+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
WARNING
Do not shift into gear unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Shifting into gear when the engine
is running at high speed can cause
the vehicle to move very rapidly.
You could lose control of the vehi-
cle and hit people or objects.
WARNING
Do not drive with the shift lever in N
(Neutral).
The engine brake will not work and
lead to an accident.
OVF051069R
Sports mode
+
+
(
(
U
U
P
P
)
)
-
-
(
(
D
D
O
O
W
W
N
N
)
)
Driving your vehicle
365
✽
NOTICE
• Only the seven forward gears can be
selected. To reverse or park the vehi-
cle, move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• Downshifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When
the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automati-
cally selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches the
red zone the transmission will upshift
automatically.
• If the driver presses the lever to + (Up)
or - (Down) position, the transmission
may not make the requested gear
change if the next gear is outside of
the allowable engine rpm range. The
driver must execute upshifts in accor-
dance with road conditions, taking
care to keep the engine rpms below
the red zone.
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when the
shift lever is in the D (Drive) position or
the sports mode.
With the shift lever in the D position
The paddle shifter will operate when the
vehicle speed is more than 10km/h.
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear and the system
changes from automatic mode to manual
mode.
When the vehicle speed is lower than
10km/h, if you depress the accelerator
pedal for more than 5 seconds or if you
shift the shift lever from D (Drive) to
sports mode and shift it from sports
mode to D (Drive) again, the system
changes from manual mode to automatic
mode.
With the shift lever in the sports mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear.
✽
NOTICE
If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle shifters
at the same time, you cannot shift the
gear.
OVF051007R
537
Driving your vehicle
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the Dual clutch transmis-
sion has a shift lock system which pre-
vents shifting the transaxle from P (Park)
or N (Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless
the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
Type A
1. Press the shift-lock release button.
2. Move the shift lever.
3. We recommend that the system be
inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Type B
1. Carefully remove the cap covering the
shift-lock override access hole.
2. Insert a screwdriver into the access
hole and press down on the screwdriv-
er.
3. Move the shift lever.
4. We recommend that the system be
inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and whilst shifting out
of the P (Park) position into anoth-
er position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the car.
OVF051006R
Driving your vehicle
385
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-
tion with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P (Park)
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the car is completely stopped
before you attempt to shift into R
(Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
car in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc-
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear. When you do this, engine
braking will help slow the car.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in P
(Park) to keep the car from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelera-
tor pedal.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
539
Driving your vehicle
Moving up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start
To move up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually whilst releasing the
service brakes.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
Driving your vehicle
405
DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
DRIVE mode
The drive mode may be selected accord-
ing to the driver's preference or road con-
dition.
The system initializes to the normal
mode after the engine start/stop button
has been turned off and on.
When the Active ECO is activated, and
the engine start/stop button is turned off
and on it will change to ECO mode.
It is displayed on the AVN monitor which
mode the vehicle is in as below.
• NORMAL
• ECO
• SPORT
The mode changes whenever the DRIVE
MODE button is pressed.
❈ When normal mode is selected, it is
not displayed on the cluster.
ECO mode (Active ECO)
Active ECO helps improve
fuel efficiency by controlling
certain engine and transaxle
system operating parame-
ters. Fuel efficiency depends
on the driver's driving habit
and road condition.
• When the DRIVE MODE
button is pressed and the
ECO mode is selected, the
ECO indicator (green) will
illuminate to show that the
Active ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is
activated, and the engine
start/stop button is turned
off and on it will change to
ECO mode.
OVF043365R
OVF043366R
■ Type A
■ Type B
ECO
• M/T Type
SPORT NORMAL
• A/T or DCT Type
NORMAL
SPORT ECO
541
Driving your vehicle
When Active ECO is activated:
• The acceleration may slightly be
reduced eventhough you depress the
accelerator fully.
• The air conditioner performance may
be limited
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transaxle may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal condi-
tions when the active eco system is acti-
vated to improve fuel efficiency.
Limitation of Active ECO operation:
If the following conditions occur whilst
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though there is
no change in the ECO indicator.
• When the coolant temperature is low:
The system will be limited until engine
performance becomes normal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because the
engine torque is restricted.
• When using manual mode:
The system will be limited according to
the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is deeply
depressed for a few seconds:
The system will be limited, judging that
the driver wants to speed up.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode focuses on
dynamic driving by automati-
cally adjusting the steering
wheel, engine and transaxle
system.
• When the DRIVE MODE
button is pressed and the
SPORT mode is selected,
the SPORT indicator (yel-
low) will illuminate.
• When the SPORT mode is
activated, and the engine
start/stop button is turned
off and on it will change to
NORMAL mode. To turn on
the SPORT mode press
DRIVE MODE button
again.
• If the system is activated:
- After speeding, it maintains
the gear and RPM for some
time even though the accel-
erator pedal is not
depressed.
- Up-shifting is delayed.
✽
NOTICE
In Sport drive mode, the fuel efficiency
may decrease.
SPORT
Driving your vehicle
425
The Electronic Control Suspension
(ECS) controls the vehicle suspension
automatically to maximize driving com-
fort by taking into account the driving
conditions such as speed, surface of the
road, cornering, stopping requirements
and acceleration.
You can also control the vehicle suspen-
sion manually as the SPORT mode or
NORMAL mode.
Push the DRIVE MODE button to select
the SPORT mode or NORMAL mode.
Refer to the "Drive mode integrated con-
trol system" in this section.
SPORT mode provides a tighter suspen-
sion and firmer ride.
NORMAL mode provides a softer ride.
The mode changes whenever the DRIVE
MODE button is pressed.
When the DRIVE mode changes, the
ECS mode changes simultaneously.
(Vehicles equipped with ECS)
ECS (Electronic Control
Suspension) malfunction indicator
If the ECS warning message comes on,
you may have a problem with the ECS
system. We recommend that the system
be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF045411
NORMAL
(ECS : NORMAL mode)
SPORT
(ECS : SPORT mode)
ECO
(ECS : NORMAL mode)
543
Driving your vehicle
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you nor-
mally would. The stopping distance, how-
ever, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when neces-
sary to maintain steering control on slip-
pery surfaces.
BRAKE SYSTEM
(Continued)
• Always, confirm the position of
the brake and accelerator pedal
before driving. If you don't check
the position of the accelerator
and brake pedal before driving,
you may depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It may
cause a serious accident.
WARNING -
Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake tem-
peratures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and
avoid continuous application of
the brakes. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking per-
formance.
• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-
cle’s ability to sefely slow down;
the vehicle may also pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been
affected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them lightly
whilst maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
445
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate whilst the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a high-
pitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this
sound come and go or it may occur
whenever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving con-
ditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking
performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
• Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake whilst
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
545
Driving your vehicle
Electric parking brake (EPB)
Applying the parking brake
To apply the EPB (electric parking
brake):
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Pull up the EPB switch.
Make sure the warning light comes on.
Also, the EPB is applied automatically if
the Auto Hold button is on when the
engine is turned off. However, if you
keep pressing the EPB switch till the
engine is turned off, the EPB will not be
applied.
✽
NOTICE
On a steep incline or when pulling a
trailer if the vehicle does not stand still,
do as follows:
1. Apply the EPB.
2. Pull up the EPB switch for more than
3 seconds.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the EPB (electric parking
brake), press the EPB switch in the fol-
lowing condition:
• Have the ignition switch or engine
start/stop button in the ON position.
• Depress the brake pedal.
Make sure the brake warning light goes
off.
OVF053041R
CAUTION
Do not operate the parking brake
whilst the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation. It could
damage the vehicle system and
endanger driving safety.
OVF051042R
Driving your vehicle
465
To release EPB (electric parking brake)
automatically:
• Shift lever in P (Park)
With the engine running depress the
brake pedal and shift out of P (Park) to
R (Rear) or D (Drive).
• Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress the
brake pedal and shift out of N (Neutral)
to R (Rear) or D (Drive).
• Manual transaxle vehicle
1. Start the engine.
2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
3. Close the driver's door, engine bon-
net and tailgate/trunk.
4. Depress the clutch pedal with the
gear engaged.
5. Depress the accelerator pedal whilst
releasing the clutch pedal.
• Automatic transaxle vehicle
1. Start the engine.
2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
3. Close the driver's door, engine bon-
net and tailgate/trunk.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal whilst
the shift lever is in R (Rear), D
(Drive) or Sports mode.
Make sure the brake warning light goes
off.
✽
NOTICE
• For your safety, you can engage the
EPB even though the ignition switch or
engine stop/start button is in the OFF
position, but you cannot release it.
• For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking brake
manually with the EPB switch when
you drive downhill or when backing up
the vehicle.
✽
NOTICE - Manual transaxle
A vehicle towing a trailer on a hill or on
an incline may slightly roll backwards
when starting the vehicle. To prevent the
situation follow the below instructions.
1. Depress the clutch pedal and select a
gear.
2. Keep pulling up the EPB switch.
3. Depress the accelerator pedal and
slowly release the clutch pedal.
4. If the vehicle starts off with enough
driving power release the EPB switch.
Do not follow the above procedure when
driving on a flat level ground. The vehi-
cle may suddenly move forward.
CAUTION
• If the parking brake warning light
is still on even though the EPB
has been released, we recom-
mend that the system be checked
by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
• Do not drive your vehicle with the
EPB applied. It may cause exces-
sive brake pad and brake rotor
wear.
547
Driving your vehicle
EPB (electric parking brake) may be
automatically applied when:
• The EPB is overheated
• Requested by other systems
✽
NOTICE
If the driver turns the engine off by mis-
take whilst Auto Hold is operating, EPB
will be automatically applied. (Vehicle’s
equipped with Auto Hold)
• If you try to drive off depressing the
accelerator pedal with the EPB applied,
but doesn't release automatically, a
warning will sound and a message will
appear.
• If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
and the engine bonnet or tailgate/trunk
is opened, a warning will sound and a
message will appear.
• If there is a problem with the vehicle, a
warning may sound and a message
may appear.
If the above situation occurs, depress the
brake pedal and release EPB by pressing
the EPB switch.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the shift
lever in place of the parking
brake. Set the parking brake and
make sure the shift lever is
securely positioned in P (Park).
• Never allow anyone who is unfa-
miliar with the vehicle to touch
the parking brake. If the parking
brake is released unintentionally,
serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the car which
can injure occupants or pedestri-
ans.
OVF055128L
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
485
When the conversion from Auto Hold to
EPB is not working properly a warning
will sound and a message will appear.
If the EPB is applied whilst Auto Hold is
activated because of ESC(Electronic
Stability Control) signal, a warning will
sound and a message will appear.
CAUTION
Depress the brake pedal when the
above message appears for the Auto
Hold and EPB may not activate.
CAUTION
• A click sound may be heard
whilst operating or releasing the
EPB, but these conditions are
normal and indicate that the EPB
is functioning properly.
• When leaving your keys with a
parking lot attendant or valet,
make sure to inform him/her how
to operate the EPB.
• The EPB may malfunction if you
drive with the EPB applied.
• When you automatically release
EPB by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal, depress it slowly.
OVF055129L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVF055130L
■ Type A
■ Type B
549
Driving your vehicle
EPB malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates if the
engine start/stop button is changed to
the ON position and goes off in approxi-
mately 3 seconds if the system is opera-
tion normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator remains
on, comes on whilst driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch or the
engine start/stop button is changed to
the ON position, this indicates that the
EPB may have malfunctioned.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
The EPB malfunction indicator may illu-
minate when the ESC indicator comes
on to indicate that the ESC is not working
properly, but it does not indicate a mal-
function of the EPB.
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake pedal
whilst driving, emergency braking is pos-
sible by pulling up and holding the EPB
switch. Braking is possible only whilst you
are holding the EPB switch.
✽
NOTICE
During emergency braking by the EPB,
the parking brake warning light will
illuminate to indicate that the system is
operating.
WARNING
Do not operate the parking brake
whilst the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation.
OVF051047/OVF051067
■ Type A
■ Type B
CAUTION
• The EPB warning light may illumi-
nate if the EPB switch operates
abnormally. Shut the engine off
and turn it on again after a few
minutes. The warning light will go
off and the EPB switch will oper-
ate normally. However, if the EPB
warning light is still on, we recom-
mend that the system be checked
by an authorised HYUNDAI repair-
er.
• If the parking brake warning light
does not illuminate or blinks even
though the EPB switch was pulled
up, the EPB is not applied.
• If the parking brake warning light
blinks when the EPB warning light
is on, press the switch, then pull it
up. Once more press it back to its
original position and pull it back
up. If the EPB warning does not
go off, we recommend that the
system be checked by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
CAUTION
If you continuously notice a noise
or burning smell when the EPB is
used for emergency braking, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
Driving your vehicle
505
When the EPB (electric parking
brake) does not release
If the EPB does not release normally, we
recommend that you contact an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer by loading the
vehicle on a flatbed tow truck and have
the system checked.
AUTO HOLD (if equipped)
The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle in a
standstill even though the brake pedal is
not depressed after the driver brings the
vehicle to a complete stop by depressing
the brake pedal.
Set up
1. With the driver's door, engine bonnet
and tailgate/trunk closed, fasten the
driver's seat belt or depress the brake
pedal and then press the Auto Hold
button. The white AUTO HOLD indica-
tor will come on and the system will be
in the standby position.
OVF051048R
W
W
h
h
i
i
t
t
e
e
551
Driving your vehicle
2. When you stop the vehicle completely
by depressing the brake pedal, the
AUTO HOLD indicator changes from
white to green.
3. The vehicle will remain stationary even
if you release the brake pedal.
4. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
released.
Leaving
If you press the accelerator pedal with
the shift lever in R (Reverse), D (Drive) or
sports mode, the Auto Hold will be
released automatically and the vehicle
will start to move. The indicator changes
from green to white.
Cancel
To cancel the Auto Hold operation, press
the Auto Hold switch. The AUTO HOLD
indicator will go out.
To cancel the Auto Hold operation when
the vehicle is at a standstill, press the
Auto Hold switch whilst depressing the
brake pedal.
OVF051049R
W
W
h
h
i
i
t
t
e
e
G
G
r
r
e
e
e
e
n
n
OVF051051R
L
L
i
i
g
g
h
h
t
t
o
o
f
f
f
f
WARNING
When driving off from Auto Hold by
depressing the accelerator pedal,
always check the surrounding area
near your vehicle.
Slowly depress the accelerator
pedal for a smooth launch.
Driving your vehicle
525
✽
NOTICE
• The Auto Hold does not operate
when:
- The driver's seat belt is unfastened
and driver's door is opened
- The engine bonnet is opened
- The tailgate/trunk is opened
- The shift lever is in P (Park)
- The EPB is applied
• For your safety, the Auto Hold auto-
matically switches to EPB in such
cases:
- The driver's seat belt is unfastened
and driver's door is opened
- The engine bonnet is opened
- The tailgate/trunk is opened
- The vehicle is in a standstill for more
than 10 minutes
- The vehicle is standing on a steep
slope
- The vehicle moved several times
In these cases, the brake warning light
comes on, the AUTO HOLD indicator
changes from green to white, and a
warning sounds and a message will
appear to inform you that EPB has
been automatically engaged. Before
driving off again, press foot brake
pedal, check the surrounding area
near your vehicle and release parking
brake manually with the EPB switch.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the AUTO HOLD indicator lights
up yellow, the Auto Hold is not work-
ing properly. We recommend that you
contact an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
• Whilst operating Auto Hold, you may
hear mechanical noise. However, it is
normal operating noise.
WARNING
• Press the accelerator pedal slow-
ly when you start the vehicle.
• For your safety, cancel the Auto
Hold when you drive downhill or
back up the vehicle or park the
vehicle.
CAUTION
If there is a malfunction with the dri-
ver’s door, engine bonnet or tailgate
/trunk open detection system, the
Auto Hold may not work properly.
We recommend that you contact an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
553
Driving your vehicle
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-
lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situa-
tion, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situa-
tion warrants and allow the ABS to con-
trol the force being delivered to the
brakes.
(Continued)
The safety features of an ABS (or
ESC) equipped vehicle should not
be tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
WARNING
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or danger-
ous driving manoeuvres. Even
though vehicle control is improved
during emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle
speeds should always be reduced
during extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for vehicle
equipped with an anti-lock braking
system (or Electronic Stability
Control System) may be longer
than for those without it in the fol-
lowing road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced
speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
• With tyre chains installed.
• On roads where the road surface
is pitted or has different surface
height.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
545
✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from exces-
sive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping dis-
tance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS is malfunctioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, howev-
er, your regular brakes will work
normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS.We recom-
mend that you contact an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
CAUTION
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operate your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your
vehicle over to a safe place and
stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a prob-
lem with the ABS. We recommend
that you contact an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
W-78
555
Driving your vehicle
Electronic stability control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is designed to stabilize the vehi-
cle during cornering manoeuvres. ESC
checks where you are steering and
where the vehicle is actually going. ESC
applies the brakes at individual wheels
and intervenes with engine management
system to stabilize the vehicle.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system designed
to help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a
substitute for safe driving practices.
Factors including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in
preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESC is active.
✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) System is functioning
properly.
WARNING
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when cor-
nering. Electronic stability control
(ESC) will not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
manoeuvres and hydroplaning on
wet surfaces can still result in seri-
ous accidents. Only a safe and
attentive driver can prevent acci-
dents by avoiding manoeuvres that
cause the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESC installed, always fol-
low all the normal precautions for
driving - including driving at safe
speeds for the conditions.
OVF051008R
OVF051009R
■ Type B
■ Type A
Driving your vehicle
565
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-
cator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button
for at least half a second after
turning the ignition ON to turn
ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator
will illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC OFF
button (ESC OFF indicator
light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESC per-
forming an automatic system
self-check and does not indi-
cate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation,
ESC indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Control is operating properly,
you can feel a slight pulsation
in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, the engine
rpm (revolution per minute)
may not increase even if you
depress the accelerator pedal
deeply. This is to maintain the
stability and traction of the
vehicle and does not indicate
a problem.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC off
states.
If the engine stops when ESC
is off, ESC remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the ESC
will automatically turn on again.
-
557
Driving your vehicle
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF ) shortly (ESC
OFF indicator light (ESC OFF ) illumi-
nates). At this state, the engine control
function does not operate. It means the
traction control function does not oper-
ate. Brake control function only operates.
• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF ) for more than
3 seconds. ESC OFF indicator light (ESC
OFF ) illuminates and ESC OFF warn-
ing chime will sound. At this state, the
engine control function and brake control
function do not operate. It means the car
stability control function does not operate
any more.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, then goes off if
the ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating or illuminates when
ESC fails to operate.
ESC OFF indicator light comes on when
the ESC is turned off with the button.
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
CAUTION
Driving with varying tyre or wheel
sizes may cause the ESC system to
malfunction. When replacing tyres,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tyres.
OVF055131L OVF055132L
Driving your vehicle
585
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily driv-
ing whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off whilst driving, press
the ESC OFF button whilst driving on a
flat road surface.
✽
NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is
turned off (ESC OFF light illuminat-
ed). If the ESC is left on, it may pre-
vent the vehicle speed from increas-
ing, and result in false diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
Vehicle stability management
(VSM)
This system provides further enhance-
ments to vehicle stability and steering
responses when a vehicle is driving on a
slippery road or a vehicle detected
changes in coefficient of friction between
right wheels and left wheels when brak-
ing.
VSM operation
When the VSM is operating:
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ( )
light will blink.
• The steering wheel may be controlled.
When the vehicle stability management
is operating properly, you can feel a slight
pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indicates noth-
ing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gradient
or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESC OFF indicator light ( ) remains
on the instrument cluster
• EPS (Electronic Power Steering) indi-
cator light remains on the instrument
cluster
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Control sys-
tem is only a driving aid; use pre-
cautions for safe driving by slowing
down on curved, snowy, or icy
roads. Drive slowly and don’t
attempt to accelerate whenever the
ESC indicator light is blinking, or
when the road surface is slippery.
WARNING
Never press the ESC OFF button
whilst ESC is operating (ESC indi-
cator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off whilst ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip out
of control.
559
Driving your vehicle
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to turn
off the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and
the ESC OFF indicator light ( ) illumi-
nates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes
out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if you
don’t cancel the VSM operation by press-
ing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that
a malfunction has been detected some-
where in the EPS (Electronic Power
Steering) system or VSM system. If the
ESC indicator light ( ) or EPS warning
light remains on, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
✽
NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)
on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 18 mph (30
km/h) when a vehicle is braking on a
split-mu road. A split-mu road is a
road which has different friction
forces usually created by different
materials being present in its surface.
WARNING
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices but a sup-
plementary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Always hold the steering wheel
firmly whilst driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to acti-
vate according to the driver’s
intention, even with the VSM
installed. Always follow all the
normal precautions for driving at
safe speeds for the conditions –
including driving in inclement
weather and on a slippery road.
• Driving with varying tyre or wheel
sizes may cause the VSM system
to malfunction. When replacing
tyres, make sure they are the
same size as your original tyres.
Driving your vehicle
605
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
A vehicle has the tendency to slip back
on a steep hill when it starts to go after
stopping. The Hill-start Assist Control
(HAC) prevents the vehicle from slipping
back by operating the brakes automati-
cally for about 2 seconds. The brakes are
released when the accelerator pedal is
depressed or after about 2 seconds.
✽
NOTICE
• The HAC does not operate when the
transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though the
ESC is off but it does not activate
when the ESC has malfunctioned.
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)
(if equipped)
The Emergency Stop Signal system
alerts the driver behind by blinking the
stop light when the vehicle is braked rap-
idly and severely.
The system is activated when:
• The vehicle suddenly stops (vehicle
speed is over 35 mph (55 km/h) and
the vehicle deceleration at greater than
7 m/s
2
)
• The ABS is activating
When the vehicle speed is under 25 mph
(40 km/h) and the ABS deactivates or the
sudden stop situation is over, the stop
light will not blink. Instead, the hazard
warning flasher will turn on automatically.
The hazard warning flasher will turn off
when vehicle speed is over 10km/h after
the vehicle has stopped. Also, it will turn
off when the vehicle is driven at low
speed for some time. You can turn it off
manually by pushing the hazard warning
flasher switch.
Good braking practices
WARNING
• Whenever you leave or park your
vehicle, always set the parking
brake as far as possible and fully
engage the vehicle's transaxle
into the P (Park) position. If the
parking brake is not fully
engaged, the vehicle may move
inadvertently and injure yourself
and others.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
WARNING
The HAC is activated only for about
2 seconds, so when the vehicle is
starting off always depress the
accelerator pedal.
CAUTION
The Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)
system will not work if the hazard
warning flasher is already on.
561
Driving your vehicle
• Check to be sure the parking brake is
not engaged and that the parking
brake indicator light is out before driv-
ing away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your vehicle
will not stop as quickly if the brakes are
wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle
to pull to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns to
normal, taking care to keep the vehicle
under control at all times. If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop
as soon as it is safe to do so and we
recommend that you call an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
• Do not coast down hills with the vehicle
out of gear. This is extremely haz-
ardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all
times, use the brakes to slow down,
then shift to a lower gear so that
engine braking will help you maintain a
safe speed.
• Do not "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal whilst driv-
ing can be dangerous because it can
result in the brakes overheating and
losing their effectiveness. It also
increases the wear of the brake com-
ponents.
• If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
vehicle pointed straight ahead whilst
you slow down. When you are moving
slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,
pull off the road and stop in a safe
place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle/dual clutch trans-
mission, do not let your vehicle creep
forward. To avoid creeping forward,
keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle/dual clutch transmission) or
in first or reverse gear (manual
transaxle). If your vehicle is facing
downhill, turn the front wheels into the
kerb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If your vehicle is facing uphill,
turn the front wheels away from the
kerb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no kerb or if it is
required by other conditions to keep
the vehicle from rolling, block the
wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged posi-
tion. This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily whilst you put the shift
lever in P (automatic transaxle/dual
clutch transmission) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transaxle to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or parking
brake.
Driving your vehicle
625
1. Cruise indicator
2. Cruise set indicator
The cruise control system allows you to
program the vehicle to maintain a con-
stant speed without pressing the acceler-
ator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
✽
NOTICE
During normal cruise control operation,
when the SET switch is activated or
reactivated after applying the brakes,
the cruise control will energize after
approximately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
✽
NOTICE
To activate cruise control, depress the
brake pedal at least once after turning
the ignition switch to the ON position or
starting the engine. This is to check if
the brake switch which is important
part to cancel cruise control is in normal
condition.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• If the cruise control is left on,
(cruise indicator light is illuminat-
ed), the cruise control can be
switched on accidentally. Keep
the cruise control system off
when the cruise control is not in
use, to avoid inadvertently set-
ting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system
only when travelling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to keep
the vehicle at a constant speed,
for instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or over 6% up-hill
or down-hill roads.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control system.
• Be careful when driving downhill
using the cruise control system,
which may increase the vehicle
speed.
CAUTION
During cruise-speed driving of a
manual transaxle vehicle, do not
shift into neutral without depress-
ing the clutch pedal, since the
engine will be overrevved. If this
happens, depress the clutch pedal
or release the cruise control ON-
OFF switch.
OVF055029L
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A ■ Type B
OVF055028L
563
Driving your vehicle
Cruise control switch
CANCEL: Cancels cruise control opera-
tion.
/ CRUISE : Turns cruise control sys-
tem on or off.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control
speed.
To set cruise control speed:
1. Press the cruise /CRUISE button
on the steering wheel, to turn the sys-
tem on. The cruise indicator light will
illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).
✽
NOTICE - Manual transaxle
For manual transaxle vehicles, you
should depress the brake pedal at least
once to set the cruise control after start-
ing the engine.
3. Move the lever down (to SET-), and
release it at the desired speed. The
cruise set indicator light will illuminate.
Release the accelerator pedal at the
same time. The desired speed will
automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly whilst going
downhill.
OVF051012
OVF051070
■ Type B
■ Type A
OVF051013
OVF051020
■ Type B
■ Type A
OVF051015
OVF051022
■ Type B
■ Type A
Driving your vehicle
645
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and hold
it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release
the lever at the speed you want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 1.2 mph (2
km/h) each time you move the lever up
(to RES+) in this manner.
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the lever at the speed
you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 1.2 mph (2
km/h) each time you move the lever
down (to SET-) in this manner.
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with cruise control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
OVF051014
OVF051021
■ Type B
■ Type A
OVF051015
OVF051022
■ Type B
■ Type A
565
Driving your vehicle
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal if equpped
with a manual transaxle.
• Shift into N (Neutral) if equpped with
an automatic transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch located on
the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than
the memory speed by 12 mph (20
km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the
cruise set
indicator
light will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume cruise
control operation, move up the lever (to
RES+) located on your steering wheel.
You will return to your previously preset
speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h):
If any method other than the cruise
/CRUISE button was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed will
automatically resume when you move
the lever up (to RES+).
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below approximately
25 mph (40 km/h).
OVF051016
OVF051023
■ Type B
■ Type A
OVF051014
OVF051021
■ Type B
■ Type A
Driving your vehicle
665
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Press the cruise /CRUISE button
(the cruise indicator light will illumi-
nate).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise con-
trol operation. If you want to resume
cruise control operation, repeat the steps
provided in “To set cruise control speed”
on the previous page.
567
Driving your vehicle
You can set the speed limit when you do
not want to drive over a specific speed.
If you drive over the preset speed limit,
the warning system operates (set speed
limit will blink and chime will sound) until
the vehicle speed returns within the
speed limit.
✽
NOTICE
Whilst speed limit control is in opera-
tion, the cruise control system cannot be
activated.
Speed limit control switch
CANCEL: Cancels set speed limit.
: Turns speed limit control system on or
off.
RES+: Resumes or increases speed limit
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases speed limit con-
trol speed.
To set speed limit :
1. Press the speed limit button on the
steering wheel, to turn the system on.
The speed limit indicator light will illumi-
nate.
SPEED LIMIT CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF051017OVF051012
OVF055024L
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
685
2. Move the lever down (to SET-).
3. Move the lever up (to RES+) or down
(to SET-), and release it at the desired
speed. Move the lever up (to RES+) or
down (to SET-) and hold it. The speed
will increase or decrease by 3 mph (5
km/h).
The set speed limit will be displayed. To drive over the preset speed limit you
must depress hard on the accelerator
pedal (more than approximately 80%)
until the kick down mechanism works
with a clicking noise. Then the set speed
limit will blink and chime will sound until
you return the vehicle speed within the
speed limit.
✽
NOTICE
• Depressing the accelerator pedal less
than approximately 50%, the vehicle
will not speed over the preset speed
limit but maintain the vehicle speed
within the speed limit.
• A clicking noise heard from the kick
down mechanism by depressing the
accelerator pedal fully is a normal
condition.
OVF051018
OVF055025L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVF055026L
■ Type A
■ Type B
569
Driving your vehicle
To turn off the speed limit con-
trol, do one of the following:
• Press the speed limit button once
again.
• Press the cruise switch (If you press
cruise switch, the cruise system will
turn on)
If you press the CANCEL switch once,
the set speed limit will cancel, but it will
not turn the system off. If you wish to
reset the speed limit, move the lever up
(to RES+) or down (to SET-) to the
desired speed.
OVF051019
CAUTION
The "OFF" indicator will blink if
there is a problem with speed limit
control system.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be checked by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
OVF055027L
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
705
The system displays the information of
speed limit and no passing restriction to
the driver in both the instrument cluster
and navigation screen. SLIF detects traf-
fic signs with camera system attached
behind the top of the windscreen.
The system considers the information
stored in the navigation system and also
displays speed limits present on routes
without signs.
SPEED LIMIT INFORMATION FUNCTION (SLIF) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF051071
WARNING
• Speed Limit Information Function
is only an aid and is not always
able to correctly display speed
limits and overtaking restrictions.
• The driver always keeps the
responsibility to not exceed the
maximum allowed speed
• Do not place any accessories,
stickers or tint the windscreen
near the rearview mirror.
• The system detects traffic signs
and displays speed limit informa-
tion by a camera therefore, if traf-
fic signs are hard to detect, the
system may not work properly.
Please refer to "Driver's Attention".
• Do not remove any LDWS parts
or apply impact.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not place objects on the dash-
board that reflects light such as
mirrors, white paper, etc.The sys-
tem may malfunction if the sun-
light is reflected.
• The system is not available in all
countries.
571
Driving your vehicle
SLIF activation / deactivation
• SLIF Setting method :
Cluster User Settings → Driving Assist
→ SLIF (Speed Limit Information
Function)
• The information of speed limit and no
passing restriction will appear on the
cluster using a symbol if you have acti-
vated SLIF in User Settings of cluster.
• If SLIF is activated in navigation set-
ting, the information also displayed in
navigation screen.
Operation
• If a traffic sign that is relevant to your
vehicle is passed, the system displays
the information of the speed limits and
no passing restrictions to the driver.
• When the driver turn on the ignition,
the system displays stored information
of the speed limit before turn off the
ignition.
• Sometimes different speed limits are
displayed for the same road. The infor-
mation displayed depending on the sit-
uation. Because, traffic signs with addi-
tional sign (e.g rainy, arrow...) are also
detected and compared with vehicle
interior data(e.g wiper operation, turn
signal...).
• The system can update the speed limit
information without visible speed limit
signs in the following situations.
- When you change your driving direc-
tion with right or left or U turning.
- When vehicle changes roads. (e.g.
from highway to country road…)
- When you enter or exit into town or
village.
✽
NOTICE
If speed limit value has the difference
between cluster and navigation, check
the speed unit setting in navigation.
OVF055139
Driving your vehicle
725
Display
• If the system doesn’t have a reliable
speed limit information, the following
symbol is displayed in both the instru-
ment cluster and navigation screen.
• If the system detect no passing sign,
no passing is displayed in both the
instrument cluster and navigation
screen.
• For some areas on highways in ger-
many there's no speed limit applicable.
In that case SLIF shows "end of limita-
tion" traffic sign as long as you don't
pass another speed limit sign.
WUM-203
■ No reliable speed limit information
WVF-60/WUM-204
■ No passing information
WUM-205
■ Unlimited speed (only in Germany)
573
Driving your vehicle
Warning message
The message will appear when camera’s
field of view is covered by some objects.
The system stops until the field of view is
normal.
Check the windscreen around the cam-
era view area.
If the system does not work normally
even though camera’s field of view is
cleared, we recommend that the system
be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
When SLIF is not working properly, the
warning message will come on for a few
second. After the message disappears,
the master warning light will illuminate.
We recommend that the system be
checked by a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
The system may not fully operate and
provide correct information in the follow-
ing situations.
• Traffic signs are positioned on sharp
curve.
• Poorly positioned traffic sign. (eg.
Rotated, shaded by any object, dam-
aged…)
• Concealed traffic signs by other vehicle.
• Broken LED traffic signs.
• Poor weather like snow, rain, fog
• There is glare around traffic signs by low
sun in the sky.
• There is insufficient illumination of the
traffic signs in the night.
• There is bright lights around traffic signs.
• There is dirt, ice or frost on the wind-
screen in the area of the camera.
• When camera field of view is covered by
objects such as a sticker, paper, leaf fall.
• When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
• When navigation system has malfunc-
tion.
• When bus or trucks attached with a
speed sticker are passing you.
• When you are in area or countries
where navigation system is not covered.
• When a navigation system not updated
latest map version.
OVF055140 OVF055141/OVF045416
Driving your vehicle
745
DRIVER'S ATTENTION
The driver must be cautious in the below
situations for the system may
not assist the driver and may not work
properly.
• Do not stick or attach anything to the
windscreen in front of the camera as
this may reduce effectiveness or cause
one more of the systems dependent on
the camera to stop working.
• Keep the windscreen in the area
behind the interior rear view mirror
clean.
• Do not place reflective materials, such
as white paper or a mirror, on the
instrument panel.
• Do not strike or damage the areas
around the camera unit.
• Do not touch the camera lens or
remove the screw located on the cam-
era unit.
• The system does not work in all situa-
tions but is designed merely as a sup-
plementary aid.
• The system assists the driver and does
not replace the human eye.
• The driver always bears ultimate
responsibility for ensuring that the
vehicle is driven safely and that appli-
cable road traffic rules and regulations
are followed.
575
Driving your vehicle
The Lane Keeping Assist System detects
lane markers on the road, and assists the
driver’s steering to help keep the vehicle
between lanes. When the system detects
the vehicle straying from its lane, it alerts
the driver with a visual and audible warn-
ing, whilst applying a slight counter-
steering torque, trying to prevent the
vehicle from moving out of its lane.
LANE KEEPING ASSIST SYSTEM (LKAS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF045417/H
OVF051071R
WARNING
• The steering wheel is not contin-
uously controlled so if the vehicle
speed is very fast when leaving a
lane the vehicle may not be con-
trolled by the system.
• The operation of the LKAS can be
affected by several factors
(including environmental condi-
tions). It is the responsibility of
the driver to pay attention to the
roadway and to maintain the vehi-
cle in its lane at all times.
• Do not steer the steering wheel
suddenly when the steering
wheel is being assisted by the
system.
• LKAS prevents the driver from
moving out of the lane uninten-
tionally by assisting the driver's
steering. However, the driver
should not solely rely on the sys-
tem but always pay attention on
the steering wheel to stay in the
lane.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always check the road condition
and surroundings and be cau-
tious when the system cancels,
does not operate or malfunc-
tions.
• Do not place any accessories,
stickers or tint the windscreen
near the rearview mirror.
• The system detects lane markers
and controls the steering wheel
by a camera, therefore, if the lane
markers are hard to detect, the
system may not work properly.
Please refer to "Driver's
Attention".
• Do not remove any LKAS parts or
apply impact.
• Do not place objects on the dash-
board that reflects light such as
mirrors, white paper, etc.The sys-
tem may malfunction if the sun-
light is reflected.
• Loud audio sounds may interfere
with the passenger from hearing
warning chimes.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
765
LKAS operation
• To turn on the LKAS, push the button
with the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
• The LKAS indicator (green) will illumi-
nate.
• To turn off the system, press the button
again. The indicator turns off.
LKAS activation
• The LKAS screen will appear on the
LCD display if the system is activated.
• When both lanes are detected and all
the conditions to activate the LKAS are
satisfied, the steering wheel will be
controlled (green steering wheel indi-
cator will illuminate).
OVF051059OVF051072R
WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist System is
a system to prevent the driver from
leaving the lane. However, the driv-
er should not solely rely on the sys-
tem but always check the road con-
ditions when driving.
(Continued)
• Always have your hands on the
steering wheel whilst the LKAS
system is activated. If you contin-
ue to drive with your hands off
the steering wheel after the
"Hand on" warning, the system
will turn off automatically.
• If you drive very fast, the vehicle
may stray out of the lane. Always
be cautious when using the sys-
tem.
577
Driving your vehicle
• If the system detects a lane, the colour
changes from black to white.
• If the system detects the left lane, the
left lane colour will change from black
to white.
• If the system detects the right lane, the
right lane colour will change from black
to white.
• Both lanes must be detected for the
system to fully activate.
• If only one of the lane is detected, the
system will warn (warning beep and
blinking yellow lane) the driver when
the driver crosses the detected lane.
Warning
• If you cross a lane, the lane you cross
will blink (yellow) on the LCD display
with an audible warning.
• If the steering wheel appears, the sys-
tem will control the vehicle’s steering to
prevent the vehicle from crossing the
lane.
OVF051058
■ Left lane detected
■ Right lane detected
OVF051062
■ Left lane
■ Right lane
OVF051057
■ Lane undetected
■ Lane detected
Driving your vehicle
785
• If all the conditions to activate LKAS is
not satisfied, the system will convert to
LDWS and warn the driver only when
the driver crosses the lane markers.
• If the driver takes one’s hands off the
steering wheel whilst the LKAS is acti-
vated, the system will warn the driver
after several seconds with a visual and
audible warning.
• If the driver still does not have one’s
hand on the steering wheel after sev-
eral seconds, the system will be auto-
matically cancelled.
WARNING
The warning message may appear
late according to road conditions.
Therefore, always have your hands
on the steering wheel whilst driv-
ing.
OVF055136L
OVF055137L
OVF051063
■ Left lane
■ Right lane
579
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
• Even though the steering is assisted by
the system, the driver may control the
steering.
• The steering wheel may feel heavier
when the steering wheel is assisted by
the system than when it is not.
The system will be cancelled when:
• Vehicle speed is below 34 mph (55
km/h) and over 111 mph (180 km/h).
• Only one lane is detected.
• Always turn on the turn signal to
change lanes. If you change lanes
without the turn signal on, the steering
wheel might be controlled.
• The hazard warning light is on.
• The width of the lane is below 2.6 m (
3 yards) and over 4.5 m (5 yards).
• ESC(Electronic Stability Control) and
VSM(Vehicle stability management)
are activated.
• When the system is on or after chang-
ing a lane, drive in the middle of the
lane. If not, the system will not provide
the steering assist function.
• The steering will not be assisted when
you drive fast on a sharp curve.
• The steering will not be assisted when
you change lanes fast.
• The steering will not be assisted when
you brake suddenly.
DRIVER'S ATTENTION
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations for the system may not
assist the driver and may not work
properly.
• The lane can't be visible due to snow,
rain, stain, a puddle or other factors.
• The brightness outside changes sud-
denly such as tunnel enter/exit.
• Not turning on the headlight or the
light is weak even at night or in a tun-
nel.
• Difficult to distinguish the colour of
the lane maker from the road.
• Driving on a steep grade or a curve.
• Light reflects from the water on the
road such as sunlight, streetlight or
the light of oncoming vehicles.
• The lens or windscreen is stained with
foreign matter.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or heavy
snow.
• The surrounding of the inside rear
view mirror temperature is high due
to direct light.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane marker is damaged or indis-
tinct.
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for
accurate steering.
• Turn off the system and drive the
vehicle personally in below situa-
tions.
- In bad weather
- In bad road condition
- When the steering wheel needs
to be controlled by the driver
frequently.
Driving your vehicle
805
• The shadow is on the lane marker by
a median strip.
• There is a mark similar to a lane
marker.
• There is a boundary structure.
• The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead drives
hiding the lane marker.
• The vehicle shakes heavily.
• The lane number increases or decreas-
es or the lane marker are crossing
complicatedly.
• Placing something on the dashboard.
• Driving with the sun in front of you.
• Driving in areas under construction.
• The lane marker is more than two.
• The lane marker in a tunnel is hard to
distinguish due to dust or grease.
• The lane marker is hard to distinguish
after raining at night.
• The lane marker is hard to distinguish
due to dust.
• The windscreen is fogged by humid
air in the vehicle.
• The distance from the vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead drives
covering the lane line.
• The lane is merged or divided.
• Driving through a toll plaza or toll
gate.
LKAS malfunction
• If there is a problem with the system a
message will appear for 2 seconds
with an audible warning. If the problem
continues the LKAS fail indicator will
illuminate.
LKAS fail indicator
The LKAS fail indicator (yellow) will illu-
minate with an audible warning if the
LKAS is not working properly. We recom-
mend that the system be checked by an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
OVF051064 OVF051056
581
Driving your vehicle
When there is a problem with the system
do one of the following:
• Turn the system on after turning the
engine off and on again.
• Check if the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
• Check if the system is affected by the
weather. (ex: fog, heavy rain, etc.)
• Check if there is foreign matter on the
camera lens
If the problem is not solved, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
OVF045418/OVF045420/OVF045419
➡ ➡
LKAS function change
The driver can change LKAS to Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) or change
the LKAS mode between Pre-Departure Control and Post-Departure Control from
the User Settings Mode on the LCD display. The system is automatically set to Post-
Departure Control if a function is not selected.
Driving your vehicle
825
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)
• The system can be converted to LKA
to LDW at the “User setting” mode.
Refer to “User setting” in section 4.
• LDWS alerts the driver with a visual
and audible warning when the system
detects the vehicle straying from its
lane.
• If the LDWS is operating the indicator
(white) will illuminate.
• The steering wheel will not be con-
trolled.
Pre-departure mode
• LKAS operates for a vehicle to keep
the region of lane center more effi-
ciently.
• The steering assistance is activated
more frequently and earlier than post
departure mode
• LDW is generated when the vehicle is
about to cross the line.
Post-departure mode
• LKAS only starts intervention when the
vehicle is predicted to cross the line.
• It's useful to a driver who dislikes fre-
quent intervention by LKAS
• LDW is generated when the vehicle is
about to cross the line.
583
Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
miles (kilometers) you can get from a
gallon (litre) of fuel. To operate your vehi-
cle as economically as possible, use the
following driving suggestions to help
save money in both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-
ate rate. Do not make "jack-rabbit"
starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain
a steady cruising speed. Do not race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to the traffic so you do not have
to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid
heavy traffic whenever possible.
Always maintain a safe distance from
other vehicles so you can avoid unnec-
essary braking. This also reduces
brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your vehicle
uses. Driving at a moderate speed,
especially on the highway, is one of the
most effective ways to reduce fuel con-
sumption.
• Do not "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.
This can increase fuel consumption
and also increase wear on these com-
ponents. In addition, driving with your
foot resting on the brake pedal may
cause the brakes to overheat, which
reduces their effectiveness and may
lead to more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tyres. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tyre
wear. Check the tyre pressures at least
once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting kerbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-
ment causes faster tyre wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condition.
For better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your vehi-
cle in accordance with the mainte-
nance schedule in section 7. If you
drive your vehicle in severe conditions,
more frequent maintenance is required
(see section 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials. It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the vehicle. This
extra weight can result in increased
fuel consumption and also contribute
to corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Do not carry unnecessary
weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces
fuel economy.
• Do not let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
Driving your vehicle
845
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-
ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Do not "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too
high a gear resulting engine bucking. If
this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit. This can be avoid-
ed by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operat-
ed by engine power so your fuel econ-
omy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-
dition is important both for economy and
safety. Therefore, we recommend that the
system be serviced by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
WARNING - Engine off dur-
ing motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine run-
ning. Instead, keep the engine on
and downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect. In
addition, turning off the ignition
whilst driving could engage the
steering wheel lock (if equipped)
resulting in loss of vehicle steering
which could cause serious injury
or death.
585
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-
tance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light up-
and-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tyre chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is
defined as a Multi Purpose Vehicle
(MPV). MPV’s have higher ground clear-
ance and a narrower track to make them
capable of performing in a wide variety of
road applications. Specific design char-
acteristics give them a higher centre of
gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advan-
tage of the higher ground clearance is a
better view of the road, which allows you
to anticipate problems. They are not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as conventional passenger vehi-
cles. Due to this risk, driver and passen-
gers are strongly recommended to buck-
le their seat belts. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt. There are
steps that a driver can make to reduce
the risk of a rollover. If at all possible,
avoid sharp turns or abrupt manoeuvres,
do not load your roof rack with heavy
cargo, and never modify your vehicle in
any way.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
WARNING
- Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle/dual clutch transmission,
whilst driving on slippery surfaces
can cause an accident. The sudden
change in tyre speed could cause
the tyres to skid. Be careful when
downshifting on slippery surfaces.
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
Driving your vehicle
865
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear
the area around your front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between 1st (First)
and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped
with a manual transaxle or R (Reverse)
and any forward gear in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transaxle/
dual clutch transmission. Do not race the
engine, and spin the wheels as little as
possible. If you are still stuck after a few
tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow
vehicle to avoid engine overheating and
possible damage to the transaxle.
WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with tyres
designed to provide safe ride and
handling capability. Do not use a
size and type of tyre and wheel that
is different from the one that is
originally installed on your vehicle.
It can affect the safety and perform-
ance of your vehicle, which could
lead to steering failure or rollover
and serious injury. When replacing
the tyres, be sure to equip all four
tyres with the tyre and wheel of the
same size, type, tread, brand and
load-carrying capacity. If you never-
theless decide to equip your vehi-
cle with any tyre/wheel combina-
tion not recommended by
HYUNDAI for off road driving, you
should not use these tyres for high-
way driving.
WARNING -
Rollover
As with other Multi Purpose Vehicle
(MPV), failure to operate this vehi-
cle correctly may result in loss of
control, an accident or vehicle
rollover.
• Utility vehicles have a significant-
ly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
• Specific design characteristics
(higher ground clearance, nar-
rower track, etc.) give this vehicle
a higher centre of gravity than
ordinary vehicles.
• A MPV is not designed for cor-
nering at the same speeds as
conventional vehicles.
• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
manoeuvres.
• In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more like-
ly to die than a person wearing a
seat belt. Make sure everyone in
the vehicle is properly buckled
up.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transaxle dam-
age or failure, and tyre damage.
587
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
The ESC system should be turned OFF
prior to rocking the vehicle.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-
ners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tyre wear will be held
to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and prop-
erly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more diffi-
cult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to read-
just to the darkness.
WARNING
- Spinning tyres
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 35 mph (56
km/h). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is station-
ary could cause a tyre to overheat
which could result in tyre damage
that may injure bystanders.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
Driving your vehicle
885
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-
pared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windscreen wiping equip-
ment in good shape. Replace your
windscreen wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windscreen.
• If your tyres are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tyres are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-
ier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
whilst driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no high-
er than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times whilst the vehicle is moving slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are going
to drive before you begin driving.
Highway driving
Tyres
Adjust the tyre inflation pressures to
specification. Low tyre inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tyres.
Avoid using worn or damaged tyres
which may result in reduced traction or
tyre failure.
✽
NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tyre infla-
tion pressure shown on the tyres.
589
Driving your vehicle
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both engine coolant and engine
oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may result
in overheating of the engine.
WARNING
• Underinflated or overinflated
tyres can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tyre failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
Always check the tyres for proper
inflation before driving. For prop-
er tyre pressures, refer to section
8, “Tyres and wheels”.
• Driving on tyres with no or insuf-
ficient tread is dangerous. Worn-
out tyres can result in loss of
vehicle control, collisions, injury,
and even death. Worn-out tyres
should be replaced as soon as
possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
the tyre tread before driving your
vehicle. For further information
and tread limits, refer to section
7, “Tyres and wheels”.
Driving your vehicle
905
Severe weather conditions in the winter
result in greater wear and other prob-
lems. To minimise the problems of winter
driving, you should follow these sugges-
tions:
Snowy or Icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tyres or to
install tyre chains on your tyres. If snow
tyres are needed, it is necessary to
select tyres equivalent in size and type of
the original equipment tyres. Failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle. Furthermore,
speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden
brake applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-
cations on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-
cient distance between the vehicle in
operation in front and your vehicle. Also,
apply the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tyre chains on the tyre will
provide a greater driving force, but will
not prevent side skids.
✽
NOTICE
Tyre chains are not legal in all countries.
Check the country laws before fitting
tyre chains.
Snow tyres
If you fit snow tyres on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tyres of the
same size and load range as the original
tyres. Mount snow tyres on all four
wheels to balance your vehicle’s han-
dling in all weather conditions. Keep in
mind that the traction provided by snow
tyres on dry roads may not be as high as
your vehicle's original equipment tyres.
You should drive cautiously even when
the roads are clear. Check with the tyre
repairer for maximum speed recommen-
dations.
Do not install studded tyres without first
checking local, state and municipal regu-
lations for possible restrictions against
their use.
WINTER DRIVING
WARNING - Snow tyre size
Snow tyres should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's stan-
dard tyres. Otherwise, the safety
and handling of your vehicle may
be adversely affected.
1VQA3005
591
Driving your vehicle
Tyre chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tyres are
thinner, they can be damaged by mount-
ing some types of snow chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tyres is rec-
ommended instead of snow chains. Do
not mount tyre chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; snow
chains may cause damage to the wheels.
If snow chains must be used, use wire-
type chains with a thickness of less than
12 mm (0.47 in). Damage to your vehicle
caused by improper snow chain use is
not covered by your vehicle manufactur-
ers warranty.
Install tyre chains only on the front tyres.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manu-
facturer's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed. If you hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make contact,
slow down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
CAUTION
• Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for your
tyres. Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle body
and suspension and may not be
covered by your vehicle manufac-
turer warranty. Also, the snow
chain connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the
tyre. Make sure the snow chains
are SAE class “S” certified.
• Always check chain installation
for proper mounting after driving
approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5
to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting.
Retighten or remount the chains
if they are loose.
WARNING
- Mounting chains
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place
a triangular emergency warning
device behind the vehicle if avail-
able. Always place the vehicle in P
(Park), apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before installing
snow chains.
1VQA3007
Driving your vehicle
925
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-
cates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in section 7.
Before winter, have your coolant tested to
assure that its freezing point is sufficient
for the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the bat-
tery and cables as described in section
7. We recommend that the level of
charge in your battery be checked by an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See section 8
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, we rec-
ommend that you consult an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
section 7 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and compo-
nents to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
CAUTION
• Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
WARNING
- Tyre chains
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)
or the chain manufacturer’s rec-
ommended speed limit, whichev-
er is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other
road hazards, which may cause
the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
593
Driving your vehicle
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the con-
tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer and most auto parts outlets. Do
not use engine coolant or other types of
anti-freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only temporar-
ily whilst you put the shift lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle/dual clutch transmission)
or in first or reverse gear (manual
transaxle) and block the rear wheels so
the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the
parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accumu-
late underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and inter-
fere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the vehicle to be sure the
movement of the front wheels and the
steering components is not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the weath-
er, you should carry appropriate emer-
gency equipment. Some of the items you
may want to carry include tyre chains,
tow straps or chains, flashlight, emer-
gency flares, sand, shovel, jumper
cables, window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.
Don't place foreign objects or
materials in the engine compart-
ment
Placement of foreign objects or materials
which prevent cooling of the engine, in
the engine compartment, may cause a
failure or combustion. The manufacturer
is not responsible for the damage caused
by such placement.
Driving your vehicle
945
If you are considering towing with your
vehicle, you should first check with your
country's Department of Motor Vehicles
to determine their legal requirements.
Since laws vary the requirements for tow-
ing trailers, cars, or other types of vehi-
cles or apparatus may differ. Ask a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer for further
details before towing.
✽
NOTICE -
For Europe
• The technically permissible maxi-
mum load on the rear axle(s) may be
exceeded by not more than 15 %
and the technically permissible
maximum laden mass of the vehicle
may be exceeded by not more than
10 % or 100 kg (220.4 lbs), whichev-
er value is lower. In this case, do not
exceed 100 km/h (62.1 mph) for
vehicle of category M1 or 80 km/h
(49.7 mph) for vehicle of category
N1.
• When towing a trailer, the additional
load imposed at the trailer coupling
device may cause the rear tyre maxi-
mum load ratings to be exceeded, but
not by more than 15%. In such a case,
do not exceed 60 mph, and the rear
tyre pressure should be at least 20 kPa
(0.2 bar) above the tyre pressure(s) as
recommended for normal use (i.e.
without a trailer attached).
TRAILER TOWING
WARNING - Towing a trailer
If you don't use the correct equip-
ment and/or drive improperly, you
can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work
well - or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously or
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in
this section.
WARNING
- Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total
trailer weight, GCW (gross combi-
nation weight), GVW (gross vehicle
weight), GAW (gross axle weight )
and trailer tongue load are all with-
in the limits.
CAUTION
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in
costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section.
WARNING
When you tow the trailer, make sure
that you turn off the ISG function.
595
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify
what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the infor-
mation in “Weight of the trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different than
just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling,
durability, and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering requires correct equip-
ment, and it has to be used properly.
This section contains many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your
safety and that of your passengers.
Please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and
tyres are forced to work harder against
the load of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads. This
additional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also considerably adds wind
resistance, increasing the pulling require-
ments.
✽
NOTICE - Location of trailer
mounting
The mounting hole for towbars are
located on both sides of the underbody
behind the rear tyres.
Towbars
It's important to have the correct towbar
equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few rea-
sons why you’ll need the right towbar.
Here are some rules to follow:
• Do you have to make any holes in the
body of your vehicle when you install a
trailer towbar? If you do, then be sure
to seal the holes later when you
remove the towbar.
If you do not seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and
water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for towbars. Do not attach
rental towbars or other bumper-type
towbars to them. Use only a frame-
mounted towbar that does not attach to
the bumper.
• A HYUNDAI accessory trailer towbar is
available at a HYUNDAI authorised
repairer.
OVF061016
OVF061018
■ Wagon
■ Sedan
Driving your vehicle
965
Safety cables
You should always attach cables
between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety cables under the nose
of the trailer so that the nose will not drop
to the road if it becomes separated from
the towbar.
Instructions about safety cables may be
provided by the towbar manufacturer or
by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety cables. Always leave just
enough slack so you can turn with your
trailer. And, never allow safety cables to
drag on the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to your
country’s regulations and that it is prop-
erly installed and operating correctly.
If your trailer weight exceeds the maxi-
mum allowed weight without trailer
brakes, then the trailer will also require its
own brakes as well. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
• Do not tap into or modify your vehicle's
brake system.
Loading the trailer
The weight distribution between the car
and trailer should be balanced. Make
sure that the load in the trailer is equally
distributed and it is not front-heavy or tail-
heavy.
The heavy load in the trailer should be
placed above the axle or as close as pos-
sible to the axle. And, secure loads prop-
erly on the trailer.
Tyre pressure
Follow the trailer manufacturer’s tyre
pressure recommendations for the trailer
tyres.
When towing, inflate tyres in vehicle to
the maximum permissible pressure refer-
ring to the tyre pressure label.
597
Driving your vehicle
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting out
for the open road, you must get to know
your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the
feel of handling and braking with the
added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not
nearly so responsive as your vehicle is
by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer towbar
and platform, safety chains, electrical
connector(s), lights, tyres and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-
ing and then apply the trailer brake con-
troller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working. This lets you check your electri-
cal connection at the same time.
Do not release the parking brake until the
engine starts to move the vehicle for-
ward.
And release the brake pedal when you
feel that the vehicle wants to move for-
ward.
During your trip, check occasionally to be
sure that the load is secure, and that the
lights and any trailer brakes are still work-
ing.
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-
cle ahead as you would when driving
your vehicle without a trailer. This can
help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,
because of the increased vehicle length,
you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand. Then, to move the trailer
to the left, just move your hand to the left.
To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide
you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so your
trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, kerbs,
road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden manoeuvres. Signal well
in advance.
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have a different turn signal flasher and
extra wiring. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you
signal a turn or lane change. Properly
connected, the trailer lights will also flash
to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on your instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signals
when, in fact, they are not. It is important
to check occasionally to be sure the trail-
er bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you discon-
nect and then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system
directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.
Use only an approved trailer wiring har-
ness. A HYUNDAI authorised repairer
can assist you in installing the wiring har-
ness.
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trailer
wiring harness could result in dam-
age to the vehicle electrical system
and/or personal injury.
Driving your vehicle
985
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start down a long or steep
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you
might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer
operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70
km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine
and transaxle overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the max-
imum trailer weight without trailer brakes
and you have an automatic transaxle/
dual clutch transmission, you should
drive in D (Drive) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when
towing a trailer will minimise heat build up
and extend the life of your transaxle.
CAUTION
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not over-
heat.
If the needle of the coolant tem-
perature gauge moves across the
dial towards “130/H (HOT)”, pull
over and stop as soon as it is safe
to do so, and allow the engine to
idle until it cools down. You may
proceed once the engine has
cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle
overheating.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades, the clutch in the trans-
mission could overheat.
When the clutch is overheated,
the safe protection mode
engages. If the safe protection
mode engages, the gear position
indicator on the cluster blinks
with a chime sound.
At this time, a warning message
will appear on the LCD display
and driving may not be smooth.
If you ignore this warning, the
driving condition may become
worse.
To return the normal driving con-
dition, stop the vehicle on flat
road and apply the foot brake for
a few minutes before driving off.
599
Driving your vehicle
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer attached to
your vehicle, you should not park your
vehicle on a hill. People can be seriously
or fatally injured, and both your vehicle
and the trailer can be damaged if unex-
pectedly roll down hill.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here is how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space.
Turn the steering wheel in the direction
of the kerb (left if headed down hill,
right if headed up hill).
2. If the vehicle has a manual transaxle,
place the car in neutral. If the vehicle
has an automatic transaxle/dual clutch
transmission, place the car in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off the
vehicle.
4. Place chocks under the trailer wheels
on the down hill side of the wheels.
5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift
to neutral, release the parking brake
and slowly release the brakes until the
trailer chocks absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the park-
ing brake and shift the vehicle to R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle or P
(Park) for automatic transaxle/dual
clutch transmission.
7. Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the parking
brake set.
WARNING - Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill with a
trailer attached could cause seri-
ous injury or death, should the trail-
er break loose.
It can be very dangerous to hold
your vehicle by applying accelera-
tor on a hill.
WARNING
- Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake is
not firmly set.
If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You
or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
Driving your vehicle
1005
When you are ready to leave after park-
ing on a hill
1. With the manual transaxle in Neutral
or automatic transaxle/dual clutch
transmission in P (Park), apply your
brakes and hold the brake pedal down
whilst you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of
the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more often
when you regularly pull a trailer.
Important items to pay particular atten-
tion to include engine oil, automatic
transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling
system fluid. Brake condition is another
important item to frequently check. Each
item is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it is a good idea to
review these sections before you start
your trip.
Do not forget to also maintain your trailer
and towbar. Follow the maintenance
schedule that accompanied your trailer
and check it periodically. Preferably, con-
duct the check at the start of each day’s
driving. Most importantly, all towbar nuts
and bolts should be tight.
CAUTION
• Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
in hot days or during uphill driv-
ing. If the coolant gauge indicates
over-heating, switch off the air
conditioner and stop the vehicle
in a safe area to cool down the
engine.
• When towing check transaxle
fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped
with an air conditioner, you
should install a condenser fan to
improve engine performance
when towing a trailer.
5101
Driving your vehicle
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if you
decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You can
ask a towbar repairer about sway con-
trol.
• Do not do any towing with your car dur-
ing its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in
order to allow the engine to properly
break in. Failure to heed this caution
may result in serious engine or
transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to con-
sult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for
further information on additional
requirements such as a towing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-
ate speed (less than 60 mph (100
km/h)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed
45 mph (70 km/h) or the posted towing
speed limit, whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important consider-
ations that have to do with weight:
*
1
: Wagon
*
2
: Sedan
M/T : Manual transaxle
A/T : Automatic transaxle
DCT : Dual clutch transmission
Engine
Item
Petrol Engine Diesel Engine
2.0L DOHC,
2.0L GDI
1.6L
GDI
U2 1.7L
(Low)
U2 1.7L (High) U2 1.7L
M/T A/T M/T M/T M/T A/T DCT
Maximum trailer
weight
kg (Ibs.)
Without brake
System
700
(1543)
700
(1543)
600
(1323)
700
(1543)
700
(1543)
700
(1543)
700
(1543)
With brake
System
1500
(3307)
1500
(3307)
1300
(2866)
1500
(3307)
1800
(3968)
1500
(3307)
1500
(3307)
Maximum permissible static
vertical load on the coupling
device
kg (Ibs.)
70
(154)
70
(154)
60
(132)
80
(176)
80
(176)
70
(154)
70
(154)
Recommended distance from
rear wheel center to coupling
point
mm (inch)
1180 (46.4)*
1
/1150 (45.2)*
2
Driving your vehicle
1025
Weight of the trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be? It
should never weigh more than the maxi-
mum trailer weight with trailer brakes. But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your
trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and how
often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer
are all important. The ideal trailer weight
can also depend on any special equip-
ment that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the trailer nose
The nose weight of any trailer is an
important weight to measure because it
affects the total gross vehicle weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight
includes the kerb weight of the vehicle,
any cargo you may carry in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the nose weight to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
The trailer nose should weigh a maxi-
mum of 10% of the total loaded trailer
weight, within the limits of the maximum
permissible trailer nose weight. After
you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trail-
er and then the nose, separately, to see
if the weights are proper. If they aren’t,
you may be able to correct them simply
by moving some items around in the trail-
er.
C190E02JM
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
C190E01JM
Nose weight Total Trailer Weight
5103
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
With increasing altitude the engine per-
formance decreases. From 1.000 m
above sea level and for every 1.000 m
thereafter 10% of vehicle/trailer weight
(trailer weighter + gross vehicle weight)
must be deducted.
WARNING -
Trailer
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be loaded
with approximately 60% of the
total trailer load; the rear should
be loaded with approximately
40% of the total trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or trail-
er towing equipment. Improper
loading can result in damage to
your vehicle and/or personal
injury. Check weights and loading
at a commercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with
scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer can
cause loss of vehicle control.
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to
keep your loaded vehicle weight within its
design rating capability, with or without a
trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehicle
design performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-
lowing terms for determining your vehi-
cle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's specifications
and the certification label:
Base kerb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
a full tank of fuel and all standard equip-
ment. It does not include passengers,
cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle kerb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your repairer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Kerb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
kerb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the certification label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Kerb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR
(Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-
tification label.
Overloading
VEHICLE WEIGHT
WARNING - Vehicle weight
The gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your vehi-
cle are on the certification label
attached to the driver's (or front
passenger’s) door. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an acci-
dent or vehicle damage. You can
calculate the weight of your load by
weighing the items (and people)
before putting them in the vehicle.
Be careful not to overload your
vehicle.
5 104
Driving your vehicle
6
Road warning / 6-2
In case of an emergency whilst driving / 6-3
If the engine does not start / 6-4
Emergency starting / 6-5
If the engine overheats / 6-8
If you have a flat tyre / 6-9
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-19
If you have a flat tyre (with TyreMobilityKit) / 6-24
Towing / 6-30
What to do in an emergency
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehi-
cle is stopped near the edge of a road-
way.
Press the flasher switch with the ignition
switch in any position. The flasher switch
is located in the centre console switch
panel. All turn signal lights will flash
simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• The hazard warning flasher should
always be on whilst the vehicle is being
towed.
OVF061001R
63
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILST DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
• If your vehicle has a manual transaxle
not equipped with a ignition lock
switch, the vehicle can move forward
by shifting to the 2(Second) or 3(Third)
gear and then turning the starter with-
out depressing the clutch pedal.
If you have a flat tyre whilst driv-
ing
If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the vehicle slow down whilst
driving straight ahead. Do not apply the
brakes immediately or attempt to pull
off the road as this may cause a loss of
control. When the vehicle has slowed
to such a speed that it is safe to do so,
brake carefully and pull off the road.
Drive off the road as far as possible
and park on firm, level ground. If you
are on a divided highway, do not park
in the median area between the two
traffic lanes.
2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn on
your emergency hazard flashers, set
the parking brake and put the transaxle
in P (automatic transaxle/dual clutch
transmission) or reverse (manual
transaxle).
3.Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the vehicle that is away from
traffic.
4.When changing a flat tyre, follow the
instruction provided later in this sec-
tion.
If engine stalls whilst driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, we recommend
that you consult an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
What to do in an emergency
46
IF THE ENGINE DOES NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1. If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle/dual clutch transmission, be
sure the shift lever is in N (Neutral) or
P (Park) and the emergency brake is
set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the
starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. See instructions for "Jump starting".
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK/
OFF position, check all connectors at
ignition, coil and spark plugs.
Reconnect any that may be discon-
nected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-
partment.
4. If the engine still does not start, we
recommend that you call an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
WARNING
If the engine does not start, do not
push or pull the vehicle to start it.
This could result in a collision or
cause other damage. In addition,
push or pull starting may cause the
catalytic converter (if equipped) to
be overloaded and create a fire haz-
ard.
65
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting proce-
dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-
mend that you have a competent techni-
cian or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING
- Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
If these instructions are not fol-
lowed exactly, serious personal
injury and damage to the vehicle
may occur! If you are not sure
how to follow this procedure,
seek qualified assistance.
Automobile batteries contain sul-
furic acid. This is poisonous and
highly corrosive. When jump
starting, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
• Do not allow the (+) and (-)
jumper cables to touch. It may
cause sparks.
• The battery may rupture or
explode when you jump start with
a low or frozen battery.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
1VQA4001
Discharged battery
Jumper Cables
■ Engine compartment
Booster battery
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
What to do in an emergency
66
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-
volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration.
First connect one end of a jumper
cable to the positive terminal of the
discharged battery (1), then connect
the other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2). Proceed to
connect one end of the other jumper
cable to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3), then the other end
to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for
example, the engine lifting bracket)
away from the battery (4). Do not con-
nect it to or near any part that moves
when the engine is cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to con-
tact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making
connections.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative ter-
minal of the discharged battery.
This can cause the discharged bat-
tery to overheat and crack, releas-
ing battery acid.
CAUTION - AGM battery
(if equipped)
• Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM) bat-
teries are maintenance-free and
we recommend that the AGM bat-
tery be serviced by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer. For charging
your AGM battery, use only fully
automatic battery chargers that
are specially developed for AGM
batteries.
• When replacing the AGM battery,
we recommend that you use parts
for replacement from an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
• Do not open or remove the cap on
top of the battery. This may cause
leaks of internal electrolyte that
could result in severe injury.
• If the AGM battery is reconnected
or replaced, ISG function will not
operate immediately.
If you want to use the ISG func-
tion, the battery sensor needs to
be calibrated for approximately 4
hours with the ignition off.
67
What to do in an emergency
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-
cle with the discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Push-starting
Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle
should not be push-started because it
might damage the emission control sys-
tem. Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle/dual clutch transmission can-
not be push-started. Follow the directions
in this section for jump-starting.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
86
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates over-
heating, you will experience a loss of
power, or hear loud pinging or knocking,
the engine is probably too hot. If this hap-
pens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle/dual clutch transmission) or
neutral (manual transaxle) and set the
parking brake. If the air conditioning is
on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the vehicle or steam is coming out
from the bonnet, stop the engine. Do
not open the bonnet until the coolant
has stopped running or the steaming
has stopped. If there is no visible loss
of engine coolant and no steam, leave
the engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is operat-
ing. If the fan is not running, turn the
engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check
for coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air
conditioning had been in use, it is nor-
mal for cold water to be draining from
it when you stop).
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and we recom-
mend that you call an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine tem-
perature has returned to normal. Then,
if coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If over-
heating happens again, we recom-
mend that you call an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
CAUTION
• Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling sys-
tem and we recommend that the
system be checked by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
• When the engine overheats from
low engine coolant, suddenly
adding engine coolant may cause
cracks in the engine. To prevent
damage, add engine coolant
slowly in small quantities.
WARNING
Whilst the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts to prevent injury.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to blow out of the
opening and cause serious burns.
69
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut
wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment.
Pull up the luggage box cover to
reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tyre changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
whilst the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly and fasten the jack screw
fully.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
OVF061002
WARNING
- Changing
tyres
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tyre. The jack should
be used on firm level ground.
If you cannot find a firm level
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for
assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jacking
support.
(Continued)
What to do in an emergency
106
Removing and storing the spare
tyre
Turn the tyre hold-down wing bolt (1)
counterclockwise.
Store the tyre in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tyre and tools
from “rattling” whilst the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tyres
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) with manual transaxle
or P (Park) with automatic
transaxle/dual clutch transmission.
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
OVF061003
(Continued)
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death.
• Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
• Do not start or run the engine
whilst the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle whilst it is on
the jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
OED066033/H
611
What to do in an emergency
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tyre
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tyre
has been raised off the ground.
WARNING
-
Changing a tyre
• To prevent vehicle movement
whilst changing a tyre, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
chocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
OVF061004 OVF061005
What to do in an emergency
126
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tyre
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tyre just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tyre, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
OVF061007 OVF061008
613
What to do in an emergency
10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight. The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tyre to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fin-
gers again.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle. Go around the wheel tightening
every nut following the numerical
sequence shown in the image until
they are all tight. Then double-check
each nut for tightness. After changing
wheels, we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
WARNING
• Wheels and wheel covers may
have sharp edges. Handle
them carefully to avoid possi-
ble severe injury.
• Before putting the wheel into
place, be sure that there is
nothing on the hub or wheel
(such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.)
that interferes with the wheel
from fitting solidly against the
hub. If there is, remove it. If the
contact of the mounting sur-
face between the wheel and
hub is not good, the wheel
nuts could come loose and
cause loss of a wheel. Loss of
a wheel may result in losing
control of the vehicle. This
may cause serious injury or
death.
OVF061009
What to do in an emergency
146
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
9~11 kg.m (65~79 lb.ft)
If you have a tyre gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tyre pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tyre. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as pos-
sible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tyre in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tyre
from rattling whilst the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, we recommend that
you consult an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
WARNING
- Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tyre pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tyre. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to “Tyres and wheels” in
section 8.
615
What to do in an emergency
Important - use of compact spare
tyre (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tyre. This compact spare
tyre takes up less space than a reg-
ular-size tyre. This tyre is smaller
than a conventional tyre and is
designed for temporary use only.
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).
✽
NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tyre. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tyre,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a
higher speed could damage the
tyre.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough to avoid all hazards. Any
road hazard, such as a pothole or
debris, could seriously damage the
compact spare.
• Any continuous road use of this
tyre could result in tyre failure, loss
of vehicle control, and possible
personal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tyre.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tyre diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tyre and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tyre and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tyre in use at the same time.
WARNING
The compact spare tyre is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at the speed
over 50 mph (80 km/h). The
original tyre should be repaired
or replaced as soon as possible
to avoid failure of the spare
possibly leading to personal
injury or death.
What to do in an emergency
166
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash whilst the com-
pact spare tyre is installed.
• Do not use tyre chains on the com-
pact spare tyre. Because of the
smaller size, a tyre chain will not fit
properly. This could damage the
vehicle and result in loss of the
chain.
• The compact spare tyre should not
be installed on the front axle if the
vehicle must be driven in snow or
on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tyre
on any other vehicle because this
tyre has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tyre’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tyre.
Inspect your compact spare tyre
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tyres with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tyre should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tyres, snow tyres,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car compo-
nents may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tyre at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer whilst the com-
pact spare tyre is installed.
617
What to do in an emergency
Jack label 1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transaxle or move the
shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transaxle/
dual clutch transmission.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
• Type A
■ Example
• Type B
• Type C
OHYK065010
OHYK065011
OHYK064002
What to do in an emergency
186
EC Declaration of Conformity for Jack
JACKDOC14S
619
What to do in an emergency
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
(1) Low tyre pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
(2) Low tyre pressure position tell-
tale (Shown on the LCD display)
Each tyre, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tyre inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tyres of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tyre inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tyre inflation pressure for
those tyres.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tyre
pressure telltale when one or more
of your tyres is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low
tyre pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tyres as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-
nificantly under-inflated tyre causes
the tyre to overheat and can lead to
tyre failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tyre tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
dling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tyre mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tyre pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tyre pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tyre pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the TPMS malfunction
indicator remains illuminated after
blinking for approximately 1 minute,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tyre pressure as intend-
ed.
OVF061011R
OVF065012L
■ Type A
■ Type B
What to do in an emergency
206
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alter-
nate tyres or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from function-
ing properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tyres or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tyres
and wheels allow the TPMS to con-
tinue to function properly.
✽
NOTICE
If any of the below happens, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorised HYUNDAI repair-
er.
1.The low tyre pressure telltale/
TPMS malfunction indicator do
not illuminate for 3 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position or engine is running.
2.The TPMS malfunction indicator
remains illuminated after blinking
for approximately 1 minute.
3.The Low tyre pressure position
telltale remains illuminated.
Low tyre pressure tell-
tale
Low tyre pressure posi-
tion telltale
When the tyre pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated, one or more of your tyres is
significantly under-inflated. The low
tyre pressure position telltale light
will indicate which tyre is significant-
ly under-inflated by illuminating the
corresponding position light.
If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tyres as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tyres to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tyre inflation pres-
sure label located on the driver’s side
centre pillar outer panel. If you can-
not reach a service station or if the
tyre cannot hold the newly added air,
replace the low pressure tyre with a
spare tyre.
After you replace the low pressure
tyre with the spare tyre, one of the
following will happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continuous-
ly illuminated because the TPMS
sensor is not mounted on the spare
wheel. (changed tyre equipped with
a sensor not in the vehicle)
• The TPMS malfunction indicator will
remain continuously illuminated
whilst driving because the TPMS
sensor is not mounted on the spare
wheel. (changed tyre equipped with
a sensor in the vehicle)
621
What to do in an emergency
TPMS (Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an under infla-
tion warning at the same time as sys-
tem failure then the TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator remains illuminated
after blinking for approximately 1
minute and the low tyre pressure
position telltale will illuminate e.g. if
Front Left sensor fails, the TPMS mal-
function indicator remains illuminated
after blinking for approximately 1
minute, but if the Front Right, Rear
Left, or Rear Right tyre is under-inflat-
ed, the low tyre pressure position tell-
tales may illuminate together with the
TPMS malfunction indicator.
We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer to determine the cause of
the problem.
WARNING
- Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tyre pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tyres can cause the tyres
to overheat and fail.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tyre pressure telltale may
illuminate if the tyre pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tyre inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a proportional
lowering of tyre pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tyre inflation
pressure and adjust the tyres to
the recommended tyre inflation
pressure.
What to do in an emergency
226
Changing a tyre with TPMS
If you have a flat tyre, the low Tyre
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. We recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tyre
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tyre behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you have your tyres
serviced by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
After you replace the low pressure
tyre with the spare tyre, one of the
following will happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continuous-
ly illuminated because the TPMS
sensor is not mounted on the spare
wheel. (changed tyre equipped with
a sensor not in the vehicle)
• The TPMS malfunction indicator will
remain continuously illuminated
whilst driving because the TPMS
sensor is not mounted on the spare
wheel. (changed tyre equipped with
a sensor in the vehicle)
CAUTION
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around elec-
tric power supply cables or
radios transmitter such as at
police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if
snow chains are used or some
separate electronic devices
such as notebook computer,
mobile charger, remote starter
or navigation etc., are used in
the vehicle. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
CAUTION
We recommend that you use the
sealant approved by HYUNDAI.
The sealant on the tyre pressure
sensor and wheel shall be elem-
inated when you replace the
tyre with a new one.
623
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able identify a low
tyre by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tyre pressure
gauge to measure the tyre's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tyre that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tyre that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that
3 hour period).
Allow the tyre to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tyre is cold before inflating
to the recommended pressure.
A cold tyre means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tyre pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING
- TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tyre dam-
age caused by external factors
such as nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
CAUTION
We recommend that you use the
sealant approved by HYUNDAI if
your vehicle is equipped with a
tyre Pressure Monitoring
System. The liquid sealant can
damage the tyre pressure sen-
sors.
WARNING
- For EUROPE
• Do not modify the vehicle, it
may interfere with the TPMS
function.
• The wheels on the market do
not have a TPMS sensor.
For your safety, we recommend
that you use parts for replace-
ment from authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
• If you use the wheels on the
market, use a TPMS sensor
approved by a HYUNDAI
repaireer. If your vehicle is not
equipped with a TPMS sensor
or TPMS does not work proper-
ly, you may fail the periodic
vehicle inspection conducted
in your country.
❈
All vehicles sold in the
EUROPE market during below
period must be equipped with
TPMS.
- New model vehicle :
Nov. 1, 2012 ~
- Current model vehicle :
Nov. 1, 2014~ (Based on vehi-
cle registrations)
What to do in an emergency
246
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE (WITH TYREMOBILITYKIT, IF EQUIPPED)
Please read the instructions before
using the TyreMobilityKit.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
Introduction
With the TyreMobilityKit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tyre
puncture. The system of compressor
and sealing compound effectively
and comfortably seals most punc-
tures in a passenger car tyre caused
by nails or similar objects and rein-
flates the tyre. After you ensured that
the tyre is properly sealed you can
drive cautiously on the tyre (up to
120 miles (200 km)) at a max. speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h) in order to reach
a vehicle or tyre dealer to have the
tyre replaced. It is possible that some
tyres, especially with larger punc-
tures or damage to the sidewall, can-
not be sealed completely.
Air pressure loss in the tyre may
adversely affect tyre performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
manoeuvres, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use. The TyreMobilityKit is not
designed or intended as a perma-
nent tyre repair method and is to be
used for one tyre only.
This instruction shows you step by
step how to temporarily seal the
puncture simply and reliably.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the TyreMobilityKit".
OEL069019
WARNING
Do not use the TyreMobilityKit if
a tyre is severely damaged by
driving run flat or with insuffi-
cient air pressure.
Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the
tyre can be sealed using the
TyreMobilityKit.
Damage to the sidewall must
not be repaired due to safety rea-
sons.
OVF061010
OVF061017
■ Wagon
■ Sedan
625
What to do in an emergency
0. Speed restriction label
1. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. On/off switch
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tyre inflation pressure
8. Button for reducing tyre inflation
pressure
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
WARNING
• Before using the
TyreMobilityKit, follow the
instructions on the sealant bot-
tle.
• Remove the label with the
speed restriction from the
sealant bottle and apply it to the
steering wheel.
• Please note the expiry date on
the sealant bottle.
Components of the TyreMobilityKit
OEL069020
What to do in an emergency
266
Using the TyreMobilityKit
1. Filling the sealant
Strictly follow the specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
1) Shake the sealant bottle.
2) Screw connection hose 9 onto the
connector of the sealant bottle.
3) Ensure that button 8 on the com-
pressor is not pressed.
4) Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw filling hose 2 of the sealant
bottle onto the valve.
5) Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing of the compressor so that
the bottle is upright.
6) Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7) Connect between compressor
and the vehicle power outlet using
the cable and connectors.
8) With the ignition switched on:
Switch on the compressor and let it
run for approximately 3 minutes to fill
the sealant. The inflation pressure of
the tyre after filling is unimportant.
9) Switch off the compressor.
10) Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tyre valve.
Return the TyreMobilityKit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
WARNING
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation is possible if the
engine is left running in a poorly
ventilated or unventilated loca-
tion (such as inside a building).
OEL069019
627
What to do in an emergency
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approximately 2
miles (3 km) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tyre.
Producing the tyre inflation pres-
sure
1) After driving approximately 2
miles (3 km), stop at a suitable
location.
2) Connect connection hose 9 of the
compressor directly to the tyre
valve.
3) Connect between compressor
and the vehicle power outlet using
the cable and connectors.
4) Adjust the tyre inflation pressure
to the recommended tyre pres-
sure in section 8. With the ignition
switched on, proceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure: Switch on the compressor,
position I. To check the current
inflation pressure setting, briefly
switch off the compressor.
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure: Press the button 8 on the
compressor.
WARNING
Do not let the compressor run for
more than 10 minutes, otherwise
the device will overheat and may
be damaged.
WARNING
The tyre inflation pressure must
be at least 200 kPa (29 psi). If it
is not, do not continue driving.
Call for road side service or
towing.
CAUTION
Do not exceed a speed of 50
mph (80 km/h). If possible, do
not fall below a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
Whilst driving, if you experience
any unusual vibration, ride dis-
turbance or noise, reduce your
speed and drive with caution
until you can safely pull off of
the side of the road.
Call for road side service or tow-
ing.
CAUTION
If the inflation pressure is not
maintained, drive the vehicle a
second time, refer to
Distributing the sealant. Then
repeat steps 1 to 4.
Use of the TyreMobilityKit may
be ineffectual for tyre damage
larger than approximately 4 mm
(0.16 in).
We recommend that you contact
an authorised HYUNDAI repairer
if the tyre cannot be made road-
worthy with the tyre Mobility Kit.
What to do in an emergency
286
Notes on the safe use of the
TyreMobilityKit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
TyreMobilityKit away from moving
traffic. Place your warning triangle
in a prominent place to make pass-
ing vehicles aware of your location.
• To be sure your vehicle won't
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
• Only use the TyreMobilityKit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tyres. Do not use on motorcycles,
bicycles or any other type of tyres.
• Do not remove any foreign objects-
such as nails or screws -that have
penetrated the tyre.
• Before using the TyreMobilityKit,
read the precautionary advice
printed on the sealant bottle!
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the TyreMobilityKit
unattended whilst it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the TyreMobilityKit if the
ambient temperature is below -
30°C (-22°F).
• Do not use the sealing compound
after its expiration date which can
be found on the label of the bottle.
• Keep away from children.
WARNING
Have your tyre repaired as soon
as possible. The tyre may loose
air pressure at any time after
inflating with the TMK.
CAUTION
The tyre Mobility Kit is a tempo-
rary fix to the tyre and we rec-
ommend that the tyre should be
inspected by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer as soon as
possible.
CAUTION -TPMS
(if equipped)
When using Tyre Mobility Kit,
the tyre sealant can damage the
tyre pressure sensor. After
using the tyre Mobility Kit, we
recommend that the tyre pres-
sure sensor should be checked
by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
629
What to do in an emergency
Technical Data
System voltage: DC 12 V
Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating: max. 15 A
Suitable for use at temperatures:
-30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)
Max. working pressure:
6 bar (87 psi)
Size
Compressor: 168 x 150 x 68 mm
(6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in.)
Sealant bottle: 104 x ø 85 mm
(4.1 x ø 3.3 in.)
Compressor weight:
1.05 kg (2.31 lbs)
Sealant volume:
300 ml (18.3 cu. in.)
✽
NOTICE
Sealing compound and spare parts can
be obtained and replaced at an autho-
rised vehicle or tyre dealer. Empty seal-
ing compound bottles may be disposed
of at home. Liquid residue from the seal-
ing compound should be disposed of by
your vehicle or tyre dealer or in accor-
dance with local waste disposal regula-
tions.
What to do in an emergency
306
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer or a com-
mercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting
and towing procedures are necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle. The use
of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommend-
ed.
For trailer towing guidelines information,
refer to “Trailer towing” in section 5.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground (without dol-
lies) and the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-
sion components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lift-
ed, not the rear.
✽
NOTICE
If the EPB does not release normally, we
recommend that the system be checked
by an authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equip-
ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
OED066011
OED066012
dolly
OED066014
OED066013
631
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emer-
gency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-
tion.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
(if equipped)
1. Open the tailgate/trunk, and remove
the towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the
lower part of the cover on the front
bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is fully
secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
Emergency towing
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-
nal damage to the transaxle.
OVF061013
OVF061014
OVF061015
OVF061019
■ Rear
- Wagon
■ Front
- Sedan
What to do in an emergency
326
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by a HYUNDAI
authorised repairer or a commercial
tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-
tance and at low speed. Also, the wheels,
axles, power train, steering and brakes
must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the towing hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other con-
ditions from which the vehicle cannot
be driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequent-
ly.
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for tow-
ing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the
cable or chain to the towing hook
provided.
633
What to do in an emergency
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16
feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Depress the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake per-
formance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
OXM069009
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving manoeuvres which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and tow-
ing cable or chain. The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or dam-
age.
• If the disabled vehicle is unable
to be moved, do not forcibly con-
tinue the towing. We recommend
that you contact an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer or a commer-
cial tow truck service for assis-
tance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle dur-
ing towing.
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle/Dual clutch trans-
mission
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neu-
tral. Be sure the steering is
unlocked by placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position. A
driver must be in the towed vehi-
cle to operate the steering and
brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transaxle/dual clutch
transmission, limit the vehicle
speed to 10 mph (15 km/h) and
drive less than 1 mile (1.5 km)
when towing.
• Before towing, check the auto-
matic transaxle fluid leak under
your vehicle. If the automatic
transaxle/dual clutch transmis-
sion fluid is leaking, a flatbed
equipment or towing dolly must
be used.
634
What to do in an emergency
7
Engine compartment / 7-2
Maintenance services / 7-5
Owner maintenance / 7-8
Scheduled maintenance service / 7-10
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-11
Engine oil / 7-15
Engine coolant / 7-17
Brake/clutch fluid / 7-20
Washer fluid / 7-21
Fuel filter / 7-21
Air cleaner / 7-22
Climate control air filter / 7-24
Wiper blades 7-26
Battery / 7-29
Tyres and wheels / 7-33
Fuses / 7-44
Light bulbs / 7-60
Appearance care / 7-80
Emission control system / 7-86
Maintenance
Maintenance
27
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OVF071002R
1. Engine oil dipstick
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Radiator cap
5. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir
6. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Positive battery terminal
9. Negative battery terminal
10. Fuse box
* : if equipped
■
Petrol Engine (1.6L)
❈ The actual engine installation in your vehicle may differ from the illustration.
73
Maintenance
OVF071001R
1. Engine oil dipstick
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Radiator cap
5. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir
6. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Positive battery terminal
9. Negative battery terminal
10. Fuse box
* : if equipped
■
Petrol Engine (2.0L)
❈ The actual engine installation in your vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Maintenance
47
OVF075003R
1. Engine oil dipstick
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Radiator cap
5. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir
6. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
7. Fuel filter
8. Air cleaner
9. Positive battery terminal
10. Negative battery terminal
11. Fuse box
* : if equipped
■
Diesel Engine (1.7L)
❈ The actual engine installation in your vehicle may differ from the illustration.
75
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection proce-
dures.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational prob-
lems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or person-
al injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
We recommend in general that you have
your vehicle serviced by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been performed
on your vehicle in accordance with the
scheduled maintenance service charts
shown on the following pages.
You need this information to establish
your compliance with the servicing and
maintenance requirements of your vehi-
cle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a lack
of required maintenance are not covered
when your vehicle is covered by warran-
ty.
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect warran-
ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-
rate Warranty Booklet provided with
the vehicle. If you're unsure about any
servicing or maintenance procedure, we
recommend that the system be seviced
by an authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
Maintenance
67
Engine compartment precautions
(Diesel engine)
• The injector operates at high voltage
(maximum 200v). Therefore, the follow-
ing accidents may occur.
- Direct contact with the injector or
injector wiring may cause electric
shock or damage your muscle or
nerve system.
- The electromagnetic wave from the
operating injector may cause the arti-
ficial heart pacemaker to malfunction.
• Follow the safety tips provided below,
when you are checking the engine
room whilst the engine is running.
- Do not touch the injector, injector
wirings, and the engine computer
whilst the engine is running.
- Do not remove the injector connector
whilst the engine is running.
- People using pacemakers must not
go near the engine whilst the engine
is starting or running.
WARNING
- Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured whilst
performing some maintenance
procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, we recommend that the
system be servied by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
• Working under the bonnet with
the engine running is dangerous.
It becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine whilst work-
ing under the bonnet, make cer-
tain that you remove all jewelry
(especially rings, bracelets,
watches, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar
loose clothing before getting
near the engine or cooling fans.
CAUTION
• Do not put heavy objects or apply
excessive force on top of the
engine cover (if equipped) or fuel
related parts.
• When you inspect the fuel system
(fuel lines and fuel injection
devices), we recommend that you
contact an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
• Do not drive long time with the
engine cover (if equipped)
removed.
• When checking the engine room,
do not go near fire.
Fuel, washer fluid, etc. are flam-
mable oils that may cause fire.
• Before touching the battery, igni-
tion cables and electrical wiring,
you should disconnect the bat-
tery "-" terminal. You may get an
electric shock from the electric
current.
• When you remove the interior
trim cover with a flat bed (-) driv-
er, be careful not to damage the
cover.
• Be careful when you replace and
clean bulbs to avoid burns or
electrical shock.
77
Maintenance
WARNING
- Diesel Engine
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off engine.
High-pressure pump, rail, injectors
and high-pressure pipes are sub-
ject to high pressure even after the
engine stopped. The fuel jet pro-
duced by fuel leaks may cause seri-
ous injury, if it touches the body.
People using pacemakers should
not move than 30cm closer to the
ECU or wiring harness within the
engine room whilst engine is run-
ning, since the high currents in the
electronic engine control system
produce considerable magnetic
fields.
Maintenance
87
OWNER MAINTENANCE
We recommend that the following lists
are vehicle checks and inspections that
should be performed by the owner or an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer at the fre-
quencies indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehicle.
If you have any question, we recommend
that you consult an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labour, parts and
lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant reser-
voir.
• Check the windscreen washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tyres.
Whilst operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-
elling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hard-
to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the oper-
ation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check manual transaxle operation,
including clutch operation.
• Check automatic transaxle/dual clutch
transmission P (Park) function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air condition-
ing system during or after use is nor-
mal).
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause burns
or other serious injury.
79
Maintenance
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-
nals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tyres including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windscreen washer spray and
wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
with clean cloth dampened with wash-
er fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields
and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tyres and loose wheel
lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and
bonnet hinges.
• Lubricate door and bonnet locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle/dual clutch transmission link-
age and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake (and clutch) fluid
level.
Maintenance
107
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule
if the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply. If
any of the following conditions apply, fol-
low Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 32°C
(90°F).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than
“Normal Maintenance Schedule which is
provied in your Service Booklet.”
711
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the car is being
driven in severe conditions, more fre-
quent oil and filter changes are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-
ration and replace if necessary. Drive
belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted as neces-
sary.
Fuel filter (cartridge)
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an exces-
sive amount of foreign matter accumu-
lates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. We recommend that
the fuel filter be replaced by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections for leakage and damage. We
recommend that the fuel lines, fuel hoses
and connectionsr be replaced by an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
WARNING - Diesel only
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off engine.
High pressure pump, rail, injectors
and high pressure pipes are sub-
ject to high pressure even after the
engine stopped. The fuel jet pro-
duced by fuel leaks may cause seri-
ous injury, if it touch the body.
People using pacemakers should
not move than 30cm closer to the
ECU or wiring harness within the
engine room whilst engine is run-
ning, since the high currents in the
Common Rail system produce con-
siderable magnetic fields.
CAUTION
When you are inspecting the belt,
place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF or ACC position.
Maintenance
127
Vapour hose and fuel filler cap
The vapour hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those intervals
specified in the maintenance schedule.
Make sure that a new vapour hose or fuel
filler cap is correctly replaced.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-
cate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat dam-
age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and cou-
plings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
Air cleaner filter
We recommend that the air cleaner filter
be replaced by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
Spark plugs (for petrol engine)
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
Valve clearance
(for petrol engine 1.6L)
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
Cooling system
Check the cooling system parts, such as
radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
WARNING
Do not disconnect and inspect
spark plugs when the engine is hot.
You may burn yourself.
713
Maintenance
Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not be
checked under normal usage conditions.
But in severe conditions, we recommend
that the fluid be replaced by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer in accordance to
the scheduled maintenance.
✽
NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid colour is basi-
cally red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic
transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.
It is normal condition and you should
not judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed colour.
Dual clutch transmission fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the dual clutch transmission fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir. The level should be between
“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of
the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
specification.
Brake pads, calipers and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
For more information on checking the
pads or lining wear limit, refer to the
Hyundai web site.
(http://brakeman
ual.hmc.co.kr)
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunc-
tion and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
Maintenance
147
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system includ-
ing the EPB actuator, wiring and connec-
tors.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-
essary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant/
compressor (if equipped)
Check the air conditioning lines and con-
nections for leakage and damage.
715
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capac-
ities” in section 8.)
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
OVF071004R OVFC071005
CAUTION - Diesel engine
Overfilling the engine oil may cause
severe dieseling due to churning
effect. It may lead to engine damage
accompanied with abrupt engine
speed increment, combustion noise
and white smoke emission.
CAUTION
• Do not overfill the engine oil. It
may damage the engine.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil. If
you drop the engine oil on the
engine room, wipe it off immedi-
ately.
• When you wipe the oil level
gauge, you should wipe it with a
clean cloth. When mixed with
debris, it can cause engine dam-
age.
Maintenance
167
Changing the engine oil and filter
We recommend that the engine oil and
filter be replaced by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
WARNING
Prolonged and repeated contact
with used engine oils may result in
serious skin disorders including
dermatitis and cancer. Avoid con-
tact with skin as far as possible and
always wash thoroughly after any
contact. Keep used oils out of
reach of children. It is illegal to pol-
lute drains, water courses and soil.
Use only authorised waste collec-
tion facilities including civic ameni-
ty sites and garages for the dispos-
al of used oil and oil filters. If in
doubt, contact the local authority
for disposal instructions.
717
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-
tory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant concentration level at least once
a year, at the beginning of the winter sea-
son, and before travelling to a colder cli-
mate.
When the engine overheats from low
engine coolant, suddenly adding engine
coolant may cause cracks in the engine.
To prevent damage, add engine coolant
slowly in small quantities.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the radi-
ator cap whilst the engine is
operating or hot. Doing so might
lead to cooling system and
engine damage and could result
in serious personal injury from
escaping hot coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back whilst
the pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap,
using a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Even if the engine is not operat-
ing, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug whilst the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
CAUTION
Do not drive with no engine
coolant. It may cause water pump
failure and engine seizure, etc.
Maintenance
187
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-
rated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks on
the side of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (De-ionised) water. Bring the
level to F (MAX), but do not overfill. If fre-
quent coolant refill is required, we rec-
ommend that the system be inspected by
an authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only de-
ionised water or soft water for your
vehicle and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improp-
er coolant mixture can result in serious
malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be pro-
tected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freez-
ing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-
lowing table.
OVF071006
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
WARNING
The electric motor (cool-
ing fan) is controlled by
engine coolant tempera-
ture, refrigerant pres-
sure and vehicle speed.
It may sometimes operate even
when the engine is not running.
Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling fan
so that you are not injured by a
rotating fan blades. As the engine
coolant temperature decreases, the
electric motor will automatically
shut off. This is a normal condition.
If your vehicle is equipped with
GDI, the electric motor (cooling fan)
may operate until you disconnect
the negative battery cable.
719
Maintenance
Changing the coolant
We recommend that the coolant be
replaced by an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer according to the Maintenance
Schedule.
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pres-
sure causing serious injury.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth or fabric around
the radiator cap before refilling the
coolant in order to prevent the
coolant from overflowing into
engine parts such as alternator.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windscreen and may
cause loss of vehicle control or
damage to paint and body trim.
OVF071007
Maintenance
207
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-
odically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake fluid, clean the area around
the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent
brake fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulated
mileage. This is a normal condition asso-
ciated with the wear of the brake linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low, we
recommend that the system be checked
by an authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capac-
ities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
✽
NOTICE
Before removing the brake/clutch filler
cap, read the warning on the cap.
WARNING -
Brake/clutch
fluid
When changing and adding
brake/clutch fluid, handle it careful-
ly. Do not let it come in contact with
your eyes. If brake fluid should
come in contact with your eyes,
immediately flush them with a large
quantity of fresh tap water. Have
your eyes examined by a doctor as
soon as possible.
WARNING - Loss of
brake/clutch fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
we recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
WARNING
Clean filler cap before removing.
Use only DOT3 or DOT4 brake/
clutch fluid from a sealed container.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to
contact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result. Brake
fluid, which has been exposed to
open air for an extended time
should never be used as its quality
cannot be guaranteed. It should be
disposed of properly. Don't put in
the wrong kind of fluid. A few drops
of mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in your brake system can
damage brake system parts.
OVF071008R
721
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid level
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary.
Also, add washer fluid when the low
washer fluid level warning indicator ( )
illuminates on the instrument cluster.
Plain water may be used if washer fluid is
not available. However, use washer sol-
vent with anti-freezing characteristics in
cold climates to prevent freezing.
Draining water from fuel filter
The fuel filter for diesel engine plays an
important role of separating water from
fuel and accumulating the water in its
bottom.
If water accumulates in the fuel filter, the
warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
If this warning light illuminates,
we recommend that the system
be serviced by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
OVF071009
WARNING -
Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windscreen and may
cause loss of vehicle control or
damage to paint and body trim.
• Windscreen Washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under cer-
tain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or occupants could occur.
• Windscreen washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contact-
ing windscreen washer fluid.
Serious injury or death could
occur.
CAUTION
If the water accumulated in the fuel
filter is not drained at proper times,
damages to the major parts such as
the fuel system can be caused by
water permeation in the fuel filter.
FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)
Maintenance
227
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting
the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed air.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
OVF071011
OVF071010 OVF071012
723
Maintenance
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-
ment more often than the usual recom-
mended intervals.
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in exces-
sive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner fil-
ter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• We recommend that you use
parts for replacement from an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
Maintenance
247
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
If the vehicle is operated in the severely
air-polluted cities or on dusty rough
roads for a long period, it should be
inspected more frequently and replaced
earlier. When you, the owner, replace the
climate control air filter, replace it per-
forming the following procedure, and be
careful to avoid damaging other compo-
nents.
Replace the filter according to the main-
tenance Schedule.
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box and remove the
support strap (1).
2. With the glove box open, remove the
stoppers on both sides.
OVF071013R OVF071014R
725
Maintenance
3. Remove the climate control air filter
case whilst pressing the lock on the
right side of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽
NOTICE
Install a new climate control air filter in
the correct direction with the arrow
symbol(
↓
) facing downwards.
Otherwise, the climate control effects
may decrease, possibly with a noise.
OVF071015R OBK075017
Maintenance
267
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
✽
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-
matic car washes have been known to
make the windscreen difficult to clean.
Contamination of either the windscreen
or the wiper blades with foreign matter
can reduce the effectiveness of the wind-
screen wipers. Common sources of con-
tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-
ing properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean ade-
quately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use petrol, kerosene,
paint thinner, or other solvents on
or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manual-
ly.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
1JBA5122/H
727
Maintenance
Front windscreen wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm.
✽
NOTICE
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windscreen, since it may
chip or crack the windscreen.
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then pull
down the blade assembly and remove
it.
3. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
4. Return the wiper arm to the original
position.
OHM078059/H
OYF079061R OHG070043/H
Maintenance
287
Rear window wiper blade (wagon)
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the
wiper blade assembly.
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the centre part into the slot in
the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it slight-
ly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or
other components, we recommend that
the wiper blade be replaced by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
OED076040
OED076041
729
Maintenance
BATTERY
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the bat-
tery cables.
✽
NOTICE
Basically equipped battery is mainte-
nance free type. If your vehicle is
equipped with the battery marked with
LOWER and UPPER on the side, you
can check the electrolyte level. The elec-
trolyte level should be between LOWER
and UPPER. If the electrolyte level is
low, it needs to add distilled (demineral-
ized) water (Never add sulfuric acid or
other electrolyte). When refill, be care-
ful not to splash the battery and adja-
cent components. And do not overfill the
battery cells. It can cause corrosion on
other parts. After then ensure that tight-
en the cell caps. We recommend that you
contact an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
WARNING
- Battery
dangers
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
(Continued)
OVF071017R
Pb
Maintenance
307
❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
Battery capacity label
1. CMF65L-BCI : The HYUNDAI model
name of battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity
(in Ampere hours)
4. 92RC : The nominal reserve capacity
(in min.)
5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 440A : The cold-test current in
amperes by EN
(Continued)
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a
pain or a burning sensa-
tion, get medical attention
immediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
The battery contains lead.
Do not dispose of it after
use. Please return the bat-
tery to a HYUNDAI autho-
rised repairer to be recy-
cled.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
tery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Failure to follow the above warn-
ings can result in serious bodily
injury or death.
CAUTION
If you connect unauthorised elec-
tronic devices to the battery, the
battery may be discharged. Never
use unauthorised devices.
OJD072039
■ Example
731
Maintenance
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
whilst the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load whilst the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-
30A for two hours.
WARNING
- Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,
or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charg-
ing, and stop or reduce the charg-
ing rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery ter-
minal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery termi-
nal.
• Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the
engine.
• The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed
last when the battery is discon-
nected.
Maintenance
327
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window (See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Drive position memory system
(See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
• Power tailgate (See section 4)
733
Maintenance
TYRES AND WHEELS
Tyre care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tyre
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tyre inflation
pressures
All tyre pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tyres are cold. “Cold Tyres” means
the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tyre
wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tyre and wheels” in section
8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
OVF081002/H
WARNING - Tyre underin-
flation
Severe underinflation (70 kPa
(10 psi) or more) can lead to
severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tyre failures that can
result in the loss of vehicle con-
trol leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
CAUTION
• Under inflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tyre pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tyre frequently needs refilling,
we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
• Over inflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the centre of the tyre tread,
and a greater possibility of
damage from road hazards.
Maintenance
347
Checking tyre inflation pressure
Check your tyres once a month or
more.
Also, check the tyre pressure of the
spare tyre.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tyre pressure. You can not tell if your
tyres are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tyres may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tyre's inflation pressure
when the tyres are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
WARNING - Tyre inflation
Over inflation or under inflation
can reduce tyre life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tyre failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tyre pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tyre pressure when the
tyres are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (1
mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tyre each time you
check the pressure of other
tyres.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tyres can cause
accidents. If your tread is
badly worn, or if your tyres
have been damaged, replace
them.
CAUTION
• Warm tyres normally exceed
recommended cold tyre pres-
sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tyres to adjust the pres-
sure or the tyres will be under-
inflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tyre
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
735
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tyre
valve stem. Press the tyre gauge
firmly onto the valve to get a pres-
sure measurement. If the cold tyre
inflation pressure matches the rec-
ommended pressure on the tyre and
loading information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the pres-
sure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tyre, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
centre of the tyre valve. Recheck the
tyre pressure with the tyre gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
Tyre rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tyres be rotated
every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tyres for
correct balance.
When rotating tyres, check for
uneven wear and damage. Abnormal
wear is usually caused by incorrect
tyre pressure, improper wheel align-
ment, out-of-balance wheels, severe
braking or severe cornering. Look for
bumps or bulges in the tread or side
of tyre. Replace the tyre if you find
either of these conditions. Replace
the tyre if fabric or cord is visible.
After rotation, be sure to bring the
front and rear tyre pressures to spec-
ification and check lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tyre and wheels” in section
8.
WARNING
• Inspect your tyres frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tyre pressure gauge.
• Tyres with too much or too lit-
tle pressure wear unevenly
causing poor handling, loss of
vehicle control, and sudden
tyre failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
The recommended cold tyre
pressure for your vehicle can
be found in this manual and on
the tyre label located on the
driver's side centre pillar.
• Worn tyres can cause acci-
dents. Replace tyres that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tyre.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every
time you check the pressure
of the other tyres on your
vehicle.
Maintenance
367
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tyres are rotated.
✽
NOTICE
Rotate radial tyres that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
Wheel alignment and tyre balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tyre
life and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tyre
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
WARNING
• Do not use the compact spare
tyre for tyre rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tyres under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
S2BLA790
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
■ Without a spare tyre
■ With a full-size spare tyre (if equipped)
■ Directional tyres (if equipped)
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
737
Maintenance
Tyre replacement
If the tyre is worn evenly, a tread
wear indicator will appear as a solid
band across the tread. This shows
there is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of
tread left on the tyre. Replace the
tyre when this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tyre.
WARNING
- Replacing
tyres
• Driving on worn-out tyres is
very hazardous and will
reduce braking effectiveness,
steering accuracy, and trac-
tion.
• Your vehicle is equipped with
tyres designed to provide for
safe ride and handling capa-
bility. Do not use a size and
type of tyre and wheel that is
different from the one that is
originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety
and performance of your vehi-
cle, which could lead to han-
dling failure or rollover and
serious injury. When replacing
the tyres, be sure to equip all
four tyres with the tyre and
wheel of the same size, type,
tread, brand and load-carrying
capacity.
(Continued)
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
CAUTION
When replacing the tyres,
recheck and tighten the wheel
nuts after driving about 1,000
km (620 miles). If the steering
wheel shakes or the vehicle
vibrates whilst driving, the tyre
is out of balance. Align the tyre
balance. If the problem is not
solved, we recommend that you
contact an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
Maintenance
387
Compact spare tyre replacement
(if equipped)
A compact spare tyre has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tyre.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tyre.
The replacement compact spare tyre
should be the same size and design
tyre as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tyre
wheel. The compact spare tyre is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tyre wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tyre.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
(Continued)
• The use of any other tyre size
or type may seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clear-
ance, stopping distance, body
to tyre clearance, snow tyre
clearance, and speedometer
reliability.
• It is best to replace all four
tyres at the same time. If that
is not possible, or necessary,
then replace the two front or
two rear tyres as a pair.
Replacing just one tyre can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tyre
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tyres, all 4
tyres must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tyres of a dif-
ferent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) to work irregularly.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tyre clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
739
Maintenance
Tyre traction
Tyre traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tyres, tyres that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tyres should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tyre maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tyre wear. If you find a tyre is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tyres installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tyre life. Additionally, a tyre should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tyre sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tyre and also provides
the tyre identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tyre in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tyre size designation
A tyre’s sidewall is marked with a tyre
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tyres for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tyre size designation
mean.
Example tyre size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tyre size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
205/60R16 92V
P - Applicable vehicle type (tyres
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tyres have this marking).
205 - Tyre width in millimeters.
60 - Aspect ratio. The tyre’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tyre construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
Maintenance
407
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
92 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tyre can carry.
V - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.0JX16
7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tyre speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger cars. The speed
rating is part of the tyre size desig-
nation on the sidewall of the tyre.
This symbol corresponds to that
tyre's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tyre life
(TIN : Tyre Identification Number)
Any tyres that are over 6 years,
based on the manufacturing date,
tyre strength and performance,
decline with age naturally (even
unused spare tyres). Therefore, the
tyres (including the spare tyre)
should be replaced by new ones.You
can find the manufacturing date on
the tyre sidewall (possibly on the
inside of the wheel), displaying the
DOT Code. The DOT Code is a
series of numbers on a tyre consist-
ing of numbers and English letters.
The manufacturing date is designat-
ed by the last four digits (characters)
of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tyre size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1615 represents
that the tyre was produced in the
16th week of 2015.
741
Maintenance
4. Tyre ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric are in the tyre. Tyre
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tyre, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tyre. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tyre and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tyre. When
replacing the tyres on the vehicle,
always use a tyre that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tyre.
7. Uniform tyre quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tyre sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tyre when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tyre
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tyre graded
100.
The relative performance of tyres
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
because of variations in driving
habits, service practices and differ-
ences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle
tyres.The tyres available as standard
or optional equipment on your vehi-
cles may vary with respect to grade.
WARNING - Tyre age
Tyres degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tyres generally be replaced
after six (6) years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot cli-
mates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the
aging process. Failure to follow
this Warning can result in sud-
den tyre failure, which could
lead to a loss of control and an
accident involving serious
injury or death.
Maintenance
427
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tyres ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tyre marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tyre’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tyre to
degenerate and reduce tyre life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tyre failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by the
law.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tyre is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING - Tyre
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tyre is established for a tyre that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tyre failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
743
Maintenance
Low aspect ratio tyre
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tyres, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tyres
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare with normal tyres.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tyre is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tyre
of the low aspect ratio tyre is
easier to be damaged. So, follow
the instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tyres and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tyres and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tyres and wheels are not dam-
aged.
- If the tyre is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tyre condition or contact an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
- To prevent damage to the tyre,
inspect the tyre condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the
tyre damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slight-
est hint of tyre damage, even
though you cannot see the
tyre damage with your own
eyes, have the tyre checked or
replaced because the tyre
damage may cause air leak-
age from the tyre.
• If the tyre is damaged by driv-
ing on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tyre infor-
mation on the tyre sidewall.
Maintenance
447
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
This vehicle has 3 (or 4) fuse panels, one
located in the driver’s side panel bolster,
others in the engine compartment near
the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will be
melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, discon-
nect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-
cates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and we recommend
that you consult an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type
for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,
and multi fuse type for higher amperage
ratings.
✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
WARNING
- Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum
foil instead of the proper fuse -
even as a temporary repair. It may
cause extensive wiring damage
and a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
OVF071101
Normal
Normal
■ Blade type
■ Cartridge type
■ Multi fuse type
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
Normal
Blown
745
Maintenance
Inner panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, we recommend that you
consult an authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigar lighter fuse.
OVF071018R
OVF071019R
CAUTION
• When replacing a blown fuse or
relay with a new one, make sure
the new fuse or relay fits tightly
into the clips. The incomplete fas-
tening fuse or relay may cause
the vehicle wiring and electric
systems damage and a possible
fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays and
terminals fastened with bolts or
nuts. The fuses, relays and termi-
nals may be fastened incomplete-
ly, and it may cause a possible
fire. If fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, consult with an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause con-
tact failure and system malfunc-
tion.
Maintenance
467
If the headlights or other electrical com-
ponents do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse block in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
Fuse switch
Always, put the fuse switch at the ON
position.
If you move the switch to the OFF posi-
tion, some items such as audio and digi-
tal clock must be reset and transmitter
(or smart key) may not work properly.
Engine compartment panel fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by press-
ing the tap and pulling up.
OVF071020R
OVF071021R
OVF071023
Diesel only
CAUTION
Always place the fuse switch in the
ON position whilst driving the vehi-
cle.
747
Maintenance
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the engine com-
partment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, we recommend that
you consult an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel on the right
side in the engine compartment.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽
NOTICE
If the multi fuse or main fuse is blown,
we recommend that you consult an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer.
OVF071024R
OLM079025
CAUTION
After checking the fuse box in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse box cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water leaking in.
Maintenance
487
Fuse/Relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can
find the fuse/relay label describing
fuse/relay name and capacity.
✽
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your vehi-
cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse box on your
vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
OVF071025R
OVF073110
749
Maintenance
Instrument panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
1 20A
POWER
OUTLET 2
Console Power Outlet, Rear Power Outlet
2 30A
POWER
TAIL GATE
Power Tail Gate
3 10A MODULE 1
Smart Key Control Module, BCM, Audio, AMP, JBL AMP, A/V & Navigation Head Unit,
DC-DC Converter (Audio/AMP), Over Head Console Lamp, Parking Guide System,
Power Outside Mirror Switch
4 10A MODULE 4
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY.3, RLY. 12), Stop Lamp Switch, Multipurpose Check
Connector, Active Air Flap Unit, Fuel Filter Warning Sensor (D4FD)
5 7.5A MODULE 3
Smart Key Control Module, BCM, Panorama Sunroof, Rain Sensor, Parking Guide
System, Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module, ICM Relay Box (Headlamp Washer
Relay)
6 15A
POWER
OUTLET 1
Front Power Outlet
7 20A P/SEAT PASS Passenger Manual Switch
8 10A HTD MIRR Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, ECM/PCM, A/C Control Module
9 25A AMP AMP, JBL AMP, DC-DC Converter (AMP)
10 25A WIPER FRT
ICM Relay Box (Rain Sensor Relay), Multifunction Switch,
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 7), Front Wiper Motor
11 7.5A A/CON
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 4), EMS Box (Fuel Heater Relay),
Diesel Box (PTC Heater Relay #2/#3), A/C Control Module
12 15A
STEERING
WHEEL HEATER
Steering Wheel Heater
Maintenance
507
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
13 25A P/WDW LH
Power Window LH Relay, Power Window Main Switch,
Driver/Passenger Safety Power Window Module,
Rear Safety Power Window Module LH, Rear Power Window Switch LH
14 10A T/GATE OPEN
Tail Gate Open Relay, Boot Lid Latch (SEDAN), Power Tail Gate Latch/Tail Gate Latch
(WAGON), ICM Relay Box (Fuel Filler Lock/Unlock Relay)
15 30A P/SEAT DRV Driver IMS Module, Driver Manual Switch
16 7.5A MODULE 2
BCM, DC-DC Converter (Audio/AMP), Audio, Electro Chromic Mirror, Lane Keeping Assist
Module, A/C Control Module, Smart Parking Assist Module, Parking Assist Module, ISG
Switch, Head Lamp Leveling Switch, Head Lamp LH/RH, Driver IMS Module, Auto Head
Lamp Levelling Device Module, Head Lamp Levelling Device Actuator LH/RH, Rear Seat
Warmer LH/RH, Tyre Pressure Monitoring Module, Driver/Passenger CCS Control
Module, ATM Shift Lever IND., Console Switch, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Modul
17 15A WIPER RR Rear Wiper Relay, Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch, Rear Curtain Module
18 10A BRAKE SWITCH Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module
19 25A P/WDW RH
Power Window RH Relay, Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch,
Driver/Passenger Safety Power Window Module, Rear Safety Power Window Module RH,
Rear Power Window Switch RH
20 10A PDM 2 Smart Key Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch, Immobiliser Module
21 7.5A MODULE 5
Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror,
Active Air Flap Unit, Rear Seat Warmer Switch LH/RH, Auto Light & Photo Sensor,
Sport Mode Switch, Key Solenoid
751
Maintenance
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
22 20A IG1 E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Fuse - F27, F28, F29, F30, F31)
23 10A MODULE 6
Instrument Cluster, Front Seat Warmer Switch LH/RH, Adaptive Front Lighting Module,
Electric Parking Brake Module
24 10A MDPS EPS Control Module
25 20A DR LOCK
Door Lock/Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box (Dead Lock Relay), Driver/Passenger Door Lock
Actuator, Rear Door Lock Actuator LH/RH
26 15A S/HEATER FRT Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Modul
27 10A INTERIOR LAMP
Driver/Passenger Door Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp, Room Lamp, Glove Box Lamp,
Luggage Lamp, Driver/Passenger Foot Lamp, Boot Room Lamp, Rear Personal Lamp
LH/RH, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Door Warning Switch
28 15A MULTI MEDIA Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, DC-DC Converter (Audio)
29 15A A/BAG SRS Control Module
30 10A CURTAIN Rear Curtain Module
31 7.5A MEMORY 1
Instrument Cluster, Tyre Pressure Monitoring Module, Rear Curtain Module,
Tilt Sensor, A/C Control Module, BCM, Ultrasonic Instrusion Protection Sensor,
Siren, Driver IMS Module, Power Outside Mirror Switch
32 7.5A A/BAG IND Instrument Cluster
33 7.5A PDM 3 Smart Key Control Module, Immobiliser Module
Maintenance
527
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
34 10A S/HEATER RR Rear Seat Warmer Modul LH/RH
35 7.5A MEMORY 2 RF Receiver
36 10A PDM 1 Smart Key Control Module
37 7.5A START
W/O Button Start : E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 8),
Ignition Lock Switch, Transaxle Range Switch
With Button Start : ECM/PCM, Transaxle Range Switch
38 20A SUNROOF Panorama Sunroof
753
Maintenance
Engine compartment
OVF071026R
OVF071028R
OVF073112L
Maintenance
547
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
MULTI
FUSE
1 80A MDPS EPS Control Module
2 60A B+ 1
I/P Junction Box (IPS 0 (4CH), IPS 1 (4CH), IPS 2 (2CH),
Fuse - F13/F14/F19/F20/F21/F26/F36)
3 40A ABS 1 ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
4 40A ABS 2 ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
5 40A IG 2
RLY. 9 (Start Relay), Ignition Switch (W/O Button Start),
RLY. 6 (PDM 4 (IG2) Relay, With Button Start)
6 40A BLOWER RLY. 4 (Blower Relay)
7 40A RR HTD RLY. 11 (Rear Defogger Relay)
8 60A B+ 2 I/P Junction Box (IPS 3 (4CH), IPS 4 (4CH), Fuse - F2/F7/F9/F15)
FUSE
9 30A AMP DC-DC Converter (AMP)
10 30A EPB 1 Electric Parking Brake Module
11 30A EPB 2 Electric Parking Brake Module
12 50A C/FAN RLY. 1 (C/FAN LO Relay), RLY. 2 (C/FAN HI Relay)
13 15A
FRONT
DEICER
ICM Relay Box (Front Deicer Relay)
Engine compartment main fuse panel
755
Maintenance
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
FUSE
14 15A HORN RLY. 5 (Horn Relay), ICM Relay Box (Buglar Alarm Horn Relay)
15 15A STOP LAMP RLY. 12 (HAC Relay), Stop Signal Relay
16 20A
HEAD LAMP
WAHSER
ICM Relay Box (Head Lamp Washer Relay)
17 20A TCU 2 D4FD & A/T : TCM
18 40A IG 1
W/O Button Start : Ignition Switch,
With Button Start : RLY. 8 (PDM 2 (ACC) Relay)/RLY. 10 (PDM 3 (IG1) Relay
19 40A EMS BOX EMS Box
20 50A B+ 3 I/P Junction Box (Leak Current Autocut Device, Fuse - F18/F25/F30/F34/F38)
21 10A A/CON SW A/C Control Module
22 10A WIPER PCM/ECM
23 15A TCU 1 A/T - TCM (D4FD), Transaxle Range Switch
24 10A B/UP LP
M/T - Back-Up Lamp Switch, A/T - Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, Rear
Curtain Module, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Electro Chromic Mirror, IPS Control
Module
25 15A ECU 3 RLY. 9 (D4FD, Start Relay), ECM/PCM, Air Flow Sensor (D4FD)
26 10A ABS 3 ESC Control Module
Maintenance
567
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
FUSE
27 15A IGN COIL 2 G4FD/G4NC - Ignition Coil #1/ #2/ #3/ #4, Condenser
28
15A (GSL)
30A (DSL)
F/PUMP (GSL)
(DSL)
F/PUMP (GSL),
FUEL HTR (DSL)
Fuel Pump Relay, Fuel Filter Heater Relay
29 15A FUEL HTR (DSL)
G4FD : ECM
G4NA/G4NC : PCM (A/T), ECM (M/T)
30 10A ECU 4 SPARE
31 10A SPARE G4NA - Injector #1/#2/#3/#4
32 10A INJECTOR
G4FD : ECM
G4NA : Fuel Pump Relay
G4NC : Fuel Pump Relay, PCM (A/T), ECM (M/T)
D4FD : Oil Level Sensor, Fuel Pressure Regulating Valve
33 20A ECU 2 G4NA : Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4, Condenser
34 20A IGN COIL 1
G4FD/D4FD : ECM
G4NA/G4NC : PCM (A/T), ECM (M/T)
35 10A ECU 1
G4FD : Oil Control Valve #1/ #2, Oil Level Sensor, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 1)
G4NA/G4NC : Oil Control Valve #1/ #2, Camshaft Position Sensor
(Intake/Exhaust), E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 1)
D4FD : E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 1), Diesel Box (PTC Heater Relay#1),
Lambda Sensor, VGT Control Solenoid Valve
36 10A SENSOR 2
G4FD : Oxygen Sensor (UP/DOWN), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, Purge
Control Solenoid Valve
G4NA/G4NC : Oxygen Sensor (UP/DOWN), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve,
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
D4FD : Camshaft Position Sensor, EGR Cooling Bypass Solenoid Valve, Diesel Box
(Glow Relay)
757
Maintenance
No. Symbol Relay Name Type
37 C/FAN LO RELAY PLUG MICRO
38 C/FAN HI RELAY PLUG MICRO
39 ESS RELAY PLUG MICRO
40 BLOWER RELAY PLUG MICRO
41 HORN RELAY PLUG MICRO
42 PDM 4 (IG2) RELAY PLUG MICRO
43 FRONT WIPER RELAY PLUG MICRO
44
PDM 2 (ACC) RELAY PLUG MICRO
BURGLAR ALARM
HORN RELAY
PLUG MICRO
45 START RELAY PLUG MICRO
46 PDM 3 (IG1) RELAY PLUG MICRO
47 RR HTD RELAY PLUG MINI
Maintenance
587
Engine compartment sub fuse panel
(Diesel Engine)
OVF071027
OVF073111
759
Maintenance
No. Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected component
1 GLOW 80A Glow Relay
2 PTC HEATER #1 50A PTC Heater Relay #1
3 PTC HEATER #2 50A PTC Heater Relay #2
4 PTC HEATER #3 50A PTC Heater Relay #3
No. Relay Name Relay Type
1 Glow Relay MINI PLUG
2 PTC Heater Relay #1 MINI PLUG
3 PTC Heater Relay #2 MINI PLUG
4 PTC Heater Relay #3 MINI PLUG
Engine compartment sub fuse panel (Diesel Engine)
Circuit
Relay Type
Maintenance
607
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽
NOTICE
After driving in heavy rain or washing
the vehicle, headlight and taillight lenses
could appear frosty. This condition is
caused by the temperature difference
between the lamp inside and outside.
This is similar to the condensation on
your windows inside your vehicle during
rain and does not indicate a problem
with your vehicle. If the water leaks into
the lamp bulb circuitry, we recommend
that the system be checked by an autho-
rised HYUNDAI repairer.
WARNING
- Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position and turn off
the lights to avoid sudden move-
ment of the vehicle and burning
your fingers or getting an electric
shock.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
CAUTION
If you don't have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
we recommend that you consult an
authorised HYUNDAI repairer. In
many cases, it is difficult to replace
vehicle light bulbs because other
parts of the vehicle must be
removed before you can get to the
bulb. This is especially true if you
have to remove the headlight
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
761
Maintenance
Headlight, position light, turn sig-
nal light and front fog light bulb
replacement
(1) Headlight (Low)
Headlight (High, if equipped)
- for HID, HID AFLS type
(2) Static bending light
(3) Headlight (High)
Flashing headlight
- HID, HID AFLS (if equipped)
(4) Front turn signal light
(5) Position light
(6) Dedicated lamp (DRL) (if equipped)
(7) Front fog light (if equipped)
Headlight (Low/High), static bending
light and turn signal light
1. Turn off the engine and open the bon-
net.
2. Remove the front bumper.
3. Remove the headlight assembly from
the body of the vehicle. If you can
reach the bulb without removing the
headlight assembly, you do not need
to do step 2 and 3.
4. Disconnect the power connector(s)
from the back of the headlight assem-
bly.
Headlight (Low/High) and
Static bending light
5. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
6. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-
connector.
7. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
8. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
9. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
10. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with
the slots in the assembly. Push the
socket into the assembly and turn the
socket clockwise.
OVF075030
OVF075056K
High
static bending
Low
Maintenance
627
11. Connect the headlight bulb socket-
connector.
12. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
✽
NOTICE
We recommend that the headlight aim-
ing be adjusted after an accident or
after the headlight assembly is rein-
stalled at a authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
Turn signal light
Follow the steps 1 to 4 from the previous
page.
5. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
8. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
OHD076046
WARNING -
Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized
gas that will produce flying pieces
of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids. Never touch the glass with
bare hands. Residual oil may cause
the bulb to overheat and burst
when lit. A bulb should be operated
only when installed in a headlight.
• If a bulb is damaged or cracked,
replace it immediately and carefully
dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
OVF075107K
763
Maintenance
Front fog light bulbs
If the light bulb does not operate, we rec-
ommend that you checked an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Headlight (HID type), position light
and dedicated lamp
If the light bulb does not operate, we rec-
ommend that you checked an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
✽
NOTICE
HID lamps have superior performance
vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps are esti-
mated by the manufacturer to last twice
as long or longer than halogen bulbs
depending on their frequency of use.
They will probably require replacement
at some point in the life of the vehicle.
Cycling the headlamps on and off more
than typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent lamps.
If a headlamp goes out after a period of
operation but will immediately relight
when the headlamp switch is cycled it is
likely the HID lamp needs to be
replaced. HID lighting components are
more complex than conventional halo-
gen bulbs thus have higher replacement
cost.
WARNING - HID Headlight
low beam (if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON bulb)
due to electric shock danger. If the
low beam (XENON bulb) is not
working, we recommend that you
checked an authorised HYUNDAI
repairer.
Maintenance
647
Headlight and front fog light aim-
ing (for Europe)
Headlight aiming
1. Inflate the tyres to the specified pres-
sure and remove any loads from the
vehicle except the driver, spare tyre,
and tools.
2. The vehicle should be placed on a flat
floor.
3. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines pass-
ing through respective head lamp cen-
tres) and a horizontal line (Horizontal
line passing through centre of head
lamps) on the screen.
4. With the head lamp and battery in nor-
mal condition, aim the head lamps so
the brightest portion falls on the hori-
zontal and vertical lines.
5. To aim the low beam left or right, turn
the driver (1) clockwise or counter-
clockwise. To aim the low and high
beam up or down, turn the driver (2)
clockwise or counterclockwise.
AFLS type
1. Turn off the engine
2. Turn the light switch to the low beam
position.
3. Position the tyres straight ahead with
the steering wheel.
4. Turn on the engine.
5. Inflate the tyres to the specified pres-
sure and remove any loads from the
vehicle except the driver, spare tyre,
and tools.
6. The vehicle should be placed on a flat
floor.
7. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines pass-
ing through respective head lamp cen-
tres) and a horizontal line (Horizontal
line passing through centre of head
lamps) on the screen.
8. With the head lamp and battery in nor-
mal condition, aim the head lamps so
the brightest portion falls on the hori-
zontal and vertical lines.
9. To aim the low beam left or right, turn
the driver (1) clockwise or counter-
clockwise. To aim the low and high
beam up or down, turn the driver (2)
clockwise or counterclockwise.
OVF075110L
765
Maintenance
Front fog light aiming
The front fog lamp can be aimed as the
same manner of the head lamps aiming.
With the front fog lamps and battery nor-
mal condition, aim the front fog lamps. To
aim the front fog lamp up or down, turn
the driver (1) clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
OVF075051L
Maintenance
667
Aiming point
Vehicle
condition
H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 W3
Without
driver
719
(28.3)
691
(27.2)
343
(13.5)
1460
(574.8)
1214
(477.9)
1331
(52.4)
With driver
714
(28.1)
686
(27.0)
338
(13.3)
1460
(574.8)
1214
(477.9)
1331
(52.4)
Unit: mm (in)
Wagon
Vehicle
condition
H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 W3
Without
driver
725
(28.5)
697
(27.4)
348
(13.7)
1460
(574.8)
1214
(477.9)
1331
(52.4)
With driver
720
(28.3)
692
(27.2)
343
(13.5)
1460
(574.8)
1214
(477.9)
1331
(52.4)
Unit: mm (in)
Sedan
OVF075055
H1 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (Low beam)
H2 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (High beam)
H3 : Height between the fog lamp bulb center and ground
W1 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (Low beam)
W2 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (High beam)
W3 : Distance between the two fog lamp bulbs centers
767
Maintenance
OMD051055L
Head lamp low beam (driver’s side)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If head lamp levelling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp levelling device switch with 0 positions.
< 10m Screen >
Maintenance
687
OMD051054L
Head lamp low beam (front passenger’s side)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If head lamp levelling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp levelling device switch with 0 positions.
769
Maintenance
OMD051056L
Front fog light
1. Turn the front fog lamp on without the driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the allowable range (shaded region).
180
< 10m Screen >
Maintenance
707
Side repeater light bulb replace-
ment
If the light bulb does not operate, we rec-
ommend that you checked an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement (wagon)
(1) Stop light
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Back-up light
(4) Tail light
(5) Rear fog light (if equipped)
Outside light
Rear turn signal light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Remove the cover.
OVF071037
OVF071038
OVF071035
OVF071036
771
Maintenance
4. Loosen the light assembly retaining
screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
5. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
6. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
7. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
9. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
10. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Stop and tail light
If the light bulb does not operate, we rec-
ommend that you checked an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
OVF071039
T
T
u
u
r
r
n
n
s
s
i
i
g
g
n
n
a
a
l
l
l
l
i
i
g
g
h
h
t
t
Maintenance
727
Inside light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Remove the service cover using a flat-
blade screwdriver.
Back-up light
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Install the service cover by putting it
into the service hole.
OVF071040
OVF071041L
B
B
a
a
c
c
k
k
-
-
u
u
p
p
l
l
i
i
g
g
h
h
t
t
773
Maintenance
Rear fog light
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
assembly by turning the socket count-
er clockwise until the tabs on the sock-
et align with the slots on the assembly.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
assembly by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the housing.
Push the socket into the assembly and
turn the socket clockwise.
Tail light
If the light bulb does not operate, we rec-
ommend that you checked an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement (sedan)
(1) Stop light
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Back-up light
(4) Tail light
(5) Rear fog light (if equipped)
OVF071041
R
R
e
e
a
a
r
r
f
f
o
o
g
g
l
l
i
i
g
g
h
h
t
t
OVF071060
Maintenance
747
Outside light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the trunk lid.
3. Remove the cover.
4. Loosen the light assembly retaining
screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
5. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
Rear turn signal light
6. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
7. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
9. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
10. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
OVF071039
T
T
u
u
r
r
n
n
s
s
i
i
g
g
n
n
a
a
l
l
l
l
i
i
g
g
h
h
t
t
OVF071037
OVF071038
775
Maintenance
Stop and tail light
If the light bulb does not operate, we rec-
ommend that you checked an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Inside light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the trunk.
3. Loosen the retaining screw of the trunk
lid cover and then remove the cover.
Back-up light
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
OVF071063
B
B
a
a
c
c
k
k
-
-
u
u
p
p
l
l
i
i
g
g
h
h
t
t
OVF071062
Maintenance
767
7. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Reinstall the trunk lid cover by pushing
in the screw.
Rear fog light
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
assembly by turning the socket count-
er clockwise until the tabs on the sock-
et align with the slots on the assembly.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
assembly by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the housing.
Push the socket into the assembly and
turn the socket clockwise.
6. Reinstall the trunk lid cover by pushing
in the screw.
Tail light
If the light bulb does not operate, we rec-
ommend that you checked an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
777
Maintenance
High mounted stop light bulb
replacement
If the light bulb does not operate, we rec-
ommend that you checked an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
License plate light bulb replace-
ment (wagon)
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Loosen the retaining screws with a
philips head screwdriver.
3. Remove the bulb assembly by turning
it counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
5. Install a new bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb assembly securely
with the retaining screws.
License plate light bulb replace-
ment (sedan)
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Remove the lens whilst pushing in the
clip with a slim tool.
3. Remove the bulb assembly by turning
it counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
5. Install a new bulb.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order.
OVF071042
OVF071043
OVF071059
■ Wagon
■ Sedan
OVF071064
Maintenance
787
■ Map lamp
■ Glove box lamp
■ Luggage room lamp
■ Vanity mirror lamp
■ Room lamp
OVF071046/OXM079041/OVF071044/OVF071045/OVF071061/OVF071047/OHG070038
-
-
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
A
A
-
-
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
B
B
-
-
S
S
e
e
d
d
a
a
n
n
-
-
W
W
e
e
g
g
o
o
n
n
779
Maintenance
Interior light bulb replacement
Map lamp, vanity mirror lamp,
room lamp (Type A), luggage room
lamp (wagon) and glove box lamp
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
Room lamp (Type B)
If the light bulb does not operate, we rec-
ommend that you checked an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
Luggage room lamp (sedan)
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Pull out the cover whilst pressing the
clip.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
4. Install a new bulb in the socket.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order.
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the light is off to
avoid burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
Maintenance
807
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure washers,
make sure to maintain sufficient dis-
tance from the vehicle. Insufficient
clearance or excessive pressure can
lead to component damage or water
penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors or its
surrounding area directly with a high
pressure washer. Shock applied from
high pressure water may cause the
device to not operate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or con-
nectors as they may be damaged if
they come into contact with high pres-
sure water.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-
ing, you should wash it after each off-
road trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits.
A mild soap, safe for use on painted sur-
faces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
WARNING - Water on
Brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes whilst driving slowly to see
if they have been affected by water.
If braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly whilst maintaining a slow
forward speed.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do
not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side
windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through the
windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts and lamps, do not clean
with chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
781
Maintenance
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause discol-
oration or paint deterioration.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine com-
partment including high pressure
water washing may cause the fail-
ure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electrical/
electronic components and
airduct inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
OJB037800
Maintenance
827
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preserva-
tive. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may col-
lect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and
frame members have drain holes that
should not be allowed to clog with dirt;
trapped water in these areas can cause
rusting.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes whilst driving slowly to see
if they have been affected by water.
If braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly whilst maintaining a slow
forward speed.
783
Maintenance
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated with a
clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-
ishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum wheels. They
may scratch or damage the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-
gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads. This helps pre-
vent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with high-
speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid deter-
gent. It may damage and corrode the
aluminum wheels coated with a clear
protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corro-
sion, we produce cars of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
car.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unpro-
tected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car is
regularly exposed to corrosive materials,
corrosion protection is particularly impor-
tant. Some of the common causes of
accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when tempera-
tures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the car surfaces by mois-
ture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is
slow to dry and holds moisture in contact
with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dis-
persed. For all these reasons, it is par-
ticularly important to keep your car clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to
the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from get-
ting started by observing the following:
Maintenance
847
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your car clean and free of corrosive
materials. Attention to the underside of
the car is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the compo-
nents under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job; just dampening the accu-
mulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly effec-
tive in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favor-
able environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your car in
the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of cor-
rosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-
ly corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always
remove bird droppings as soon as possi-
ble.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check
under the mats periodically to be sure
the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if
you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
785
Maintenance
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cos-
metic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and
air freshener from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause damage
or discoloration. If they do contact the
interior parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions that follow for the
proper way to clean vinyl.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recom-
mended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its colour can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-
bing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-
tions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-
cle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components
inside the vehicle as this may dam-
age them.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the colour
of the leather may fade or the sur-
face may get stripped off.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
Maintenance
867
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty infor-
mation contained in the Warranty Booklet
in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-
sion control system to meet all emission
regulations.
There are three emission control sys-
tems which are as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporate emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is rec-
ommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by a
HYUNDAI authorised repairer in accor-
dance with the maintenance schedule in
this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-
ing during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability
Program (ESC) system off by press-
ing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is com-
pleted, turn the ESC system back on
by pressing the ESC switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation sys-
tem is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase.This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
2. Evaporate emission control
System
The Evaporate Emission Control System
is designed to prevent fuel vapours from
escaping into the atmosphere.
Canister
Fuel vapours generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapours absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is con-
trolled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-
ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-
es so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warms-
up during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the
engine.
787
Maintenance
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions whilst maintaining
good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could affect
its performance, safety or durability and
may even violate governmental safety
and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification
may not be covered under warranty.
• If you use unauthorised electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage, bat-
tery discharge or fire. For your safety,
do not use unauthorised electric
devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever sus-
pect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-
cle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain car-
bon monoxide (CO). Though
colourless and odourless, it is dan-
gerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
following to avoid CO poisoning.
Maintenance
887
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel requirements"
suggested in section 1.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-
formance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control sys-
tem. We recommend that the system
be inspected by an authorised
HYUNDAI repairer.
• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel cause the
engine to misfire, damaging the cat-
alytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
Diesel particualte filter
Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF
system automatically burns (oxidizes)
and removes the accumulated soot
according to the driving condition. In
other words, the active burning by engine
control system and high exhaust gas
temperature caused by normal/high driv-
ing condition burns and removes the
accumulated soot.
However, if the vehicle continues to be
driven at repeated short distance or driv-
en at low speed for a long time, the accu-
mulated soot may not be automatically
removed because of low exhaust gas
temperature.
More than a certain amount of soot
deposited, the warning message "Check
exhaust system" illuminates and the mal-
function indicator light ( ) blinks.
When the malfunction indicator light
blinks, it may stop blinking by driving the
vehicle at more than 60 km/h (37 mph) or
at more than second gear with 1500 ~
2500 engine rpm for a certain time (for
about 25 minutes).
WARNING - Fire
• A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehi-
cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable
objects, such as dry grass, paper,
leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and catalytic
system are very hot whilst the
engine is running or immediately
after the engine is turned off.
Keep away from the exhaust sys-
tem and catalytic, you may get
burned.
Also, do not remove the heat sink
around the exhaust system, do
not seal the bottom of the vehicle
or do not coat the vehicle for cor-
rosion control. It may present a
fire risk under certain conditions.
789
Maintenance
If the malfunction indicator light ( )
continues to be blinked or the warning
message "Check exhaust system" illumi-
nates in spite of the procedure, please
visit a HYUNDAI authorised repairer and
the check the DPF system.
If you continue to drive with the malfunc-
tion indicator light blinking for a long time,
the DPF system can be damaged and
fuel consumption can be worsen.
Lean NOx Trap (if equipped)
The Lean NOx Trap (LNT) system
removes the nitrogen oxide in the
exhaust gas. The smell can occur in the
exhaust gas depending on the quality of
the fuel and it can degrade NOx reduc-
tion performance, please use the regulat-
ed automotive diesel fuel.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the regu-
lated automotive diesel fuel for
diesel vehicle equipped with the
DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur) and
unspecified additives, it can cause
the DPF system to be damaged and
white smoke can be emitted.
8
Dimensions / 8-2
Engine / 8-2
Bulb wattage / 8-3
Tyres and wheels / 8-4
Tyre load and speed capacity / 8-4
Weight and volume / 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-9
Vehicle certification label / 8-9
Tyre specification and pressure label / 8-10
Engine number / 8-10
Declaration of conformity / 8-11
Specifications & Consumer information
Specifications & Consumer information
28
DIMENSIONS
Item Petrol 1.6 Petrol 2.0 Diesel 1.7
Displacement cu. in
(cc)
97.08
(1591)
121.9
(1999)
102.8
(1685)
Bore x Stroke in.
(mm)
3.03x3.36
(77x85.44)
3.18x3.81
(81x97)
3.04x3.54
(77.2x90)
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders 4, In-line 4, In-line 4, In-line
Item in (mm)
Overall length 187.9 (4775)
Overall width 71.4 (1815)
Overall height 57.8 (1470)
Front tread
205/60R16 62.6 (1591)
215/50R17
62.1 (1579)
225/45R18
Rear tread
205/60R16 62.8 (1597)
215/50R17
62.4 (1585)
225/45R18
Wheelbase 109.0 (2770)
ENGINE
Item in (mm)
Overall length 186.8 (4745)
Overall width 71.4 (1815)
Overall height 57.8 (1470)
Front tread
205/60R16 62.6 (1591)
215/50R17
62.1 (1579)
225/45R18
Rear tread
205/60R16 62.8 (1597)
215/50R17
62.4 (1585)
225/45R18
Wheelbase 109.0 (2770)
■
Sedan
■
Wagon
83
Specifications & Consumer information
BULB WATTAGE
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Front
Headlights
Low 55/35 H7S/D3S
High 60/35 9005/D3S
Static bending light 55 H7L
Dedicated lamp LED LED
Front turn signal lights 21 PY21W
Position lights LED LED
Side repeater lights LED LED
Front fog lights 35 H8L
Rear
Rear fog light 21 H21W
Stop and tail lights (Outside) LED LED
Rear turn signal lights (Outside) 21 PY21W
Tail light (Inside) LED LED
Back-up lights (Inside) 16 W16W
High mounted stop light LED LED
License plate lights 5 W5W
Interior
Map lamps 8 FESTON
Room lamps
Type A 10 FESTON
Type B LED LED
Luggage lamp 5 FESTON
Glove box lamp 5 FESTON
Vanity mirror lamps 5 FESTON
HID : High Intensity Discharge
AFLS : Adaptive Front-Lighting System
Specifications & Consumer information
48
TYRES AND WHEELS
Item Tyre size Wheel size
Inflation pressure bar (psi, kPa)
Wheel lug nut torque
kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)
Normal load Maximum load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tyre
205/60R16 7.0J×16
2.4
(35, 240)
2.4
(35, 240)
2.4
(35, 240)
2.4
(35, 240)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
215/50R17
225/45R18
7.5Jx17
8.0Jx18
2.4
(35, 240)
2.4
(35, 240)
2.4
(35, 240)
2.4
(35, 240)
Compact
spare tyre
T125/80D16
T135/80D17
4.0Tx16
4.0Tx17
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
TYRE LOAD AND SPEED CAPACITY
Item Tyre size Wheel size
Load Capacity Speed Capacity
LI *
1
kg SS *
2
km/h
Full size tyre
205/60R16 7.0J X 16 92 630 V 240
215/50R17 7.5J X 17 95 690 V 240
225/45R18 8.0J X 18 95 690 V 240
Compact spare tyre T135/80D17 4.0T X 17 103 875 M 130
*
1
LI : LOAD INDEX
*
2
SS : SPEED SYMBOL
85
Specifications & Consumer information
WEIGHT AND VOLUME
M/T : Manual transaxle
A/T : Automatic transaxle
Min. : Behind rear seat to upper edge of the seat back.
Max. : Behind front seat to roof.
■
Sedan
■
Wagon
M/T : Manual transaxle
A/T : Automatic transaxle
*
1
: With TyreMobilityKit
*
2
: With spare tyre
Item Gasoline 1.6L Gasoline 2.0L Diesel 1.7L
Gross vehicle weight
kg (lbs.)
M/T 4475 (2030) 4541 (2060) 4696 (2130)
A/T - 4585 (2080) 4739 (2150)
DCT - - 4739 (2150)
Luggage volume
l (cu ft)
Min. 553 (19.5)
Max. 1719 (60.7)
Item Gasoline 1.6L Gasoline 2.0L Diesel 1.7L
Gross vehicle weight
kg (lbs.)
M/T 4365 (1980) 4453 (2020) 4608 (2090)
A/T - 4497 (2040) 4630 (2100)
DCT - - 4630 (2100)
Luggage volume
l (cu ft)
525 (18.5) *
1
/505 (17.8) *
2
Specifications & Consumer information
68
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on 8-7 page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econo-
my by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in
everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
Diesel Particulate Filter
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil
*1 *2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
Petrol
Engine
1.6L GDI
3.6 l (3.16 Imp. qts.)
ACEA A5
2.0L GDI
4.0 l (3.52 Imp. qts.)
2.0L MPI
4.0 l (3.52 Imp. qts.)
API SM, ILSAC GF-4, ACEA A5
Diesel
Engine
1.7L
with DPF *
3
5.3 l (4.67 Imp. qts.)
ACEA C2 or C3
without DPF *
3
5.3 l (4.67 Imp. qts.)
ACEA B4
Manual
transaxle fluid
Petrol
Engine
1.6L
1.6 l ~ 1.7 l
(1.70 ~ 1.80 US qt.)
HK MTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W (H.K.SHELL)
GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)
API GL-4, SAE 70W
2.0L GDI/MPI
1.7 l ~ 1.8 l
(1.80 ~ 1.90 US qt.)
Diesel
Engine
1.7L
High
1.8 l ~ 1.9 l
(1.90 ~ 2.00 US qt.)
Low
1.7 l ~ 1.8 l
(1.80 ~ 1.90 US qt.)
Automatic
transaxle fluid
Petrol Engine
7.1 l (6.25 Imp. qts.)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV,
NOCA ATF SP-IV , HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV
Diesel Engine
7.1 l (6.25 Imp. qts.)
87
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommended Engine oil (For Europe)
Lubricant Volume Classification
Dual clutch
transmission fluid
Diesel Engine 1.7L
1.9 ~ 2.0 l
(2.01 ~ 2.11 Imp. qts.)
HK MTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W (H.K.SHELL)
GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)
API GL-4, SAE 70W
Coolant
Petrol Engine
1.6L
6.8 l (5.98 Imp. qts.)
Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radi-
ator)
2.0L
MT
7.1 l (6.25 Imp. qts.)
AT
GDI
6.8 l (5.98 Imp. qts.)
MPI
6.9 l (6.07 Imp. qts.)
Diesel Engine
6.9 l (6.07 Imp. qts.)
Brake/clutch fluid
0.7~0.8 l
(0.62~0.70 Imp. qts.)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel
70 l (15.40 Imp. gal.)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
Supplier
Product
Gasoline Engine (GDI) Diesel Engine
Shell
HELIX ULTRA AH-E 5W-30
HELIX ULTRA AP 5W-30
HELIX ULTRA AP-L 5W-30
HELIX ULTRA 5W-40
Specifications & Consumer information
88
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operating (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils
can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher
viscosity engine oils are required for sat-
isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those rec-
ommended could result in engine dam-
age.
When choosing an oil, consider the range
of temperature your vehicle will be oper-
ated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil
viscosity from the chart.
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or drain-
ing any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could
be damaged.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Petrol
Engine Oil
°C
(°F)
GDI
MPI
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Diesel
Engine Oil (1.7L)
5W-30
15W-40
10W-30
0W-30
0W-40, 5W-30, 5W-40
5W-20, 5W-30
89
Specifications & Consumer information
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your vehi-
cle and in all legal matters pertaining to
its ownership, etc.
The number is punched into the floor
panel located under the driver seat. To
check the number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard. The number on the
plate can easily be seen through the
windscreen from the outside.
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s (or front passenger’s) side
centre pillar gives the vehicle identifica-
tion number (VIN).
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
OVF081001
Frame number
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OVF081007
OVF081002K
■ Type A
OYN089002
■ VIN label (if equipped)
Specifications & Consumer information
108
The tyres supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best perform-
ance for normal driving.
The tyre label located on the driver's side
centre pillar gives the tyre pressures rec-
ommended for your vehicle.
TYRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER
OVF081002/H
■ Petrol engine (1.6L)
■ Petrol engine (2.0L)
■ Diesel engine (1.7L)
OVF081003/OVF083004/OVF081005
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
811
Specifications & Consumer information
The radio frequency components of the
vehicle comply with requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive
1995/5/EC.
Further information including the manu-
facturer's declaration of conformity is
available on HYUNDAI web site as fol-
lows;
http://service.hyundai-motor.com
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
CE0678
■ Example
